Selected Verses of the Vedas, Acarya's, Bhagavad-gita, Srimad Bhagavatam and Sri Caitanya-caritamrta

March 09, 2020

Selected Verses of the Vedas, Acarya's, Bhagavad-gita, Srimad Bhagavatam and Sri Caitanya-caritamrta

Please sign up for Srimad Bhagavatam Study and a free account at sadhusangaonline.com

For more info click: Srimad Bhagavatam

Svetasvatara Upanisad 6.23

yasya deve parā bhaktir

yathā deve tathā gurau

tasyaite kathitā hy arthāḥ

prakāśante mahātmanaḥ

yasya - unto whom; deve - the Lord; para bhaktir - unflinching devotion; yatha - unto; deve - the Lord; tatha - and; gurau - the spiritual master; tasya - of that; iti - thus; kathita - the Vedas; hi - certainly; arthah - imports; prakasante - revealed; mahatmanah - the great souls.

"Only unto those great souls who have implicit faith in both the Lord and the spiritual master are all the imports of Vedic knowledge automatically revealed."

"Only unto one who has unflinching devotion to the Lord and to the spiritual master does transcendental knowledge become automatically revealed."

Ramayana

aihistam yat tat punar-janma-jayaya

aihistam—desired; yat—which; tat—that; punar—again; janma—birth; jayaya—conquering.

Is everything going well in your endeavor to conquer the repetition of birth and death?

(Visvamitra Muni enquires from King Dasaratha)

Bg. 11.33

तस्मात्त्वमुत्तिष्ठ यशो लभस्वजि

त्वा शत्रून्भुंक्ष्व राज्यं समृद्धम् ।

मयैवैते निहता: पूर्वमेव

निमित्तमात्रं भव सव्यसाचिन् ॥ ३३ ॥

tasmāt tvam uttiṣṭha yaśo labhasva

jitvā śatrūn bhuṅkṣva rājyaṁ samṛddham

mayaivaite nihatāḥ pūrvam eva

nimitta-mātraṁ bhava savya-sācin

Synonyms

tasmāt — therefore; tvam — you; uttiṣṭha — get up; yaśaḥ — fame; labhasva — gain; jitvā — conquering; śatrūn — enemies; bhuṅkṣva — enjoy; rājyam — kingdom; samṛddham — flourishing; mayā — by Me; eva — certainly; ete — all these; nihatāḥ — killed; pūrvam eva — by previous arrangement; nimitta-mātram — just the cause; bhava — become; savya-sācin — O Savyasācī.

Translation

Therefore get up. Prepare to fight and win glory. Conquer your enemies and enjoy a flourishing kingdom. They are already put to death by My arrangement, and you, O Savyasācī, can be but an instrument in the fight.

Purport

Savya-sācin refers to one who can shoot arrows very expertly in the field; thus Arjuna is addressed as an expert warrior capable of delivering arrows to kill his enemies. “Just become an instrument”: nimitta-mātram. This word is also very significant. [...]

MGDas:

sri krsna smaranam mama

sri krsna smaranam nah

Please Krsna remember me

Please Krsna remember us

The Main Thing:

CC Madhya 22.113

smartavyaḥ satataṁ viṣṇur

vismartavyo na jātucit

sarve vidhi-niṣedhāḥ syur

etayor eva kiṅkarāḥ

Synonyms

smartavyaḥ — to be remembered; satatam — always; viṣṇuḥ — Lord Viṣṇu; vismartavyaḥ — to be forgotten; na — not; jātucit — at any time; sarve — all; vidhi-niṣedhāḥ — rules and prohibitions mentioned in the revealed scripture or given by the spiritual master; syuḥ — should be; etayoḥ — of these two principles (always to remember Kṛṣṇa or Viṣṇu and never to forget Him); eva — certainly; kiṅkarāḥ — the servants.

Translation

“ ‘Kṛṣṇa is the origin of Lord Viṣṇu. He should always be remembered and never forgotten at any time. All the rules and prohibitions mentioned in the śāstras should be the servants of these two principles.’

Purport

This verse is a quotation from the Padma Purāṇa.

Purport to SB 2.9.36

"Although everyone is free to consult the revealed scriptures in this connection, one still requires the guidance of a bona fide spiritual master, and that is the direction in this verse."

In the Ādi Purāṇa there is the following statement by Lord Kṛṣṇa Himself, addressed to Arjuna:

“My dear Pārtha, one who claims to be My devotee is not so. Only a person who claims to be the devotee of My devotee is actually My devotee.”

No one can approach the Supreme Personality of Godhead directly. One must approach Him through His pure devotees. Therefore, in the system of Vaiṣṇava activities, the first duty is to accept a devotee as spiritual master and then to render service unto him.

From Nectar of Devotion, Chapter 12 - Further Aspects of Transcendental Service - RENDERING SERVICE TO DEVOTEES

Unknown Source

tena vina trunamapi na calati

Synonyms

tena — by him; vina — without; trunam — grass; api — even; na — not; chalati — move.

Not a blade of grass moves, without the sanction of the Lord

See also

Teachings of Queen Kunti

Dangerous Encounters

Bg. 2.2

श्री भगवानुवाच

कुतस्त्वा कश्मलमिदं विषमे समुपस्थितम् ।

अनार्यजुष्टमस्वर्ग्यकीर्तिकरमर्जुन ॥ २ ॥

śrī-bhagavān uvāca

kutas tvā kaśmalam idaṁ

viṣame samupasthitam

anārya-juṣṭam asvargyam

akīrti-karam arjuna

Synonyms

śrī-bhagavān uvāca — the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; kutaḥ — wherefrom; tvā — unto you; kaśmalam — dirtiness; idam — this lamentation; viṣame — in this hour of crisis; samupasthitam — arrived; anārya — persons who do not know the value of life; juṣṭam — practiced by; asvargyam — which does not lead to higher planets; akīrti — infamy; karam — the cause of; arjuna — O Arjuna.

Translation

The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: My dear Arjuna, how have these impurities come upon you? They are not at all befitting a man who knows the value of life. They lead not to higher planets but to infamy.

Bg. 2.12

न त्वेवाहं जातु नासं न त्वं नेमे जनाधिपाः ।

न चैव नभविष्यामः सर्वे वयमतः परम् ॥ १२ ॥

na tv evāhaṁ jātu nāsaṁ

na tvaṁ neme janādhipāḥ

na caiva na bhaviṣyāmaḥ

sarve vayam ataḥ param

Synonyms

na — never; tu — but; eva — certainly; aham — I; jātu — at any time; na — did not; āsam — exist; na — not; tvam — you; na — not; ime — all these; jana-adhipāḥ — kings; na — never; ca — also; eva — certainly; na — not; bhaviṣyāmaḥ — shall exist; sarve vayam — all of us; ataḥ param — hereafter.

Translation

Never was there a time when I did not exist, nor you, nor all these kings; nor in the future shall any of us cease to be.

Bg. 2.13

देहिनोऽस्मिन्यथा देहे कौमारं यौवनं जरा ।

तथा देहान्तरप्राप्तिर्धीरस्तत्र न मुह्यति ॥ १३ ॥

dehino ’smin yathā dehe

kaumāraṁ yauvanaṁ jarā

tathā dehāntara-prāptir

dhīras tatra na muhyati

Synonyms

dehinaḥ — of the embodied; asmin — in this; yathā — as; dehe — in the body; kaumāram — boyhood; yauvanam — youth; jarā — old age; tathā — similarly; deha-antara — of transference of the body; prāptiḥ — achievement; dhīraḥ — the sober; tatra — thereupon; na — never; muhyati — is deluded.

Translation

As the embodied soul continuously passes, in this body, from boyhood to youth to old age, the soul similarly passes into another body at death. A sober person is not bewildered by such a change.

Bg. 2.14

मात्रास्पर्शास्तु कौन्तेय शीतोष्णसुखदुःखदाः ।

आगमापायिनोऽनित्यास्तांस्तितिक्षस्व भारत ॥ १४ ॥

mātrā-sparśās tu kaunteya

śītoṣṇa-sukha-duḥkha-dāḥ

āgamāpāyino ’nityās

tāṁs titikṣasva bhārata

Synonyms

mātrā-sparśāḥ — sensory perception; tu — only; kaunteya — O son of Kuntī; śīta — winter; uṣṇa — summer; sukha — happiness; duḥkha — and pain; dāḥ — giving; āgama — appearing; apāyinaḥ — disappearing; anityāḥ — nonpermanent; tān — all of them; titikṣasva — just try to tolerate; bhārata — O descendant of the Bharata dynasty.

Translation

O son of Kuntī, the nonpermanent appearance of happiness and distress, and their disappearance in due course, are like the appearance and disappearance of winter and summer seasons. They arise from sense perception, O scion of Bharata, and one must learn to tolerate them without being disturbed.

Bg. 2.38

सुखदुःखे समे कृत्वा लाभालाभौ जयाजयौ ।

ततो युद्धाय युज्यस्व नैवं पापमवाप्स्यसि ॥ ३८ ॥

sukha-duḥkhe same kṛtvā

lābhālābhau jayājayau

tatouage yuddhāya yujyasva

naivaṁ pāpam avāpsyasi

Synonyms

sukha — happiness; duḥkhe — and distress; same — in equanimity; kṛtvā — doing so; lābha-alābhau — both profit and loss; jaya-ajayau — both victory and defeat; tataḥ — thereafter; yuddhāya — for the sake of fighting; yujyasva — engage (fight); na — never; evam — in this way; pāpam — sinful reaction; avāpsyasi — you will gain.

Translation

Do thou fight for the sake of fighting, without considering happiness or distress, loss or gain, victory or defeat – and by so doing you shall never incur sin.

BG 2.39

eṣā te ’bhihitā sāṅkhye

buddhir yoge tv imāṁ śṛṇu

buddhyā yukto yayā pārtha

karma-bandhaṁ prahāsyasi

SYNONYMS

eṣā — all this; te — unto you; abhihitā — described; sāṅkhye — in analytical study; buddhiḥ — intelligence; yoge — in work without fruitive result; tu — but; imām — this; śṛṇu — just hear; buddhyā — by intelligence; yuktaḥ — dovetailed; yayā — by which; pārtha — O son of Pṛthā; karma-bandham — bondage of reaction; prahāsyasi — you can be released from.

TRANSLATION

Thus far I have described this knowledge to you through analytical study. Now listen as I explain it in terms of working without fruitive results. O son of Pṛthā, when you act in such knowledge you can free yourself from the bondage of works.

For reference see also: Lecture by Hridayananda Dasa Goswami Check 1:25:30

Bg. 2.40

नेहाभिक्रमनाशोऽस्ति प्रत्यवायो न विद्यते ।

स्वल्पमप्यस्य धर्मस्य त्रायते महतो भयात् ॥ ४० ॥

nehābhikrama-nāśo ’sti

pratyavāyo na vidyate

sv-alpam apy asya dharmas

yatrāyate mahato bhayāt

Synonyms

na — there is not; iha — in this yoga; abhikrama — in endeavoring; nāśaḥ — loss; asti — there is; pratyavāyaḥ — diminution; na — never; vidyate — there is; su-alpam — a little; api — although; asya — of this; dharmasya — occupation; trāyate — releases; mahataḥ — from very great; bhayāt — danger.

Translation

In this endeavor there is no loss or diminution, and a little advancement on this path can protect one from the most dangerous type of fear.

Bg. 2.41

व्यवसायात्मिका बुद्धिरेकेह कुरूनन्दन ।

बहुशाखा ह्यनन्ताश्च बुद्धयोऽव्यवसायिनाम् ॥ ४१ ॥

vyavasāyātmikā buddhir

ekeha kuru-nandana

bahu-śākhā hy anantāś ca

buddhayo ’vyavasāyinām

Synonyms

vyavasāya-ātmikā — resolute in Kṛṣṇa consciousness; buddhiḥ — intelligence; ekā — only one; iha — in this world; kuru-nandana — O beloved child of the Kurus; bahu-śākhāḥ — having various branches; hi — indeed; anantāḥ — unlimited; ca — also; buddhayaḥ — intelligence; avyavasāyinām — of those who are not in Kṛṣṇa consciousness.

Translation

Those who are on this path are resolute in purpose, and their aim is one. O beloved child of the Kurus, the intelligence of those who are irresolute is many-branched.

Bg. 2.44

भोगैश्वर्यप्रसक्तानां तयापहृतचेतसाम् ।

व्यवसायात्मिका बुद्धिः समाधौ न विधीयते ॥ ४४ ॥

bhogaiśvarya-prasaktānāṁ

tayāpahṛta-cetasām

vyavasāyātmikā buddhiḥ

samādhau na vidhīyate

Synonyms

bhoga — to material enjoyment; aiśvarya — and opulence; prasaktānām — for those who are attached; tayā — by such things; apahṛta-cetasām — bewildered in mind; vyavasāya-ātmikā — fixed in determination; buddhiḥ — devotional service to the Lord; samādhau — in the controlled mind; na — never; vidhīyate — does take place.

Translation

In the minds of those who are too attached to sense enjoyment and material opulence, and who are bewildered by such things, the resolute determination for devotional service to the Supreme Lord does not take place.

Bg. 2.47

कर्मण्येवाधिकारस्ते मा फलेषु कदाचन ।

मा कर्मफलहेतुर्भूर्मा ते सङ्गोऽस्त्वकर्मणि ॥ ४७ ॥

karmaṇy evādhikāras te

mā phaleṣu kadācana

mā karma-phala-hetur bhūr

mā te saṅgo ’stv akarmaṇi

Synonyms

karmaṇi — in prescribed duties; eva — certainly; adhikāraḥ — right; te — of you; mā — never; phaleṣu — in the fruits; kadācana — at any time; mā — never; karma-phala — in the result of the work; hetuḥ — cause; bhūḥ — become; mā — never; te — of you; saṅgaḥ — attachment; astu — there should be; akarmaṇi — in not doing prescribed duties.

Translation

You have a right to perform your prescribed duty, but you are not entitled to the fruits of action. Never consider yourself the cause of the results of your activities, and never be attached to not doing your duty.

Note by MGDAS

The important and famous phrase is:

karmaṇy evādhikāras te

mā phaleṣu kadācana

You have a right to perform your prescribed duty, but you are not entitled to the fruits of action.

Bg. 2.57

यः सर्वत्रानभिस्नेहस्तत्तत्प्राप्य श‍ुभाश‍ुभम् ।

नाभिनन्दति न द्वेष्टि तस्य प्रज्ञा प्रतिष्ठिता ॥ ५७ ॥

yaḥ sarvatrānabhisnehas

tat tat prāpya śubhāśubham

nābhinandati na dveṣṭi

tasya prajñā pratiṣṭhitā

Synonyms

yaḥ — one who; sarvatra — everywhere; anabhisnehaḥ — without affection; tat — that; tat — that; prāpya — achieving; śubha — good; aśubham — evil; na — never; abhinandati — praises; na — never; dveṣṭi — envies; tasya — his; prajñā — perfect knowledge; pratiṣṭhitā — fixed.

Translation

In the material world, one who is unaffected by whatever good or evil he may obtain, neither praising it nor despising it, is firmly fixed in perfect knowledge.

MGDas: See also purport of SB 7.10.14

Bg. 2.59

विषया विनिवर्तन्ते निराहारस्य देहिनः ।

रसवर्जं रसोऽप्यस्य परं दृष्ट्वा निवर्तते ॥ ५९ ॥

viṣayā vinivartante

nirāhārasya dehinaḥ

rasa-varjaṁ raso ’py asya

paraṁ dṛṣṭvā nivartate

Synonyms

viṣayāḥ — objects for sense enjoyment; vinivartante — are practiced to be refrained from; nirāhārasya — by negative restrictions; dehinaḥ — for the embodied; rasa-varjam — giving up the taste; rasaḥ — sense of enjoyment; api — although there is; asya — his; param — far superior things; dṛṣṭvā — by experiencing; nivartate — he ceases from.

Translation

Though the embodied soul may be restricted from sense enjoyment, the taste for sense objects remains. But, ceasing such engagements by experiencing a higher taste, he is fixed in consciousness.

Bg. 2.61

तानि सर्वाणि संयम्य युक्त आसीत मत्परः ।

वशे हि यस्येन्द्रियाणि तस्य प्रज्ञा प्रतिष्ठिता ॥ ६१ ॥

tāni sarvāṇi saṁyamya

yukta āsīta mat-paraḥ

vaśe hi yasyendriyāṇi

tasya prajñā pratiṣṭhitā

Synonyms

tāni — those senses; sarvāṇi — all; saṁyamya — keeping under control; yuktaḥ — engaged; āsīta — should be situated; mat-paraḥ — in relationship with Me; vaśe — in full subjugation; hi — certainly; yasya — one whose; indriyāṇi — senses; tasya — his; prajñā — consciousness; pratiṣṭhitā — fixed.

Translation

One who restrains his senses, keeping them under full control, and fixes his consciousness upon Me, is known as a man of steady intelligence.

Bg. 2.62

ध्यायतो विषयान्पुंसः सङ्गस्तेषूपजायते ।

सङ्गात्सञ्जायते कामः कामात्क्रोधोऽभिजायते ॥ ६२ ॥

dhyāyato viṣayān puṁsaḥ

saṅgas teṣūpajāyate

saṅgāt sañjāyate kāmaḥ

kāmāt krodho ’bhijāyate

Synonyms

dhyāyataḥ — while contemplating; viṣayān — sense objects; puṁsaḥ — of a person; saṅgaḥ — attachment; teṣu — in the sense objects; upajāyate — develops; saṅgāt — from attachment; sañjāyate — develops; kāmaḥ — desire; kāmāt — from desire; krodhaḥ — anger; abhijāyate — becomes manifest.

Translation

While contemplating the objects of the senses, a person develops attachment for them, and from such attachment lust develops, and from lust anger arises.

Bg. 2.63

क्रोधाद्भ‍वति सम्मोहः सम्मोहात्स्मृतिविभ्रमः ।

स्मृतिभ्रंशाद्बुद्धिनाशो बुद्धिनाशात्प्रणश्यति ॥ ६३ ॥

krodhād bhavati sammohaḥsammohāt smṛti-vibhramaḥsmṛti-bhraṁśād buddhi-nāśobuddhi-nāśāt praṇaśyati

Synonyms

krodhāt — from anger; bhavati — takes place; sammohaḥ — perfect illusion; sammohāt — from illusion; smṛti — of memory; vibhramaḥ — bewilderment; smṛti-bhraṁśāt — after bewilderment of memory; buddhi-nāśaḥ — loss of intelligence; buddhi-nāśāt — and from loss of intelligence; praṇaśyati — one falls down.

Translation

From anger, complete delusion arises, and from delusion bewilderment of memory. When memory is bewildered, intelligence is lost, and when intelligence is lost one falls down again into the material pool.

Bg. 3.14

अन्नाद्भ‍वन्ति भूतानि पर्जन्यादन्नसम्भवः ।

यज्ञा‍द्भ‍‍वति पर्जन्यो यज्ञः कर्मसमुद्भ‍वः ॥ १४ ॥

annād bhavanti bhūtāni

parjanyād anna-sambhavaḥ

yajñād bhavati parjanyo

yajñaḥ karma-samudbhavaḥ

Synonyms

annāt — from grains; bhavanti — grow; bhūtāni — the material bodies; parjanyāt — from rains; anna — of food grains; sambhavaḥ — production; yajñāt — from the performance of sacrifice; bhavati — becomes possible; parjanyaḥ — rain; yajñaḥ — performance of yajña; karma — prescribed duties; samudbhavaḥ — born of.

Translation

All living bodies subsist on food grains, which are produced from rains. Rains are produced by performance of yajña [sacrifice], and yajña is born of prescribed duties.

Purport

[...] When there is an epidemic disease, an antiseptic vaccine protects a person from the attack of such an epidemic. [...]

Bg. 3.21

यद्यदाचरति श्रेष्ठस्तत्तदेवेतरो जनः ।

स यत्प्रमाणं कुरुते लोकस्तदनुवर्तते ॥ २१ ॥

yad yad ācarati śreṣṭhastat

tad evetaro janaḥ

sa yat pramāṇaṁ kurute

lokas tad anuvartate

Synonyms

yat yat — whatever; ācarati — he does; śreṣṭhaḥ — a respectable leader; tat — that; tat — and that alone; eva — certainly; itaraḥ — common; janaḥ — person; saḥ — he; yat — whichever; pramāṇam — example; kurute — does perform; lokaḥ — all the world; tat — that; anuvartate — follows in the footsteps.

Translation

Whatever action a great man performs, common men follow. And whatever standards he sets by exemplary acts, all the world pursues.

Bg. 3.27

प्रकृतेः क्रियमाणानि गुणैः कर्माणि सर्वशः ।

अहङ्कारविमूढात्मा कर्ताहमिति मन्यते ॥ २७ ॥

prakṛteḥ kriyamāṇāni

guṇaiḥ karmāṇi sarvaśaḥ

ahaṅkāra-vimūḍhātmā

kartāham iti manyate

Synonyms

prakṛteḥ — of material nature; kriyamāṇāni — being done; guṇaiḥ — by the modes; karmāṇi — activities; sarvaśaḥ — all kinds of; ahaṅkāra-vimūḍha — bewildered by false ego; ātmā — the spirit soul; kartā — doer; aham — I; iti — thus; manyate — he thinks.

Translation

The spirit soul bewildered by the influence of false ego thinks himself the doer of activities that are in actuality carried out by the three modes of material nature.

Bg. 3.33

सदृशं चेष्टते स्वस्याः प्रकृतेर्ज्ञानवानपि ।

प्रकृतिं यान्ति भूतानि निग्रहः किं करिष्यति ॥ ३३ ॥

sadṛśaṁ ceṣṭate svasyāḥ

prakṛter jñānavān api

prakṛtiṁ yānti bhūtāni

nigrahaḥ kiṁ kariṣyati

Synonyms

sadṛśam — accordingly; ceṣṭate — tries; svasyāḥ — by his own; prakṛteḥ — modes of nature; jñāna-vān — learned; api — although; prakṛtim — nature; yānti — undergo; bhūtāni — all living entities; nigrahaḥ — repression; kim — what; kariṣyati — can do.

Translation

Even a man of knowledge acts according to his own nature, for everyone follows the nature he has acquired from the three modes. What can repression accomplish?

Bg. 3.37

श्री भगवानुवाचकाम एष क्रोध एष रजोगुणसमुद्भ‍वः ।

महाशनो महापाप्मा विद्ध्येनमिह वैरिणम् ॥ ३७ ॥

śrī-bhagavān uvāca

kāma eṣa krodha eṣa

rajo-guṇa-samudbhavaḥ

mahāśano mahā-pāpmā

viddhy enam iha vairiṇam

Synonyms

śri-bhagavān uvāca — the Personality of Godhead said; kāmaḥ — lust; eṣaḥ — this; krodhaḥ — wrath; eṣaḥ — this; rajaḥ-guṇa — the mode of passion; samudbhavaḥ — born of; mahā-aśanaḥ — all-devouring; mahā-pāpmā — greatly sinful; viddhi — know; enam — this; iha — in the material world; vairiṇam — greatest enemy.

Translation

The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: It is lust only, Arjuna, which is born of contact with the material mode of passion and later transformed into wrath, and which is the all-devouring sinful enemy of this world.

BG 3.42
indriyāṇi parāṇy āhur

indriyebhyaḥ paraṁ manaḥ

manasas tu parā buddhir

yo buddheḥ paratas tu saḥ

SYNONYMS

indriyāṇi — senses; parāṇi — superior; āhuḥ — are said; indriyebhyaḥ — more than the senses; param — superior; manaḥ — the mind; manasaḥ — more than the mind; tu — also; parā — superior; buddhiḥ — intelligence; yaḥ — who; buddheḥ — more than the intelligence; parataḥ — superior; tu — but; saḥ — he.

TRANSLATION

The working senses are superior to dull matter; mind is higher than the senses; intelligence is still higher than the mind; and he [the soul] is even higher than the intelligence.

PURPORT

[...] In the Kaṭha Upaniṣad there is a similar passage, in which it is said that the objects of sense gratification are superior to the senses, and mind is superior to the sense objects. If, therefore, the mind is directly engaged in the service of the Lord constantly, then there is no chance that the senses will become engaged in other ways. This mental attitude has already been explained. Paraṁ dṛṣṭvā nivartate. [...]

Bg. 4.1

श्रीभगवानुवाचइमं विवस्वते योगं प्रोक्तवानहमव्ययम् ।

विवस्वान्मनवे प्राह मनुरिक्ष्वाकवेऽब्रवीत् ॥ १ ॥

śrī-bhagavān uvāca

imaṁ vivasvate yogaṁ

proktavān aham avyayam

vivasvān manave prāha

manur ikṣvākave ’bravīt

Synonyms

śrī-bhagavān uvāca — the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; imam — this; vivasvate — unto the sun-god; yogam — the science of one’s relationship to the Supreme; proktavān — instructed; aham — I; avyayam — imperishable; vivasvān — Vivasvān (the sun-god’s name); manave — unto the father of mankind (of the name Vaivasvata); prāha — told; manuḥ — the father of mankind; ikṣvākave — unto King Ikṣvāku; abravīt — said.

Translation

The Personality of Godhead, Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa, said: I instructed this imperishable science of yoga to the sun-god, Vivasvān, and Vivasvān instructed it to Manu, the father of mankind, and Manu in turn instructed it to Ikṣvāku.

Bg 4.2

एवं परम्पराप्राप्तमिमं राजर्षयो विदुः ।

स कालेनेह महता योगे नष्टः परन्तप ॥ २ ॥

evaṁ paramparā-prāptam

imaṁ rājarṣayo viduḥ

sa kāleneha mahatā

yogo naṣṭaḥ paran-tapa

Synonyms

evam — thus; paramparā — by disciplic succession; prāptam — received; imam — this science; rāja-ṛṣayaḥ — the saintly kings; viduḥ — understood; saḥ — that knowledge; kālena — in the course of time; iha — in this world; mahatā — great; yogaḥ — the science of one’s relationship with the Supreme; naṣṭaḥ — scattered; param-tapa — O Arjuna, subduer of the enemies.

Translation

This supreme science was thus received through the chain of disciplic succession, and the saintly kings understood it in that way. But in course of time the succession was broken, and therefore the science as it is appears to be lost.

Bg. 4.3

स एवायं मया तेऽद्य योगः प्रोक्तः पुरातनः ।

भक्तोऽसि मे सखा चेति रहस्यं ह्येतदुत्तमम् ॥ ३ ॥

sa evāyaṁ mayā te ’dya

yogaḥ proktaḥ purātanaḥ

bhakto ’si me sakhā ceti

rahasyaṁ hy etad uttamam

Synonyms

saḥ — the same; eva — certainly; ayam — this; mayā — by Me; te — unto you; adya — today; yogaḥ — the science of yoga; proktaḥ — spoken; purātanaḥ — very old; bhaktaḥ — devotee; asi — you are; me — My; sakhā — friend; ca — also; iti — therefore; rahasyam — mystery; hi — certainly; etat — this; uttamam — transcendental.

Translation

That very ancient science of the relationship with the Supreme is today told by Me to you because you are My devotee as well as My friend and can therefore understand the transcendental mystery of this science.

Bg. 4.7

यदा यदा हि धर्मस्य ग्लानिर्भवति भारत ।

अभ्युत्थानमधर्मस्य तदात्मानं सृजाम्यहम् ॥ ७ ॥

yadā yadā hi dharmasya

glānir bhavati bhārata

abhyutthānam adharmasya

tadātmānaṁ sṛjāmy aham

Synonyms

yadā yadā — whenever and wherever; hi — certainly; dharmasya — of religion; glāniḥ — discrepancies; bhavati — become manifested; bhārata — O descendant of Bharata; abhyutthānam — predominance; adharmasya — of irreligion; tadā — at that time; ātmānam — self; sṛjāmi — manifest; aham — I.

Translation

Whenever and wherever there is a decline in religious practice, O descendant of Bharata, and a predominant rise of irreligion – at that time I descend Myself.

Bg. 4.8

परित्राणाय साधुनां विनाशाय च दुष्कृताम् ।

धर्मसंस्थानार्थाय सम्भवामि युगे युगे ॥ ८ ॥

paritrāṇāya sādhūnāṁ

vināśāya ca duṣkṛtām

dharma-saṁsthāpanārthāya

sambhavāmi yuge yuge

Synonyms

paritrāṇāya — for the deliverance; sādhūnām — of the devotees; vināśāya — for the annihilation; ca — and; duṣkṛtām — of the miscreants; dharma — principles of religion; saṁsthāpana-arthāya — to reestablish; sambhavāmi — I do appear; yuge — millennium; yuge — after millennium.

Translation

To deliver the pious and to annihilate the miscreants, as well as to reestablish the principles of religion, I Myself appear, millennium after millennium.

Bg. 4.11

ये यथा मां प्रपद्यन्ते तांस्तथैव भजाम्यहम् ।

मम वर्त्मानुवर्तन्ते मनुष्याः पार्थ सर्वशः ॥ ११ ॥

ye yathā māṁ prapadyante

tāṁs tathaiva bhajāmy aham

mama vartmānuvartante

manuṣyāḥ pārtha sarvaśaḥ

Synonyms

ye — all who; yathā — as; mām — unto Me; prapadyante — surrender; tān — them; tathā — so; eva — certainly; bhajāmi — reward; aham — I; mama — My; vartma — path; anuvartante — follow; manuṣyāḥ — all men; pārtha — O son of Pṛthā; sarvaśaḥ — in all respects.

Translation

As all surrender unto Me, I reward them accordingly. Everyone follows My path in all respects, O son of Pṛthā.

Bg. 4.34

तद्विद्धि प्रणिपातेन परिप्रश्न‍ेन सेवया ।

उपदेक्ष्यन्ति ते ज्ञानं ज्ञानिनस्तत्त्वदर्शिनः ॥ ३४ ॥

tad viddhi praṇipātena

paripraśnena sevayā

upadekṣyanti te jñānaṁ

jñāninas tattva-darśinaḥ

Synonyms

tat — that knowledge of different sacrifices; viddhi — try to understand; praṇipātena — by approaching a spiritual master; paripraśnena — by submissive inquiries; sevayā — by the rendering of service; upadekṣyanti — they will initiate; te — you; jñānam — into knowledge; jñāninaḥ — the self-realized; tattva — of the truth; darśinaḥ — seers.

Translation

Just try to learn the truth by approaching a spiritual master. Inquire from him submissively and render service unto him. The self-realized souls can impart knowledge unto you because they have seen the truth.

BG 5.4
sāṅkhya-yogau pṛthag bālāḥ

pravadanti na paṇḍitāḥ

ekam apy āsthitaḥ samyag

ubhayor vindate phalam

SYNONYMS

sāṅkhya — analytical study of the material world; yogau — work in devotional service; pṛthak — different; bālāḥ — the less intelligent; pravadanti — say; na — never; paṇḍitāḥ — the learned; ekam — in one; api — even; āsthitaḥ — being situated; samyak — complete; ubhayoḥ — of both; vindate — enjoys; phalam — the result.

TRANSLATION

Only the ignorant speak of devotional service [karma-yoga] as being different from the analytical study of the material world [Sāṅkhya]. Those who are actually learned say that he who applies himself well to one of these paths achieves the results of both.

Bg. 5.18

विद्याविनयसम्पन्ने ब्राह्मणे गवि हस्तिनि ।

श‍ुनि चैव श्वपाके च पण्डिता: समदर्शिन: ॥ १८ ॥

vidyā-vinaya-sampanne

brāhmaṇe gavi hastini

śuni caiva śva-pāke ca

paṇḍitāḥ sama-darśinaḥ

Synonyms

vidyā — with education; vinaya — and gentleness; sampanne — fully equipped; brāhmaṇe — in the brāhmaṇa; gavi — in the cow; hastini — in the elephant; śuni — in the dog; ca — and; eva — certainly; śva-pāke — in the dog-eater (the outcaste); ca — respectively; paṇḍitāḥ — those who are wise; sama-darśinaḥ — who see with equal vision.

Translation

The humble sages, by virtue of true knowledge, see with equal vision a learned and gentle brāhmaṇa, a cow, an elephant, a dog and a dog-eater [outcaste].

Bg. 5.23

शक्न‍ोतीहैव य: सोढुं प्राक्शरीरविमोक्षणात् ।

कामक्रोधोद्भ‍वं वेगं स युक्त: स सुखी नर: ॥ २३ ॥

śaknotīhaiva yaḥ soḍhuṁ

prāk śarīra-vimokṣaṇāt

kāma-krodhodbhavaṁ vegaṁ

sa yuktaḥ sa sukhī naraḥ

Synonyms

śaknoti — is able; iha eva — in the present body; yaḥ — one who; soḍhum — to tolerate; prāk — before; śarīra — the body; vimokṣaṇāt — giving up; kāma — desire; krodha — and anger; udbhavam — generated from; vegam — urges; saḥ — he; yuktaḥ — in trance; saḥ — he; sukhī — happy; naraḥ — human being.

Translation

Before giving up this present body, if one is able to tolerate the urges of the material senses and check the force of desire and anger, he is well situated and is happy in this world.

Bg. 5.29

भोक्तारं यज्ञतपसां सर्वलोकमहेश्वरम् ।

सुहृदं सर्वभूतानां ज्ञात्वा मां शान्तिमृच्छति ॥ २९ ॥

bhoktāraṁ yajña-tapasāṁ

sarva-loka-maheśvaram

suhṛdaṁ sarva-bhūtānāṁ

jñātvā māṁ śāntim ṛcchati

Synonyms

bhoktāram — the beneficiary; yajña — of sacrifices; tapasām — and penances and austerities; sarva-loka — of all planets and the demigods thereof; mahā-īśvaram — the Supreme Lord; su-hṛdam — the benefactor; sarva — of all; bhūtānām — the living entities; jñātvā — thus knowing; mām — Me (Lord Kṛṣṇa); śāntim — relief from material pangs; ṛcchati — one achieves.

Translation

A person in full consciousness of Me, knowing Me to be the ultimate beneficiary of all sacrifices and austerities, the Supreme Lord of all planets and demigods, and the benefactor and well-wisher of all living entities, attains peace from the pangs of material miseries.

BG 6.16

नात्यश्न‍तस्तु योगोऽस्ति न चैकान्तमनश्न‍त: ।

न चातिस्वप्‍नशीलस्य जाग्रतो नैव चार्जुन ॥ १६ ॥

nāty-aśnatas tu yogo ’sti

na caikāntam anaśnataḥ

na cāti-svapna-śīlasya

jāgrato naiva cārjuna

Synonyms

na — never; ati — too much; aśnataḥ — of one who eats; tu — but; yogaḥ — linking with the Supreme; asti — there is; na — nor; ca — also; ekāntam — overly; anaśnataḥ — abstaining from eating; na — nor; ca — also; ati — too much; svapna-śīlasya — of one who sleeps; jāgrataḥ — or one who keeps night watch too much; na — not; eva — ever; ca — and; arjuna — O Arjuna.

Translation

There is no possibility of one’s becoming a yogī, O Arjuna, if one eats too much or eats too little, sleeps too much or does not sleep enough.

Bg. 6.30

यो मां पश्यति सर्वत्र सर्वं च मयि पश्यति ।

तस्याहं न प्रणश्यामि स च मे न प्रणश्यति ॥ ३० ॥

yo māṁ paśyati sarvatra

sarvaṁ ca mayi paśyati

tasyāhaṁ na praṇaśyāmi

sa ca me na praṇaśyati

Synonyms

yaḥ — whoever; mām — Me; paśyati — sees; sarvatra — everywhere; sarvam — everything; ca — and; mayi — in Me; paśyati — sees; tasya — for him; aham — I; na — not; praṇaśyāmi — am lost; saḥ — he; ca — also; me — to Me; na — nor; praṇaśyati — is lost.

Translation

For one who sees Me everywhere and sees everything in Me, I am never lost, nor is he ever lost to Me.

BG 6.45

prayatnād yatamānas tu

yogī saṁśuddha-kilbiṣaḥ

aneka-janma-saṁsiddhas

tato yāti parāṁ gatim

SYNONYMS

prayatnāt — by rigid practice; yatamānaḥ — endeavoring; tu — and; yogī — such a transcendentalist; saṁśuddha — washed off; kilbiṣaḥ — all of whose sins; aneka — after many, many; janma — births; saṁsiddhaḥ — having achieved perfection; tataḥ — thereafter; yāti — attains; parām — the highest; gatim — destination.

TRANSLATION

And when the yogī engages himself with sincere endeavor in making further progress, being washed of all contaminations, then ultimately, achieving perfection after many, many births of practice, he attains the supreme goal.

BG 6.47

योगिनामपि सर्वेषां मद्ग‍तेनान्तरात्मना ।

श्रद्धावान्भजते यो मां स मे युक्ततमो मत: ॥ ४७ ॥

yoginām api sarveṣāṁ

mad-gatenāntar-ātmanā

śraddhāvān bhajate yo māṁ

sa me yukta-tamo mataḥ

Synonyms

yoginām — of yogīs; api — also; sarveṣām — all types of; mat-gatena — abiding in Me, always thinking of Me; antaḥ-ātmanā — within himself; śraddhā-vān — in full faith; bhajate — renders transcendental loving service; yaḥ — one who; mām — to Me (the Supreme Lord); saḥ — he; me — by Me;

yukta-tamaḥ — the greatest yogī; mataḥ — is considered.

Translation

And of all yogīs, the one with great faith who always abides in Me, thinks of Me within himself and renders transcendental loving service to Me – he is the most intimately united with Me in yoga and is the highest of all. That is My opinion.

BG 7.3

manuṣyāṇāṁ sahasreṣu

kaścid yatati siddhaye

yatatām api siddhānāṁ

kaścin māṁ vetti tattvataḥ

Synonyms

manuṣyāṇām — of men; sahasreṣu — out of many thousands; kaścit — someone; yatati — endeavors; siddhaye — for perfection; yatatām — of those so endeavoring; api — indeed; siddhānām — of those who have achieved perfection; kaścit — someone; mām — Me; vetti — does know; tattvataḥ — in fact.

Translation

Out of many thousands among men, one may endeavor for perfection, and of those who have achieved perfection, hardly one knows Me in truth.

Bg. 7.4

भूमिरापोऽनलो वायु: खं मनो बुद्धिरेव च ।

अहङ्कार इतीयं मे भिन्ना प्रकृतिरष्टधा ॥ ४ ॥

bhūmir āpo ’nalo vāyuḥ

khaṁ mano buddhir eva ca

ahaṅkāra itīyaṁ me

bhinnā prakṛtir aṣṭadhā

Synonyms

bhūmiḥ — earth; āpaḥ — water; analaḥ — fire; vāyuḥ — air; kham — ether; manaḥ — mind; buddhiḥ — intelligence; eva — certainly; ca — and; ahaṅkāraḥ — false ego; iti — thus; iyam — all these; me — My; bhinnā — separated; prakṛtiḥ — energies; aṣṭadhā — eightfold.

Translation

Earth, water, fire, air, ether, mind, intelligence and false ego – all together these eight constitute My separated material energies.

Bg. 7.5

अपरेयमितस्त्वन्यां प्रकृतिं विद्धि मे पराम् ।

जीवभूतां महाबाहो ययेदं धार्यते जगत् ॥ ५ ॥

apareyam itas tv anyāṁ

prakṛtiṁ viddhi me parām

jīva-bhūtāṁ mahā-bāho

yayedaṁ dhāryate jagat

Synonyms

aparā — inferior; iyam — this; itaḥ — besides this; tu — but; anyām — another; prakṛtim — energy; viddhi — just try to understand; me — My; parām — superior; jīva-bhūtām — comprising the living entities; mahā-bāho — O mighty-armed one; yayā — by whom; idam — this; dhāryate — is utilized or exploited; jagat — the material world.

Translation

Besides these, O mighty-armed Arjuna, there is another, superior energy of Mine, which comprises the living entities who are exploiting the resources of this material, inferior nature.

Bg. 7.8

रसोऽहमप्सु कौन्तेय प्रभास्मि शशिसूर्ययो: ।

प्रणव: सर्ववेदेषु शब्द: खे पौरुषं नृषु ॥ ८ ॥

raso ’ham apsu kaunteya

prabhāsmi śaśi-sūryayoḥ

praṇavaḥ sarva-vedeṣu

śabdaḥ khe pauruṣaṁ nṛṣu

Synonyms

rasaḥ — taste; aham — I; apsu — in water; kaunteya — O son of Kuntī; prabhā — the light; asmi — I am; śaśi-sūryayoḥ — of the moon and the sun; praṇavaḥ — the three letters a-u-m; sarva — in all; vedeṣu — the Vedas; śabdaḥ — sound vibration; khe — in the ether; pauruṣam — ability; nṛṣu — in men.

Translation

O son of Kuntī, I am the taste of water, the light of the sun and the moon, the syllable oṁ in the Vedic mantras; I am the sound in ether and ability in man.

Bg. 7.9

पुण्यो गन्ध: पृथिव्यां च तेजश्चास्मि विभावसौ ।

जीवनं सर्वभूतेषु तपश्चास्मि तपस्विषु ॥ ९ ॥

puṇyo gandhaḥ pṛthivyāṁ ca

tejaś cāsmi vibhāvasau

jīvanaṁ sarva-bhūteṣut

apaś cāsmi tapasviṣu

Synonyms

puṇyaḥ — original; gandhaḥ — fragrance; pṛthivyām — in the earth; ca — also; tejaḥ — heat; ca — also; asmi — I am; vibhāvasau — in the fire; jīvanam — life; sarva — in all; bhūteṣu — living entities; tapaḥ — penance; ca — also; asmi — I am; tapasviṣu — in those who practice penance.

Translation

I am the original fragrance of the earth, and I am the heat in fire. I am the life of all that lives, and I am the penances of all ascetics.

Bg. 7.10

बीजं मां सर्वभूतानां विद्धि पार्थ सनातनम् ।

बुद्धिर्बुद्धिमतामस्मि तेजस्तेजस्विनामहम् ॥ १० ॥

bījaṁ māṁ sarva-bhūtānāṁ

viddhi pārtha sanātanam

buddhir buddhimatām asmi

tejas tejasvinām aham

Synonyms

bījam — the seed; mām — Me; sarva-bhūtānām — of all living entities; viddhi — try to understand; pārtha — O son of Pṛthā; sanātanam — original, eternal; buddhiḥ — intelligence; buddhi-matām — of the intelligent; asmi — I am; tejaḥ — prowess; tejasvinām — of the powerful; aham — I am.

Translation

O son of Pṛthā, know that I am the original seed of all existences, the intelligence of the intelligent, and the prowess of all powerful men.

Bg. 7.11

बलं बलवतां चाहं कामरागविवर्जितम् ।

धर्माविरुद्धो भूतेषु कामोऽस्मि भरतर्षभ ॥ ११ ॥

balaṁ balavatāṁ cāhaṁ

kāma-rāga-vivarjitam

dharmāviruddho bhūteṣu

kāmo ’smi bharatarṣabha

Synonyms

balam — strength; bala-vatām — of the strong; ca — and; aham — I am; kāma — passion; rāga — and attachment; vivarjitam — devoid of; dharma-aviruddhaḥ — not against religious principles; bhūteṣu — in all beings; kāmaḥ — sex life; asmi — I am; bharata-ṛṣabha — O lord of the Bhāratas.

Translation

I am the strength of the strong, devoid of passion and desire. I am sex life which is not contrary to religious principles, O lord of the Bhāratas [Arjuna].

Bg. 7.12

ये चैव सात्त्विका भावा राजसास्तामसाश्च ये ।

मत्त एवेति तान्विद्धि न त्वहं तेषु ते मयि ॥ १२ ॥

ye caiva sāttvikā bhāvā

rājasās tāmasāś ca ye

matta eveti tān viddhi

na tv ahaṁ teṣu te mayi

Synonyms

ye — all which; ca — and; eva — certainly; sāttvikāḥ — in goodness; bhāvāḥ — states of being; rājasāḥ — in the mode of passion; tāmasāḥ — in the mode of ignorance; ca — also; ye — all which; mattaḥ — from Me; eva — certainly; iti — thus; tān — those; viddhi — try to know; na — not; tu — but; aham — I; teṣu — in them; te — they; mayi — in Me.

Translation

Know that all states of being – be they of goodness, passion or ignorance – are manifested by My energy. I am, in one sense, everything, but I am independent. I am not under the modes of material nature, for they, on the contrary, are within Me.

Bg. 7.13

त्रिभिर्गुणमयैर्भावैरेभि: सर्वमिदं जगत् ।

मोहितं नाभिजानाति मामेभ्य: परमव्ययम् ॥ १३ ॥

tribhir guṇa-mayair bhāvair

ebhiḥ sarvam idaṁ jagat

mohitaṁ nābhijānāti

mām ebhyaḥ param avyayam

Synonyms

tribhiḥ — three; guṇa-mayaiḥ — consisting of the guṇas; bhāvaiḥ — by the states of being; ebhiḥ — all these; sarvam — whole; idam — this; jagat — universe; mohitam — deluded; na abhijānāti — does not know; mām — Me; ebhyaḥ — above these; param — the Supreme; avyayam — inexhaustible.

Translation

Deluded by the three modes [goodness, passion and ignorance], the whole world does not know Me, who am above the modes and inexhaustible.

Bg. 7.14

दैवी ह्येषा गुणमयी मम माया दुरत्यया ।

मामेव ये प्रपद्यन्ते मायामेतां तरन्ति ते ॥ १४ ॥

daivī hy eṣā guṇa-mayī

mama māyā duratyayā

mām eva ye prapadyante

māyām etāṁ taranti te

Synonyms

daivī — transcendental; hi — certainly; eṣā — this; guṇa-mayī — consisting of the three modes of material nature; mama — My; māyā — energy; duratyayā — very difficult to overcome; mām — unto Me; eva — certainly; ye — those who; prapadyante — surrender; māyām etām — this illusory energy; taranti — overcome; te — they.

Translation

This divine energy of Mine, consisting of the three modes of material nature, is difficult to overcome. But those who have surrendered unto Me can easily cross beyond it.

Bg. 7.15

न मां दुष्कृतिनो मूढा: प्रपद्यन्ते नराधमा: ।

माययापहृतज्ञाना आसुरं भावमाश्रिता: ॥ १५ ॥

na māṁ duṣkṛtino mūḍhāḥ

prapadyante narādhamāḥ

māyayāpahṛta-jñānā

āsuraṁ bhāvam āśritāḥ

Synonyms

na — not; mām — unto Me; duṣkṛtinaḥ — miscreants; mūḍhāḥ — foolish; prapadyante — surrender; nara-adhamāḥ — lowest among mankind; māyayā — by the illusory energy; apahṛta — stolen; jñānāḥ — whose knowledge; āsuram — demonic; bhāvam — nature; āśritāḥ — accepting.

Translation

Those miscreants who are grossly foolish, who are lowest among mankind, whose knowledge is stolen by illusion, and who partake of the atheistic nature of demons do not surrender unto Me.

Bg. 7.16

चतुर्विधा भजन्ते मां जना: सुकृतिनोऽर्जुन ।

आर्तो जिज्ञासुरर्थार्थी ज्ञानी च भरतर्षभ ॥ १६ ॥

catur-vidhā bhajante māṁ

janāḥ su-kṛtino ’rjuna

ārto jijñāsur arthārthī

jñānī ca bharatarṣabha

Synonyms

catuḥ-vidhāḥ — four kinds of; bhajante — render services; mām — unto Me; janāḥ — persons; su-kṛtinaḥ — those who are pious; arjuna — O Arjuna; ārtaḥ — the distressed; jijñāsuḥ — the inquisitive; artha-arthī — one who desires material gain; jñānī — one who knows things as they are; ca — also; bharata-ṛṣabha — O great one amongst the descendants of Bharata.

Translation

O best among the Bhāratas, four kinds of pious men begin to render devotional service unto Me – the distressed, the desirer of wealth, the inquisitive, and he who is searching for knowledge of the Absolute.

Bg. 7.17

तेषां ज्ञानी नित्ययुक्त एकभक्तिर्विशिष्यते ।

प्रियो हि ज्ञानिनोऽत्यर्थमहं स च मम प्रिय: ॥ १७ ॥

teṣāṁ jñānī nitya-yukta

eka-bhaktir viśiṣyate

priyo hi jñānino ’tyartham

ahaṁ sa ca mama priyaḥ

Synonyms

teṣām — out of them; jñānī — one in full knowledge; nitya-yuktaḥ — always engaged; eka — only; bhaktiḥ — in devotional service; viśiṣyate — is special; priyaḥ — very dear; hi — certainly; jñāninaḥ — to the person in knowledge; atyartham — highly; aham — I am; saḥ — he; ca — also; mama — to Me; priyaḥ — dear.

Translation

Of these, the one who is in full knowledge and who is always engaged in pure devotional service is the best. For I am very dear to him, and he is dear to Me.Purport

Bg. 7.18

उदारा: सर्व एवैते ज्ञानी त्वात्मैव मे मतम् ।

आस्थित: स हि युक्तात्मा मामेवानुत्तमां गतिम् ॥ १८ ॥

udārāḥ sarva evaite

jñānī tv ātmaiva me matam

āsthitaḥ sa hi yuktātmā

mām evānuttamāṁ gatim

Synonyms

udārāḥ — magnanimous; sarve — all; eva — certainly; ete — these; jñānī — one who is in knowledge; tu — but; ātmā eva — just like Myself; me — My; matam — opinion; āsthitaḥ — situated; saḥ — he; hi — certainly; yukta-ātmā — engaged in devotional service; mām — in Me; eva — certainly; anuttamām — the highest; gatim — destination.

Translation

All these devotees are undoubtedly magnanimous souls, but he who is situated in knowledge of Me I consider to be just like My own self. Being engaged in My transcendental service, he is sure to attain Me, the highest and most perfect goal.

Bg. 7.19

बहूनां जन्मनामन्ते ज्ञानवान्मां प्रपद्यते ।

वासुदेव: सर्वमिति स महात्मा सुदुर्लभ: ॥ १९ ॥

bahūnāṁ janmanām ante

jñānavān māṁ prapadyate

vāsudevaḥ sarvam iti

sa mahātmā su-durlabhaḥ

Synonyms

bahūnām — many; janmanām — repeated births and deaths; ante — after; jñāna-vān — one who is in full knowledge; mām — unto Me; prapadyate — surrenders; vāsudevaḥ — the Personality of Godhead, Kṛṣṇa; sarvam — everything; iti — thus; saḥ — that; mahā-ātmā — great soul; su-durlabhaḥ — very rare to see.

Translation

After many births and deaths, he who is actually in knowledge surrenders unto Me, knowing Me to be the cause of all causes and all that is. Such a great soul is very rare.

Bg. 7.25

नाहं प्रकाश: सर्वस्य योगमायासमावृत: ।

मूढोऽयं नाभिजानाति लोको मामजमव्ययम् ॥ २५ ॥

nāhaṁ prakāśaḥ sarvasya

yoga-māyā-samāvṛtaḥ

mūḍho ’yaṁ nābhijānāti

loko mām ajam avyayam

Synonyms

na — nor; aham — I; prakāśaḥ — manifest; sarvasya — to everyone; yoga-māyā — by internal potency; samāvṛtaḥ — covered; mūḍhaḥ — foolish; ayam — these; na — not; abhijānāti — can understand; lokaḥ — persons; mām — Me; ajam — unborn; avyayam — inexhaustible.

Translation

I am never manifest to the foolish and unintelligent. For them I am covered by My internal potency, and therefore they do not know that I am unborn and infallible.

BG 7.26

vedaham samatitani

vartamanani carjuna

bhavisyani ca bhutani

mam tu veda na kascana

SYNONYMS

veda — know; aham — I; samatitani — completely past; vartamanani — present; ca — and; arjuna — O Arjuna; bhavisyani — future; ca — also; bhutani — all living entities; mam — Me; tu — but; veda — knows; na — not; kascana — anyone.

TRANSLATION

O Arjuna, as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, I know everything that has happened in the past, all that is happening in the present, and all things that are yet to come. I also know all living entities; but Me no one knows.

BG 7.28

yeṣāṁ tv anta-gataṁ pāpaṁ

janānāṁ puṇya-karmaṇām

te dvandva-moha-nirmuktā

bhajante māṁ dṛḍha-vratāḥ

SYNONYMS

yeṣām — whose; tu — but; anta-gatam — completely eradicated; pāpam — sin; janānām — of the persons; puṇya — pious; karmaṇām — whose previous activities; te — they; dvandva — of duality; moha — delusion; nirmuktāḥ — free from; bhajante — engage in devotional service; mām — to Me; dṛḍha-vratāḥ — with determination.

TRANSLATION

Persons who have acted piously in previous lives and in this life and whose sinful actions are completely eradicated are freed from the dualities of delusion, and they engage themselves in My service with determination.

BG 8.5

अन्तकाले च मामेव स्मरन्मुक्त्वा कलेवरम् ।
यः प्रयाति स मद्भावं याति नास्त्यत्र संशयः ॥५॥

anta-kāle ca mām eva
smaran muktvā kalevaram
yaḥ prayāti sa mad-bhāvaṁ
yāti nāsty atra saṁśayaḥ

SYNONYMS

anta-kāle—at the end of life; ca—also; mām—Me; eva—certainly; smaran—remembering; muktvā—quitting; kalevaram—the body; yaḥ—he who; prayāti—goes; saḥ—he; mat-bhāvam—My nature; yāti—achieves; na—not; asti—there is; atra—here; saṁśayaḥ—doubt.

TRANSLATION
And whoever, at the end of his life, quits his body remembering Me alone at once attains My nature. Of this there is no doubt.

BG 8.6
यं यं वापि स्मरन्भावं त्यजत्यन्ते कलेवरम् ।
तं तमेवैति कौन्तेय सदा तद्भावभावितः ॥६॥

yaṁ yaṁ vāpi smaran bhāvaṁ
tyajaty ante kalevaram
taṁ tam evaiti kaunteya
sadā tad-bhāva-bhāvitaḥ

SYNONYMS
yam yam—whatever; vā api—at all; smaran—remembering; bhāvam—nature; tyajati—gives up; ante—at the end; kalevaram—this body; tam tam—similar; eva—certainly; eti—gets; kaunteya—O son of Kuntī; sadā—always; tat—that; bhāva—state of being; bhāvitaḥ—remembering.

TRANSLATION
Whatever state of being one remembers when he quits his body, O son of Kuntī, that state he will attain without fail.

BG 8.7

तस्मात्सर्वेषु कालेषु मामनुस्मर युध्य च ।

मय्यर्पितमनोबुद्धिर्मामेवैष्यस्यसंशयः ॥७॥

tasmāt sarveṣu kāleṣu
mām anusmara yudhya ca

mayy arpita-mano-buddhir

mām evaiṣyasy asaṁśayaḥ

SYNONYMS

tasmāt—therefore; sarveṣu—at all; kāleṣu—times; mām—Me; anusmara—go on remembering; yudhya—fight; ca—also; mayi—unto Me; arpita—surrendering; manaḥ—mind; buddhiḥ—intellect; mām—unto Me; eva—surely; eṣyasi—you will attain; asaṁśayaḥ—beyond a doubt.

TRANSLATION

Therefore, Arjuna, you should always think of Me in the form of Kṛṣṇa and at the same time carry out your prescribed duty of fighting. With your activities dedicated to Me and your mind and intelligence fixed on Me, you will attain Me without doubt.

BG 8.8
अभ्यासयोगयुक्तेन चेतसा नान्यगामिना ।
परमं पुरुषं दिव्यं याति पार्थानुचिन्तयन् ॥८॥

abhyāsa-yoga-yuktena
cetasā nānya-gāminā
paramaṁ puruṣaṁ divyaṁ
yāti pārthānucintayan

SYNONYMS
abhyāsa-yoga—by practice; yuktena—being engaged in meditation; cetasā—by the mind and intelligence; na anya-gāminā—without their being deviated; paramam—the Supreme; puruṣam—Personality of Godhead; divyam—transcendental; yāti—one achieves; pārtha—O son of Pṛthā; anucintayan—constantly thinking of.

TRANSLATION
He who meditates on Me as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, his mind constantly engaged in remembering Me, undeviated from the path, he, O Pārtha, is sure to reach Me.

BG 8.14
अनन्यचेताः सततं यो मां स्मरति नित्यशः ।
तस्याहं सुलभः पार्थ नित्ययुक्तस्य योगिनः ॥१४॥

ananya-cetāḥ satataṁ
yo māṁ smarati nityaśaḥ
tasyāhaṁ sulabhaḥ pārtha
nitya-yuktasya yoginaḥ

SYNONYMS
ananya-cetāḥ—without deviation of the mind; satatam—always; yaḥ—anyone who; mām—Me (Kṛṣṇa); smarati—remembers; nityaśaḥ—regularly; tasya—to him; aham—I am; su-labhaḥ—very easy to achieve; pārtha—O son of Pṛthā; nitya—regularly; yuktasya—engaged; yoginaḥ—for the devotee.

TRANSLATION
For one who always remembers Me without deviation, I am easy to obtain, O son of Pṛthā, because of his constant engagement in devotional service.

Bg. 8.20

परस्तस्मात्तु भावोऽन्योऽव्यक्तोऽव्यक्तात्सनातन: ।

य: स सर्वेषु भूतेषु नश्यत्सु न विनश्यति ॥ २० ॥

paras tasmāt tu bhāvo ’nyo

’vyakto ’vyaktāt sanātanaḥ

yaḥ sa sarveṣu bhūteṣu

naśyatsu na vinaśyati

Synonyms

paraḥ — transcendental; tasmāt — to that; tu — but; bhāvaḥ — nature; anyaḥ — another; avyaktaḥ — unmanifest; avyaktāt — to the unmanifest; sanātanaḥ — eternal; yaḥ saḥ — that which; sarveṣu — all; bhūteṣu — manifestation; naśyatsu — being annihilated; na — never; vinaśyati — is annihilated.

Translation

Yet there is another unmanifest nature, which is eternal and is transcendental to this manifested and unmanifested matter. It is supreme and is never annihilated. When all in this world is annihilated, that part remains as it is.

Bg. 9.1

श्रीभगवानुवाचइदं तु ते गुह्यतमं प्रवक्ष्याम्यनसूयवे ।

ज्ञानं विज्ञानसहितं यज्ज्ञात्वा मोक्ष्यसेऽश‍ुभात् ॥ १ ॥

śrī-bhagavān uvāca

idaṁ tu te guhya-tamaṁ

pravakṣyāmy anasūyave

jñānaṁ vijñāna-sahitaṁ

yaj jñātvā mokṣyase ’śubhāt

Synonyms

śrī-bhagavān uvāca — the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; idam — this; tu — but; te — unto you; guhya-tamam — the most confidential; pravakṣyāmi — I am speaking; anasūyave — to the nonenvious; jñānam — knowledge; vijñāna — realized knowledge; sahitam — with; yat — which; jñātvā — knowing; mokṣyase — you will be released; aśubhāt — from this miserable material existence.

Translation

The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: My dear Arjuna, because you are never envious of Me, I shall impart to you this most confidential knowledge and realization, knowing which you shall be relieved of the miseries of material existence.

Bg. 9.2

राजविद्या राजगुह्यं पवित्रमिदमुत्तमम् ।

प्रत्यक्षावगमं धर्म्यं सुसुखं कर्तुमव्ययम् ॥ २ ॥

rāja-vidyā rāja-guhyaṁ

pavitram idam uttamam

pratyakṣāvagamaṁ dharmyaṁ

su-sukhaṁ kartum avyayam

Synonyms

rāja-vidyā — the king of education; rāja-guhyam — the king of confidential knowledge; pavitram — the purest; idam — this; uttamam — transcendental; pratyakṣa — by direct experience; avagamam — understood; dharmyam — the principle of religion; su-sukham — very happy; kartum — to execute; avyayam — everlasting.

Translation

This knowledge is the king of education, the most secret of all secrets. It is the purest knowledge, and because it gives direct perception of the self by realization, it is the perfection of religion. It is everlasting, and it is joyfully performed.

Bg. 9.3

अश्रद्दधाना: पुरुषा धर्मस्यास्य परन्तप ।

अप्राप्य मां निवर्तन्ते मृत्युसंसारवर्त्मनि ॥ ३ ॥

aśraddadhānāḥ puruṣā

dharmasyāsya paran-tapa

aprāpya māṁ nivartante

mṛtyu-saṁsāra-vartmani

Synonyms

aśraddadhānāḥ — those who are faithless; puruṣāḥ — such persons; dharmasya — toward the process of religion; asya — this; param-tapa — O killer of the enemies; aprāpya — without obtaining; mām — Me; nivartante — come back; mṛtyu — of death; saṁsāra — in material existence; vartmani — on the path.

Translation

Those who are not faithful in this devotional service cannot attain Me, O conqueror of enemies. Therefore they return to the path of birth and death in this material world.

Bg. 9.4

मया ततमिदं सर्वं जगदव्यक्तमूर्तिना ।

मत्स्थानि सर्वभूतानि न चाहं तेष्ववस्थित: ॥ ४ ॥

mayā tatam idaṁ sarvaṁ

jagad avyakta-mūrtinā

mat-sthāni sarva-bhūtāni

na cāhaṁ teṣv avasthitaḥ

Synonyms

mayā — by Me; tatam — pervaded; idam — this; sarvam — all; jagat — cosmic manifestation; avyakta-mūrtinā — by the unmanifested form; mat-sthāni — in Me; sarva-bhūtāni — all living entities; na — not; ca — also; aham — I; teṣu — in them; avasthitaḥ — situated.

Translation

By Me, in My unmanifested form, this entire universe is pervaded. All beings are in Me, but I am not in them.

Bg. 9.5

न च मत्स्थानि भूतानि पश्य मे योगमैश्वरम् ।

भूतभृन्न च भूतस्थो ममात्मा भूतभावन: ॥ ५ ॥

na ca mat-sthāni bhūtāni

paśya me yogam aiśvaram

bhūta-bhṛn na ca bhūta-stho

mamātmā bhūta-bhāvanaḥ

Synonyms

na — never; ca — also; mat-sthāni — situated in Me; bhūtāni — all creation; paśya — just see; me — My; yogam aiśvaram — inconceivable mystic power; bhūta-bhṛt — the maintainer of all living entities; na — never; ca — also; bhūta-sthaḥ — in the cosmic manifestation; mama — My; ātmā — Self; bhūta-bhāvanaḥ — the source of all manifestations.

Translation

And yet everything that is created does not rest in Me. Behold My mystic opulence! Although I am the maintainer of all living entities and although I am everywhere, I am not a part of this cosmic manifestation, for My Self is the very source of creation.

Bg. 9.10

मयाध्यक्षेण प्रकृति: सूयते सचराचरम् ।

हेतुनानेन कौन्तेय जगद्विपरिवर्तते ॥ १० ॥

mayādhyakṣeṇa prakṛtiḥ

sūyate sa-carācaram

hetunānena kaunteya

jagad viparivartate

Synonyms

mayā — by Me; adhyakṣeṇa — by superintendence; prakṛtiḥ — material nature; sūyate — manifests; sa — both; cara-acaram — the moving and the nonmoving; hetunā — for the reason; anena — this; kaunteya — O son of Kuntī; jagat — the cosmic manifestation; viparivartate — is working.

Translation

This material nature, which is one of My energies, is working under My direction, O son of Kuntī, producing all moving and nonmoving beings. Under its rule this manifestation is created and annihilated again and again.

Bg. 9.11

अवजानन्ति मां मूढा मानुषीं तनुमाश्रितम् ।

परं भावमजानन्तो मम भूतमहेश्वरम् ॥ ११ ॥

avajānanti māṁ mūḍhā

mānuṣīṁ tanum āśritam

paraṁ bhāvam ajānanto

mama bhūta-maheśvaram

Synonyms

avajānanti — deride; mām — Me; mūḍhāḥ — foolish men; mānuṣīm — in a human form; tanum — a body; āśritam — assuming; param — transcendental; bhāvam — nature; ajānantaḥ — not knowing; mama — My; bhūta — of everything that be; mahā-īśvaram — the supreme proprietor.

Translation

Fools deride Me when I descend in the human form. They do not know My transcendental nature as the Supreme Lord of all that be.

Bg. 9.13
महात्मानस्तु मां पार्थ दैवीं प्रकृतिमाश्रिता: ।
भजन्त्यनन्यमनसो ज्ञात्वा भूतादिमव्ययम् ॥ १३ ॥

mahātmānas tu māṁ pārtha
daivīṁ prakṛtim āśritāḥ
bhajanty ananya-manaso
jñātvā bhūtādim avyayam

Synonyms
mahā-ātmānaḥ — the great souls; tu — but; mām — unto Me; pārtha — O son of Pṛthā; daivīm — divine; prakṛtim — nature; āśritāḥ — having taken shelter of; bhajanti — render service; ananya-manasaḥ — without deviation of the mind; jñātvā — knowing; bhūta — of creation; ādim — the origin; avyayam — inexhaustible.

Translation
O son of Pṛthā, those who are not deluded, the great souls, are under the protection of the divine nature. They are fully engaged in devotional service because they know Me as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, original and inexhaustible.

Bg. 9.14

सततं कीर्तयन्तो मां यतन्तश्च दृढव्रता: ।

नमस्यन्तश्च मां भक्त्य‍ा नित्ययुक्ता उपासते ॥ १४ ॥

satataṁ kīrtayanto māṁ

yatantaś ca dṛḍha-vratāḥ

namasyantaś ca māṁ bhaktyā

nitya-yuktā upāsate

Synonyms

satatam — always; kīrtayantaḥ — chanting; mām — about Me; yatantaḥ — fully endeavoring; ca — also; dṛḍha-vratāḥ — with determination; namasyantaḥ — offering obeisances; ca — and; mām — Me; bhaktyā — in devotion; nitya-yuktāḥ — perpetually engaged; upāsate — worship.

Translation

Always chanting My glories, endeavoring with great determination, bowing down before Me, these great souls perpetually worship Me with devotion.

Bg 9.22

अनन्याश्चिन्तयन्तो मां ये जना: पर्युपासते ।

तेषां नित्याभियुक्तानां योगक्षेमं वहाम्यहम् ॥ २२ ॥

ananyāś cintayanto māṁ

ye janāḥ paryupāsate

teṣāṁ nityābhiyuktānāṁ

yoga-kṣemaṁ vahāmy aham

Synonyms

ananyāḥ — having no other object; cintayantaḥ — concentrating; mām — on Me; ye — those who; janāḥ — persons; paryupāsate — properly worship; teṣām — of them; nitya — always; abhiyuktānām — fixed in devotion; yoga — requirements; kṣemam — protection; vahāmi — carry; aham — I.

Translation

But those who always worship Me with exclusive devotion, meditating on My transcendental form – to them I carry what they lack, and I preserve what they have.

ananyas_cintayanto_mam..._cited

Bg. 9.27

यत्करोषि यदश्न‍ासि यज्ज‍ुहोषि ददासि यत् ।

यत्तपस्यसि कौन्तेय तत्कुरुष्व मदर्पणम् ॥ २७ ॥

yat karoṣi yad aśnāsi

yaj juhoṣi dadāsi yat

yat tapasyasi kaunteya

tat kuruṣva mad-arpaṇam

Synonyms

yat — whatever; karoṣi — you do; yat — whatever; aśnāsi — you eat; yat — whatever; juhoṣi — you offer; dadāsi — you give away; yat — whatever; yat — whatever; tapasyasi — austerities you perform; kaunteya — O son of Kuntī; tat — that; kuruṣva — do; mat — unto Me; arpaṇam — as an offering.

Translation

Whatever you do, whatever you eat, whatever you offer or give away, and whatever austerities you perform – do that, O son of Kuntī, as an offering to Me.

Bg 9.29

समोऽहं सर्वभूतेषु न मे द्वेष्योऽस्ति न प्रिय: ।

ये भजन्ति तु मां भक्त्य‍ा मयि ते तेषु चाप्यहम् ॥ २९ ॥

samo ’haṁ sarva-bhūteṣu

na me dveṣyo ’sti na priyaḥ

ye bhajanti tu māṁ bhaktyā

mayi te teṣu cāpy aham

Synonyms

samsaḥ — equally disposed; aham — I; sarva-bhūteṣu — to all living entities; na — no one; me — to Me; dveṣyaḥ — hateful; asti — is; na — nor; priyaḥ — dear; ye — those who; bhajanti — render transcendental service; tu — but; mām — unto Me; bhaktyā — in devotion; mayi — are in Me; te — such persons; teṣu — in them; ca — also; api — certainly; aham — I.

Translation

I envy no one, nor am I partial to anyone. I am equal to all. But whoever renders service unto Me in devotion is a friend, is in Me, and I am also a friend to him.

Bg 9.30

अपि चेत्सुदुराचारो भजते मामनन्यभाक् ।

साधुरेव स मन्तव्य: सम्यग्व्यवसितो हि स: ॥ ३० ॥

api cet su-durācāro

bhajate mām ananya-bhāk

sādhur eva sa mantavyaḥ

samyag vyavasito hi saḥ

Synonyms

api — even; cet — if; su-durācāraḥ — one committing the most abominable actions; bhajate — is engaged in devotional service; mām — unto Me; ananya-bhāk — without deviation; sādhuḥ — a saint; eva — certainly; saḥ — he; mantavyaḥ — is to be considered; samyak — completely; vyavasitaḥ — situated in determination; hi — certainly; saḥ — he.

Translation

Even if one commits the most abominable action, if he is engaged in devotional service he is to be considered saintly because he is properly situated in his determination.

Bg. 9.31

क्षिप्रं भवति धर्मात्मा शश्वच्छान्तिं निगच्छति ।

कौन्तेय प्रतिजानीहि न मे भक्त: प्रणश्यति ॥ ३१ ॥

kṣipraṁ bhavati dharmātmā

śaśvac-chāntiṁ nigacchati

kaunteya pratijānīhi

na me bhaktaḥ praṇaśyati

Synonyms

kṣipram — very soon; bhavati — becomes; dharma-ātmā — righteous; śaśvat-śāntim — lasting peace; nigacchati — attains; kaunteya — O son of Kuntī; pratijānīhi — declare; na — never; me — My; bhaktaḥ — devotee; praṇaśyati — perishes.

Translation

He quickly becomes righteous and attains lasting peace. O son of Kuntī, declare it boldly that My devotee never perishes.

Bg. 9.34

मन्मना भव मद्भ‍क्तो मद्याजी मां नमस्कुरु ।

मामेवैष्यसि युक्त्वैवमात्मानं मत्परायण: ॥ ३४ ॥

man-manā bhava mad-bhakto

mad-yājī māṁ namaskuru

mām evaiṣyasi yuktvaivam

ātmānaṁ mat-parāyaṇaḥ

Synonyms

mat-manāḥ — always thinking of Me; bhava — become; mat — My; bhaktaḥ — devotee; mat — My; yājī — worshiper; mām — unto Me; namas-kuru — offer obeisances; mām — unto Me; eva — completely; eṣyasi — you will come; yuktvā — being absorbed; evam — thus; ātmānam — your soul; mat-parāyaṇaḥ — devoted to Me.

Translation

Engage your mind always in thinking of Me, become My devotee, offer obeisances to Me and worship Me. Being completely absorbed in Me, surely you will come to Me.

The Catur Sloki of Bhagavad-gita

The first verse is the paribhasa sutra of Bhagavad-gita

Bg 10.8

अहं सर्वस्य प्रभवो मत्त: सर्वं प्रवर्तते ।

इति मत्वा भजन्ते मां बुधा भावसमन्विता: ॥ ८ ॥

ahaṁ sarvasya prabhavo

mattaḥ sarvaṁ pravartate

iti matvā bhajante māṁ

budhā bhāva-samanvitāḥ

Synonyms

aham — I; sarvasya — of all; prabhavaḥ — the source of generation; mattaḥ — from Me; sarvam — everything; pravartate — emanates; iti — thus; matvā — knowing; bhajante — become devoted; mām — unto Me; budhāḥ — the learned; bhāva-samanvitāḥ — with great attention.

Translation

I am the source of all spiritual and material worlds. Everything emanates from Me. The wise who perfectly know this engage in My devotional service and worship Me with all their hearts.

Bg 10.9

मच्च‍ित्ता मद्ग‍तप्राणा बोधयन्त: परस्परम् ।

कथयन्तश्च मां नित्यं तुष्यन्ति च रमन्ति च ॥ ९ ॥

mac-cittā mad-gata-prāṇā

bodhayantaḥ parasparam

kathayantaś ca māṁ nityaṁ

tuṣyanti ca ramanti ca

Synonyms

mat-cittāḥ — their minds fully engaged in Me; mat-gata-prāṇāḥ — their lives devoted to Me; bodhayantaḥ — preaching; parasparam — among themselves; kathayantaḥ — talking; ca — also; mām — about Me; nityam — perpetually; tuṣyanti — become pleased; ca — also; ramanti — enjoy transcendental bliss; ca — also.

Translation

The thoughts of My pure devotees dwell in Me, their lives are fully devoted to My service, and they derive great satisfaction and bliss from always enlightening one another and conversing about Me.Bg.

Bg 10.10

तेषां सततयुक्तानां भजतां प्रीतिपूर्वकम् ।

ददामि बुद्धियोगं तं येन मामुपयान्ति ते ॥ १० ॥

teṣāṁ satata-yuktānāṁ

bhajatāṁ prīti-pūrvakam

dadāmi buddhi-yogaṁ taṁ

yena mām upayānti te

Synonyms

teṣām — unto them; satata-yuktānām — always engaged; bhajatām — in rendering devotional service; prīti-pūrvakam — in loving ecstasy; dadāmi — I give; buddhi-yogam — real intelligence; tam — that; yena — by which; mām — unto Me; upayānti — come; te — they.

Translation

To those who are constantly devoted to serving Me with love, I give the understanding by which they can come to Me.

Bg 10.11

तेषामेवानुकम्पार्थमहमज्ञानजं तम: ।

नाशयाम्यात्मभावस्थो ज्ञानदीपेन भास्वता ॥ ११ ॥

teṣām evānukampārtham

aham ajñāna-jaṁ tamaḥ

nāśayāmy ātma-bhāva-stho

jñāna-dīpena bhāsvatā

Synonyms

teṣām — for them; eva — certainly; anukampā-artham — to show special mercy; aham — I; ajñāna-jam — due to ignorance; tamaḥ — darkness; nāśayāmi — dispel; ātma-bhāva — within their hearts; sthaḥ — situated; jñāna — of knowledge; dīpena — with the lamp; bhāsvatā — glowing.

Translation

To show them special mercy, I, dwelling in their hearts, destroy with the shining lamp of knowledge the darkness born of ignorance.

Bg. 10.12-13

अर्जुन उवाचपरं ब्रह्म परं धाम पवित्रं परमं भवान् ।

पुरुषं शाश्वतं दिव्यमादिदेवमजं विभुम् ॥ १२ ॥

आहुस्त्वामृषय: सर्वे देवर्षिर्नारदस्तथा ।

असितो देवलो व्यास: स्वयं चैव ब्रवीषि मे ॥ १३ ॥

arjuna uvāca

paraṁ brahma paraṁ dhāma

pavitraṁ paramaṁ bhavān

puruṣaṁ śāśvataṁ divyam

ādi-devam ajaṁ vibhum

āhus tvām ṛṣayaḥ sarve

devarṣir nāradas tathā

asito devalo vyāsaḥ

svayaṁ caiva bravīṣi me

Synonyms

arjunaḥ uvāca — Arjuna said; param — supreme; brahma — truth; param — supreme; dhāma — sustenance; pavitram — pure; paramam — supreme; bhavān — You; puruṣam — personality; śāśvatam — eternal; divyam — transcendental; ādi-devam — the original Lord; ajam — unborn; vibhum — greatest; āhuḥ — say; tvām — of You; ṛṣayaḥ — sages; sarve — all; deva-ṛṣiḥ — the sage among the demigods; nāradaḥ — Nārada; tathā — also; asitaḥ — Asita; devalaḥ — Devala; vyāsaḥ — Vyāsa; svayam — personally; ca — also; eva — certainly; bravīṣi — You are explaining; me — unto me.

Translation

Arjuna said: You are the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the ultimate abode, the purest, the Absolute Truth. You are the eternal, transcendental, original person, the unborn, the greatest. All the great sages such as Nārada, Asita, Devala and Vyāsa confirm this truth about You, and now You Yourself are declaring it to me.

Bg. 10.25

महर्षीणां भृगुरहं गिरामस्म्येकमक्षरम् ।

यज्ञानां जपयज्ञोऽस्मि स्थावराणां हिमालय: ॥ २५ ॥

maharṣīṇāṁ bhṛgur ahaṁ

girām asmy ekam akṣaram

yajñānāṁ japa-yajño ’smi

sthāvarāṇāṁ himālayaḥ

Synonyms

mahā-ṛṣīṇām — among the great sages; bhṛguḥ — Bhṛgu; aham — I am; girām — of vibrations; asmi — I am; ekam akṣaram — praṇava; yajñānām — of sacrifices; japa-yajñaḥ — chanting; asmi — I am; sthāvarāṇām — of immovable things; himālayaḥ — the Himālayan mountains.

Translation

Of the great sages I am Bhṛgu; of vibrations I am the transcendental oṁ. Of sacrifices I am the chanting of the holy names [japa], and of immovable things I am the Himālayas.

Bg 10.42

अथवा बहुनैतेन किं ज्ञातेन तवार्जुन ।

विष्टभ्याहमिदं कृत्स्नमेकांशेन स्थितो जगत् ॥ ४२ ॥

atha vā bahunaitena

kiṁ jñātena tavārjuna

viṣṭabhyāham idaṁ kṛtsnam

ekāṁśena sthito jagat

Synonyms

atha vā — or; bahunā — many; etena — by this kind; kim — what; jñātena — by knowing; tava — your; arjuna — O Arjuna; viṣṭabhya — pervading; aham — I; idam — this; kṛtsnam — entire; eka — by one; aṁśena — part; sthitaḥ — am situated; jagat — universe.

Translation

But what need is there, Arjuna, for all this detailed knowledge? With a single fragment of Myself I pervade and support this entire universe.

The Essence of Bhagavad-gita:

Bg 11.55

mat-karma-kṛn mat-paramo

mad-bhaktaḥ saṅga-varjitaḥ

nirvairaḥ sarva-bhūteṣu

yaḥ sa mām eti pāṇḍava

SYNONYMS

mat-karma-kṛt — engaged in doing My work; mat-paramaḥ — considering Me the Supreme; mat-bhaktaḥ — engaged in My devotional service; saṅga-varjitaḥ — freed from the contamination of fruitive activities and mental speculation; nirvairaḥ — without an enemy; sarva-bhūteṣu — among all living entities; yaḥ — one who; saḥ — he; mām — unto Me; eti — comes; pāṇḍava — O son of Pāṇḍu.

TRANSLATION

My dear Arjuna, he who engages in My pure devotional service, free from the contaminations of fruitive activities and mental speculation, he who works for Me, who makes Me the supreme goal of his life, and who is friendly to every living being – he certainly comes to Me.

PURPORT

Anyone who wants to approach the supreme of all the Personalities of Godhead, on the Kṛṣṇaloka planet in the spiritual sky, and be intimately connected with the Supreme Personality, Kṛṣṇa, must take this formula, as stated by the Supreme Himself. Therefore, this verse is considered to be the essence of Bhagavad-gītā. [...]

Bg 12.17

yo na hṛṣyati na dveṣṭi

na śocati na kāṅkṣati

śubhāśubha-parityāgī

bhaktimān yaḥ sa me priyaḥ

SYNONYMS

yaḥ — one who; na — never; hṛṣyati — takes pleasure; na — never; dveṣṭi — grieves; na — never; śocati — laments; na — never; kāṅkṣati — desires; śubha — of the auspicious; aśubha — and the inauspicious; parityāgī — renouncer; bhakti-mān — devotee; yaḥ — one who; saḥ — he is; me — to Me; priyaḥ — dear.

TRANSLATION

One who neither rejoices nor grieves, who neither laments nor desires, and who renounces both auspicious and inauspicious things – such a devotee is very dear to Me.

Bg. 13.8-12

अमानित्वमदम्भित्वमहिंसा क्षान्तिरार्जवम् ।

आचार्योपासनं शौचं स्थैर्यमात्मविनिग्रह: ॥ ८ ॥

इन्द्रियार्थेषु वैराग्यमनहङ्कार एव च ।

जन्ममृत्युजराव्याधिदु:खदोषानुदर्शनम् ॥ ९ ॥

असक्तिरनभिष्वङ्ग: पुत्रदारगृहादिषु ।

नित्यं च समचित्तत्वमिष्टानिष्टोपपत्तिषु ॥ १० ॥

मयि चानन्ययोगेन भक्तिरव्यभिचारिणी ।

विविक्तदेशसेवित्वमरतिर्जनसंसदि ॥ ११ ॥

अध्यात्मज्ञाननित्यत्वं तत्त्वज्ञानार्थदर्शनम् ।

एतज्ज्ञानमिति प्रोक्तमज्ञानं यदतोऽन्यथा ॥ १२ ॥

amānitvam adambhitvam

ahiṁsā kṣāntir ārjavam

ācāryopāsanaṁ śaucaṁ

sthairyam ātma-vinigrah

aḥindriyārtheṣu vairāgyam

anahaṅkāra eva ca

janma-mṛtyu-jarā-vyādhi-

duḥkha-doṣānudarśanam

asaktir anabhiṣvaṅgaḥ

putra-dāra-gṛhādiṣu

nityaṁ ca sama-cittatvam

iṣṭāniṣṭopapattiṣu

mayi cānanya-yogena

bhaktir avyabhicāriṇī

vivikta-deśa-sevitvam

aratir jana-saṁsadi

adhyātma-jñāna-nityatvaṁ

tattva-jñānārtha-darśanam

etaj jñānam iti proktam

ajñānaṁ yad ato ’nyathā

Synonyms

amānitvam — humility; adambhitvam — pridelessness; ahiṁsā — nonviolence; kṣāntiḥ — tolerance; ārjavam — simplicity; ācārya-upāsanam — approaching a bona fide spiritual master; śaucam — cleanliness; sthairyam — steadfastness; ātma-vinigrahaḥ — self-control; indriya-artheṣu — in the matter of the senses; vairāgyam — renunciation; anahaṅkāraḥ — being without false egoism; eva — certainly; ca — also; janma — of birth; mṛtyu — death; jarā — old age; vyādhi — and disease; duḥkha — of the distress; doṣa — the fault; anudarśanam — observing; asaktiḥ — being without attachment; anabhiṣvaṅgaḥ — being without association; putra — for son; dāra — wife; gṛha-ādiṣu — home, etc.; nityam — constant; ca — also; sama-cittatvam — equilibrium; iṣṭa — the desirable; aniṣṭa — and undesirable; upapattiṣu — having obtained; mayi — unto Me; ca — also; ananya-yogena — by unalloyed devotional service; bhaktiḥ — devotion; avyabhicāriṇī — without any break; vivikta — to solitary; deśa — places; sevitvam — aspiring; aratiḥ — being without attachment; jana-saṁsadi — to people in general; adhyātma — pertaining to the self; jñāna — in knowledge; nityatvam — constancy; tattva-jñāna — of knowledge of the truth; artha — for the object; darśanam — philosophy; etat — all this; jñānam — knowledge; iti — thus; proktam — declared; ajñānam — ignorance; yat — that which; ataḥ — from this; anyathā — other.

Translation

Humility; pridelessness; nonviolence; tolerance; simplicity; approaching a bona fide spiritual master; cleanliness; steadiness; self-control; renunciation of the objects of sense gratification; absence of false ego; the perception of the evil of birth, death, old age and disease; detachment; freedom from entanglement with children, wife, home and the rest; even-mindedness amid pleasant and unpleasant events; constant and unalloyed devotion to Me; aspiring to live in a solitary place; detachment from the general mass of people; accepting the importance of self-realization; and philosophical search for the Absolute Truth – all these I declare to be knowledge, and besides this whatever there may be is ignorance.

Bg. 14.4

सर्वयोनिषु कौन्तेय मूर्तय: सम्भवन्ति या: ।

तासां ब्रह्म महद्योनिरहं बीजप्रद: पिता ॥ ४ ॥

sarva-yoniṣu kaunteya

mūrtayaḥ sambhavanti yāḥ

tāsāṁ brahma mahad yonir

ahaṁ bīja-pradaḥ pitā

Synonyms

sarva-yoniṣu — in all species of life; kaunteya — O son of Kuntī; mūrtayaḥ — forms; sambhavanti — they appear; yāḥ — which; tāsām — of all of them; brahma — the supreme; mahat yoniḥ — source of birth in the material substance; aham — I; bīja-pradaḥ — the seed-giving; pitā — father.

Translation

It should be understood that all species of life, O son of Kuntī, are made possible by birth in this material nature, and that I am the seed-giving father.

Bg. 14.26

मां च योऽव्यभिचारेण भक्तियोगेन सेवते ।

स गुणान्समतीत्यैतान्ब्रह्मभूयाय कल्पते ॥ २६ ॥

māṁ ca yo ’vyabhicāreṇa

bhakti-yogena sevate

sa guṇān samatītyaitān

brahma-bhūyāya kalpate

Synonyms

mām — unto Me; ca — also; yaḥ — a person who; avyabhicāreṇa — without fail; bhakti-yogena — by devotional service; sevate — renders service; saḥ — he; guṇān — the modes of material nature; samatītya — transcending; etān — all these; brahma-bhūyāya — elevated to the Brahman platform; kalpate — becomes.

Translation

One who engages in full devotional service, unfailing in all circumstances, at once transcends the modes of material nature and thus comes to the level of Brahman.

Bg. 14.27

ब्रह्मणो हि प्रतिष्ठाहममृतस्याव्ययस्य च ।

शाश्वतस्य च धर्मस्य सुखस्यैकान्तिकस्य च ॥ २७ ॥

brahmaṇo hi pratiṣṭhāham

amṛtasyāvyayasya ca

śāśvatasya ca dharmasya

sukhasyaikāntikasya ca

Synonyms

brahmaṇaḥ — of the impersonal brahma-jyotir; hi — certainly; pratiṣṭhā — the rest; aham — I am; amṛtasya — of the immortal; avyayasya — of the imperishable; ca — also; śāśvatasya — of the eternal; ca — and; dharmasya — of the constitutional position; sukhasya — of happiness; aikāntikasya — ultimate; ca — also.

Translation

And I am the basis of the impersonal Brahman, which is immortal, imperishable and eternal and is the constitutional position of ultimate happiness.

Bg. 15.6

न तद्भ‍ासयते सूर्यो न शशाङ्को न पावक: ।

यद्ग‍त्वा न निवर्तन्ते तद्धाम परमं मम ॥ ६ ॥

na tad bhāsayate sūryo

na śaśāṅko na pāvakaḥ

yad gatvā na nivartante

tad dhāma paramaṁ mama

Synonyms

na — not; tat — that; bhāsayate — illuminates; sūryaḥ — the sun; na — nor; śaśāṅkaḥ — the moon; na — nor; pāvakaḥ — fire, electricity; yat — where; gatvā — going; na — never; nivartante — they come back; tat dhāma — that abode; paramam — supreme; mama — My.

Translation

That supreme abode of Mine is not illumined by the sun or moon, nor by fire or electricity. Those who reach it never return to this material world.

Bg. 15.7

ममैवांशो जीवलोके जीवभूत: सनातन: ।

मन:षष्ठानीन्द्रियाणि प्रकृतिस्थानि कर्षति ॥ ७ ॥

mamaivāṁśo jīva-loke

jīva-bhūtaḥ sanātanaḥ

manaḥ-ṣaṣṭhānīndriyāṇi

prakṛti-sthāni karṣati

Synonyms

mama — My; eva — certainly; aṁśaḥ — fragmental particle; jīva-loke — in the world of conditional life; jīva-bhūtaḥ — the conditioned living entity; sanātanaḥ — eternal; manaḥ — with the mind; ṣaṣṭhāni — the six; indriyāṇi — senses; prakṛti — in material nature; sthāni — situated; karṣati — is struggling hard.

Translation

The living entities in this conditioned world are My eternal fragmental parts. Due to conditioned life, they are struggling very hard with the six senses, which include the mind.

Bg. 15.15

सर्वस्य चाहं हृदि सन्निविष्टोमत्त: स्मृतिर्ज्ञानमपोहनं च ।

वेदैश्च सर्वैरहमेव वेद्योवेदान्तकृद्वेदविदेव चाहम् ॥ १५ ॥

sarvasya cāhaṁ hṛdi sanniviṣṭo

mattaḥ smṛtir jñānam apohanaṁ ca

vedaiś ca sarvair aham eva vedyo

vedānta-kṛd veda-vid eva cāham

Synonyms

sarvasya — of all living beings; ca — and; aham — I; hṛdi — in the heart; sanniviṣṭaḥ — situated; mattaḥ — from Me; smṛtiḥ — remembrance; jñānam — knowledge; apohanam — forgetfulness; ca — and; vedaiḥ — by the Vedas; ca — also; sarvaiḥ — all; aham — I am; eva — certainly; vedyaḥ — knowable; vedānta-kṛt — the compiler of the Vedānta; veda-vit — the knower of the Vedas; eva — certainly; ca — and; aham — I.

Translation

I am seated in everyone’s heart, and from Me come remembrance, knowledge and forgetfulness. By all the Vedas, I am to be known. Indeed, I am the compiler of Vedānta, and I am the knower of the Vedas.

Bg. 16.23

य: शास्त्रविधिमुत्सृज्य वर्तते कामकारत: ।

न स सिद्धिमवाप्‍नोति न सुखं न परां गतिम् ॥ २३ ॥

yaḥ śāstra-vidhim utsṛjya

vartate kāma-kārataḥ

na sa siddhim avāpnotina

sukhaṁ na parāṁ gatim

Synonyms

yaḥ — anyone who; śāstra-vidhim — the regulations of the scriptures; utsṛjya — giving up; vartate — remains; kāma-kārataḥ — acting whimsically in lust; na — never; saḥ — he; siddhim — perfection; avāpnoti — achieves; na — never; sukham — happiness; na — never; parām — the supreme; gatim — perfectional stage.

Translation

He who discards scriptural injunctions and acts according to his own whims attains neither perfection, nor happiness, nor the supreme destination.

Bg. 17.15

अनुद्वेगकरं वाक्यं सत्यं प्रियहितं च यत् ।

स्वाध्यायाभ्यसनं चैव वाङ्‍मयं तप उच्यते ॥ १५ ॥

anudvega-karaṁ vākyaṁ

satyaṁ priya-hitaṁ ca yat

svādhyāyābhyasanaṁ caiva

vāṅ-mayaṁ tapa ucyate

Synonyms

anudvega-karam — not agitating; vākyam — words; satyam — truthful; priya — dear; hitam — beneficial; ca — also; yat — which; svādhyāya — of Vedic study; abhyasanam — practice; ca — also; eva — certainly; vāk-mayam — of the voice; tapaḥ — austerity; ucyate — is said to be.

Translation

Austerity of speech consists in speaking words that are truthful, pleasing, beneficial, and not agitating to others, and also in regularly reciting Vedic literature.

Bg. 18.14

अधिष्ठानं तथा कर्ता करणं च पृथग्विधम् ।

विविधाश्च पृथक्‍चेष्टा दैवं चैवात्र पञ्चमम् ॥ १४ ॥

adhiṣṭhānaṁ tathā kartā

karaṇaṁ ca pṛthag-vidham

vividhāś ca pṛthak ceṣṭā

daivaṁ caivātra pañcamam

Synonyms

adhiṣṭhānam — the place; tathā — also; kartā — the worker; karaṇam — instruments; ca — and; pṛthak-vidham — of different kinds; vividhāḥ — various; ca — and; pṛthak — separate; ceṣṭāḥ — the endeavors; daivam — the Supreme; ca — also; eva — certainly; atra — here; pañcamam — the fifth.

Translation

The place of action [the body], the performer, the various senses, the many different kinds of endeavor, and ultimately the Supersoul – these are the five factors of action.

Bg. 18.42

शमो दमस्तप: शौचं क्षान्तिरार्जवमेव च ।

ज्ञानं विज्ञानमास्तिक्यं ब्रह्मकर्म स्वभावजम् ॥ ४२ ॥

śamo damas tapaḥ śaucaṁ

kṣāntir ārjavam eva ca

jñānaṁ vijñānam āstikyaṁ

brahma-karma svabhāva-jam

Synonyms

śamaḥ — peacefulness; damaḥ — self-control; tapaḥ — austerity; śaucam — purity; kṣāntiḥ — tolerance; ārjavam — honesty; eva — certainly; ca — and; jñānam — knowledge; vijñānam — wisdom; āstikyam — religiousness; brahma — of a brāhmaṇa; karma — duty; svabhāva-jam — born of his own nature.

Translation

Peacefulness, self-control, austerity, purity, tolerance, honesty, knowledge, wisdom and religiousness – these are the natural qualities by which the brāhmaṇas work.

Bg. 18.43

शौर्यं तेजो धृतिर्दाक्ष्यं युद्धे चाप्यपलायनम् ।

दानमीश्वरभावश्च क्षात्रं कर्म स्वभावजम् ॥ ४३ ॥

śauryaṁ tejo dhṛtir dākṣyaṁ

yuddhe cāpy apalāyanam

dānam īśvara-bhāvaś ca

kṣātraṁ karma svabhāva-jam

Synonyms

śauryam — heroism; tejaḥ — power; dhṛtiḥ — determination; dākṣyam — resourcefulness; yuddhe — in battle; ca — and; api — also; apalāyanam — not fleeing; dānam — generosity; īśvara — of leadership; bhāvaḥ — the nature; ca — and; kṣātram — of a kṣatriya; karma — duty; svabhāva-jam — born of his own nature.

Translation

Heroism, power, determination, resourcefulness, courage in battle, generosity and leadership are the natural qualities of work for the kṣatriyas.

Bg. 18.51-53

बुद्ध्या विश‍ुद्धया युक्तो धृत्यात्मानं नियम्य च ।

शब्दादीन्विषयांस्त्यक्त्वा रागद्वेषौ व्युदस्य च ॥ ५१ ॥

विविक्तसेवी लघ्वाशी यतवाक्कायमानस: ।

ध्यानयोगपरो नित्यं वैराग्यं समुपाश्रित: ॥ ५२ ॥

अहङ्कारं बलं दर्पं कामं क्रोधं परिग्रहम् ।

विमुच्य निर्मम: शान्तो ब्रह्मभूयाय कल्पते ॥ ५३ ॥

buddhyā viśuddhayā yukto

dhṛtyātmānaṁ niyamya ca

śabdādīn viṣayāṁs tyaktvā

rāga-dveṣau vyudasya ca

vivikta-sevī laghv-āśī

yata-vāk-kāya-mānasaḥ

dhyāna-yoga-paro nityaṁ

vairāgyaṁ samupāśritaḥ

ahaṅkāraṁ balaṁ darpaṁ

kāmaṁ krodhaṁ parigraham

vimucya nirmamaḥ śānto

brahma-bhūyāya kalpate

Synonyms

buddhyā — with the intelligence; viśuddhayā — fully purified; yuktaḥ — engaged; dhṛtyā — by determination; ātmānam — the self; niyamya — regulating; ca — also; śabda-ādīn — such as sound; viṣayān — the sense objects; tyaktvā — giving up; rāga — attachment; dveṣau — and hatred; vyudasya — laying aside; ca — also; vivikta-sevī — living in a secluded place; laghu-āśī — eating a small quantity; yata — having controlled; vāk — speech; kāya — body; mānasaḥ — and mind; dhyāna-yoga-paraḥ — absorbed in trance; nityam — twenty-four hours a day; vairāgyam — detachment; samupāśritaḥ — having taken shelter of; ahaṅkāram — false ego; balam — false strength; darpam — false pride; kāmam — lust; krodham — anger; parigraham — and acceptance of material things; vimucya — being delivered from; nirmamaḥ — without a sense of proprietorship; śāntaḥ — peaceful; brahma-bhūyāya — for self-realization; kalpate — is qualified.

Translation

Being purified by his intelligence and controlling the mind with determination, giving up the objects of sense gratification, being freed from attachment and hatred, one who lives in a secluded place, who eats little, who controls his body, mind and power of speech, who is always in trance and who is detached, free from false ego, false strength, false pride, lust, anger, and acceptance of material things, free from false proprietorship, and peaceful – such a person is certainly elevated to the position of self-realization.

Bg. 18.55

भक्त्य‍ा मामभिजानाति यावान्यश्चास्मि तत्त्वत: ।

ततो मां तत्त्वतो ज्ञात्वा विशते तदनन्तरम् ॥ ५५ ॥

bhaktyā mām abhijānāti

yāvān yaś cāsmi tattvataḥ

tato māṁ tattvato jñātvā

viśate tad-anantaram

Synonyms

bhaktyā — by pure devotional service; mām — Me; abhijānāti — one can know; yāvān — as much as; yaḥ ca asmi — as I am; tattvataḥ — in truth; tataḥ — thereafter; mām — Me; tattvataḥ — in truth; jñātvā — knowing; viśate — he enters; tat-anantaram — thereafter.

Translation

One can understand Me as I am, as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, only by devotional service. And when one is in full consciousness of Me by such devotion, he can enter into the kingdom of God.

Bg. 18.57

चेतसा सर्वकर्माणि मयि सन्न्यस्य मत्पर: ।

बुद्धियोगमुपाश्रित्य मच्च‍ित्त: सततं भव ॥ ५७ ॥

cetasā sarva-karmāṇi

mayi sannyasya mat-paraḥ

buddhi-yogam upāśritya

mac-cittaḥ satataṁ bhava

Synonyms

cetasā — by intelligence; sarva-karmāṇi — all kinds of activities; mayi — unto Me; sannyasya — giving up; mat-paraḥ — under My protection; buddhi-yogam — devotional activities; upāśritya — taking shelter of; mat-cittaḥ — in consciousness of Me; satatam — twenty-four hours a day; bhava — just become.

Translation

In all activities just depend upon Me and work always under My protection. In such devotional service, be fully conscious of Me.

Bg. 18.60

स्वभावजेन कौन्तेय निबद्ध: स्वेन कर्मणा ।

कर्तुं नेच्छसि यन्मोहात्करिष्यस्यवशोऽपि तत् ॥ ६० ॥

svabhāva-jena kaunteya

nibaddhaḥ svena karmaṇā

kartuṁ necchasi yan mohāt

kariṣyasy avaśo ’pi tat

Synonyms

svabhāva-jena — born of your own nature; kaunteya — O son of Kuntī; nibaddhaḥ — conditioned; svena — by your own; karmaṇā — activities; kartum — to do; na — not; icchasi — you like; yat — that which; mohāt — by illusion; kariṣyasi — you will do; avaśaḥ — involuntarily; api — even; tat — that.

Translation

Under illusion you are now declining to act according to My direction. But, compelled by the work born of your own nature, you will act all the same, O son of Kuntī.

Bg. 18.61

ईश्वर: सर्वभूतानां हृद्देशेऽर्जुन तिष्ठति ।

भ्रामयन्सर्वभूतानि यन्‍त्रारूढानि मायया ॥ ६१ ॥

īśvaraḥ sarva-bhūtānāṁ

hṛd-deśe ’rjuna tiṣṭhati

bhrāmayan sarva-bhūtāni

yantrārūḍhāni māyayā

Synonyms

īśvaraḥ — the Supreme Lord; sarva-bhūtānām — of all living entities; hṛt-deśe — in the location of the heart; arjuna — O Arjuna; tiṣṭhati — resides; bhrāmayan — causing to travel; sarva-bhūtāni — all living entities; yantra — on a machine; ārūḍhani — being placed; māyayā — under the spell of material energy.

Translation

The Supreme Lord is situated in everyone’s heart, O Arjuna, and is directing the wanderings of all living entities, who are seated as on a machine, made of the material energy.

Bg. 18.64

सर्वगुह्यतमं भूय: श‍ृणु मे परमं वच: ।

इष्टोऽसि मे दृढमिति ततो वक्ष्यामि ते हितम् ॥ ६४ ॥

sarva-guhyatamaṁ bhūyaḥ

śṛṇu me paramaṁ vacaḥ

iṣṭo ’si me dṛḍham iti

tato vakṣyāmi te hitam

Synonyms

sarva-guhya-tamam — the most confidential of all; bhūyaḥ — again; śṛṇu — just hear; me — from Me; paramam — the supreme; vacaḥ — instruction; iṣṭaḥ asi — you are dear; me — to Me; dṛḍham — very; iti — thus; tataḥ — therefore; vakṣyāmi — I am speaking; te — for your; hitam — benefit.

Translation

Because you are My very dear friend, I am speaking to you My supreme instruction, the most confidential knowledge of all. Hear this from Me, for it is for your benefit.

According to some this can also (Bg 10.8) be considered the paribhava sutra of Bhagavad-gita

Bg. 18.65

मन्मना भव मद्भ‍क्तो मद्याजी मां नमस्कुरु ।

मामेवैष्यसि सत्यं ते प्रतिजाने प्रियोऽसि मे ॥ ६५ ॥

man-manā bhava mad-bhakto

mad-yājī māṁ namaskuru

mām evaiṣyasi satyaṁ te

pratijāne priyo ’si me

Synonyms

mat-manāḥ — thinking of Me; bhava — just become; mat-bhaktaḥ — My devotee; mat-yājī — My worshiper; mām — unto Me; namaskuru — offer your obeisances; mām — unto Me; eva — certainly; eṣyasi — you will come; satyam — truly; te — to you; pratijāne — I promise; priyaḥ — dear; asi — you are; me — to Me.

Translation

Always think of Me, become My devotee, worship Me and offer your homage unto Me. Thus you will come to Me without fail. I promise you this because you are My very dear friend.

Bg. 18.67

इदं ते नातपस्काय नाभक्ताय कदाचन ।

न चाश‍ुश्रूषवे वाच्यं न च मां योऽभ्यसूयति ॥ ६७ ॥

idaṁ te nātapaskāya

nābhaktāya kadācana

na cāśuśrūṣave vācyaṁ

na ca māṁ yo ’bhyasūyati

Synonyms

idam — this; te — by you; na — never; atapaskāya — to one who is not austere; na — never; abhaktāya — to one who is not a devotee; kadācana — at any time; na — never; ca — also; aśuśrūṣave — to one who is not engaged in devotional service; vācyam — to be spoken; na — never; ca — also; mām — toward Me; yaḥ — anyone who; abhyasūyati — is envious.

Translation

This confidential knowledge may never be explained to those who are not austere, or devoted, or engaged in devotional service, nor to one who is envious of Me.

Bg. 18.78

यत्र योगेश्वर: कृष्णो यत्र पार्थो धनुर्धर: ।

तत्र श्रीर्विजयो भूतिर्ध्रुवा नीतिर्मतिर्मम ॥ ७८ ॥

yatra yogeśvaraḥ kṛṣṇo

yatra pārtho dhanur-dharaḥ

tatra śrīr vijayo bhūtir

dhruvā nītir matir mama

Synonyms

yatra — where; yoga-īśvaraḥ — the master of mysticism; kṛṣṇaḥ — Lord Kṛṣṇa; yatra — where; pārthaḥ — the son of Pṛthā; dhanuḥ-dharaḥ — the carrier of the bow and arrow; tatra — there; śrīḥ — opulence; vijayaḥ — victory; bhūtiḥ — exceptional power; dhruvā — certain; nītiḥ — morality; matiḥ mama — my opinion.

Translation

Wherever there is Kṛṣṇa, the master of all mystics, and wherever there is Arjuna, the supreme archer, there will also certainly be opulence, victory, extraordinary power, and morality. That is my opinion.

ŚB 1.1.1

ॐ नमो भगवते वासुदेवाय

जन्माद्यस्य यतोऽन्वयादितरतश्चार्थेष्वभिज्ञ: स्वराट्

तेने ब्रह्म हृदा य आदिकवये मुह्यन्ति यत्सूरय: ।

तेजोवारिमृदां यथा विनिमयो यत्र त्रिसर्गोऽमृषा

धाम्ना स्वेन सदा निरस्तकुहकं सत्यं परं धीमहि ॥ १ ॥

oṁ namo bhagavate vāsudevāya

janmādy asya yato ’nvayād itarataś cārtheṣv abhijñaḥ svarāṭ

tene brahma hṛdā ya ādi-kavaye muhyanti yat sūrayaḥ

tejo-vāri-mṛdāṁ yathā vinimayo yatra tri-sargo ’mṛṣā

dhāmnā svena sadā nirasta-kuhakaṁ satyaṁ paraṁ dhīmahi

Synonyms

om — O my Lord; namaḥ — offering my obeisances; bhagavate — unto the Personality of Godhead; vāsudevāya — unto Vāsudeva (the son of Vasudeva), or Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa, the primeval Lord; janma-ādi — creation, sustenance and destruction; asya — of the manifested universes; yataḥ — from whom; anvayāt — directly; itarataḥ — indirectly; ca — and; artheṣu — purposes; abhijñaḥ — fully cognizant; sva-rāṭ — fully independent; tene — imparted; brahma — the Vedic knowledge; hṛdā — consciousness of the heart; yaḥ — one who; ādi-kavaye — unto the original created being; muhyanti — are illusioned; yat — about whom; sūrayaḥ — great sages and demigods; tejaḥ — fire; vāri — water; mṛdām — earth; yathā — as much as; vinimayaḥ — action and reaction; yatra — whereupon; tri-sargaḥ — three modes of creation, creative faculties; amṛṣā — almost factual; dhāmnā — along with all transcendental paraphernalia; svena — self-sufficiently; sadā — always; nirasta — negation by absence; kuhakam — illusion; satyam — truth; param — absolute; dhīmahi — I do meditate upon.

Translation

O my Lord, Śrī Kṛṣṇa, son of Vasudeva, O all-pervading Personality of Godhead, I offer my respectful obeisances unto You. I meditate upon Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa because He is the Absolute Truth and the primeval cause of all causes of the creation, sustenance and destruction of the manifested universes. He is directly and indirectly conscious of all manifestations, and He is independent because there is no other cause beyond Him. It is He only who first imparted the Vedic knowledge unto the heart of Brahmājī, the original living being. By Him even the great sages and demigods are placed into illusion, as one is bewildered by the illusory representations of water seen in fire, or land seen on water. Only because of Him do the material universes, temporarily manifested by the reactions of the three modes of nature, appear factual, although they are unreal. I therefore meditate upon Him, Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa, who is eternally existent in the transcendental abode, which is forever free from the illusory representations of the material world. I meditate upon Him, for He is the Absolute Truth.

ŚB 1.1.3

निगमकल्पतरोर्गलितं फलं

शुकमुखादमृतद्रवसंयुतम् ।

पिबत भागवतं रसमालयं

मुहुरहो रसिका भुवि भावुका: ॥ ३ ॥

nigama-kalpa-taror galitaṁ phalaṁ

śuka-mukhād amṛta-drava-saṁyutam

pibata bhāgavataṁ rasam ālayam

muhur aho rasikā bhuvi bhāvukāḥ

Synonyms

nigama — the Vedic literatures; kalpa-taroḥ — the desire tree; galitam — fully matured; phalam — fruit; śuka — Śrīla Śukadeva Gosvāmī, the original speaker of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam; mukhāt — from the lips of; amṛta — nectar; drava — semisolid and soft and therefore easily swallowable; saṁyutam — perfect in all respects; pibata — do relish it; bhāgavatam — the book dealing in the science of the eternal relation with the Lord; rasam — juice (that which is relishable); ālayam — until liberation, or even in a liberated condition; muhuḥ — always; aho — O; rasikāḥ — those who are full in the knowledge of mellows; bhuvi — on the earth; bhāvukāḥ — expert and thoughtful.

Translation

O expert and thoughtful men, relish Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, the mature fruit of the desire tree of Vedic literatures. It emanated from the lips of Śrī Śukadeva Gosvāmī. Therefore this fruit has become even more tasteful, although its nectarean juice was already relishable for all, including liberated souls.

SB 1.1.10
prāyeṇālpāyuṣaḥ sabhya

kalāv asmin yuge janāḥ

mandāḥ sumanda-matayo

manda-bhāgyā hy upadrutāḥ

SYNONYMS

prāyeṇa—almost always; alpa—meager; āyuṣaḥ—duration of life; sabhya—member of a learned society; kalau—in this age of Kali (quarrel); asmin—herein; yuge—age; janāḥ—the public; mandāḥ—lazy; sumanda-matayaḥ—misguided; manda-bhāgyāḥ—unlucky; hi—and above all; upadrutāḥ—disturbed.

TRANSLATION

O learned one, in this iron age of Kali men have but short lives. They are quarrelsome, lazy, misguided, unlucky and, above all, always disturbed.

ŚB 1.1.15

यत्पादसंश्रया: सूत मुनय: प्रशमायना: ।

सद्य: पुनन्त्युपस्पृष्टा: स्वर्धुन्यापोऽनुसेवया ॥ १५ ॥

yat-pāda-saṁśrayāḥ sūta

munayaḥ praśamāyanāḥ

sadyaḥ punanty upaspṛṣṭāḥ

svardhuny-āpo ’nusevayā

Synonyms

yat — whose; pāda — lotus feet; saṁśrayāḥ — those who have taken shelter of; sūta — O Sūta Gosvāmī; munayaḥ — great sages; praśamāyanāḥ — absorbed in devotion to the Supreme; sadyaḥ — at once; punanti — sanctify; upaspṛṣṭāḥ — simply by association; svardhunī — of the sacred Ganges; āpaḥ — water; anusevayā — bringing into use.

Translation

O Sūta, those great sages who have completely taken shelter of the lotus feet of the Lord can at once sanctify those who come in touch with them, whereas the waters of the Ganges can sanctify only after prolonged use.

ŚB 1.2.4

नारायणं नमस्कृत्य नरं चैव नरोत्तमम् ।

देवीं सरस्वतीं व्यासं ततो जयमुदीरयेत् ॥ ४ ॥

nārāyaṇaṁ namaskṛtya

naraṁ caiva narottamam

devīṁ sarasvatīṁ vyāsaṁ

tato jayam udīrayet

Synonyms

nārāyaṇam — the Personality of Godhead; namaḥ-kṛtya — after offering respectful obeisances; naram ca eva — and Nārāyaṇa Ṛṣi; nara-uttamam — the supermost human being; devīm — the goddess; sarasvatīm — the mistress of learning; vyāsam — Vyāsadeva; tataḥ — thereafter; jayam — all that is meant for conquering; udīrayet — be announced.

Translation

Before reciting this Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, which is the very means of conquest, one should offer respectful obeisances unto the Personality of Godhead, Nārāyaṇa, unto Nara-nārāyaṇa Ṛṣi, the supermost human being, unto mother Sarasvatī, the goddess of learning, and unto Śrīla Vyāsadeva, the author.

ŚB 1.2.5

मुनय: साधु पृष्टोऽहं भवद्भ‍िर्लोकमङ्गलम् ।

यत्कृत: कृष्णसम्प्रश्नो येनात्मा सुप्रसीदति ॥ ५ ॥

munayaḥ sādhu pṛṣṭo ’haṁ

bhavadbhir loka-maṅgalam

yat kṛtaḥ kṛṣṇa-sampraśno

yenātmā suprasīdati

Synonyms

munayaḥ — O sages; sādhu — this is relevant; pṛṣṭaḥ — questioned; aham — myself; bhavadbhiḥ — by all of you; loka — the world; maṅgalam — welfare; yat — because; kṛtaḥ — made; kṛṣṇa — the Personality of Godhead; sampraśnaḥ — relevant question; yena — by which; ātmā — self; suprasīdati — completely pleased.

Translation

O sages, I have been justly questioned by you. Your questions are worthy because they relate to Lord Kṛṣṇa and so are of relevance to the world’s welfare. Only questions of this sort are capable of completely satisfying the self.

SB 1.2.6

sa vai puṁsāṁ paro dharmo

yato bhaktir adhokṣaje

ahaituky apratihatā

yayātmā suprasīdati

SYNONYMS

saḥ—that; vai—certainly; puṁsām—for mankind; paraḥ—sublime; dharmaḥ—occupation; yataḥ—by which; bhaktiḥ—devotional service; adhokṣaje—unto the Transcendence; ahaitukī—causeless; apratihatā—unbroken; yayā—by which; ātmā—the self; suprasīdati—completely satisfied.

TRANSLATION

The supreme occupation [dharma] for all humanity is that by which men can attain to loving devotional service unto the transcendent Lord. Such devotional service must be unmotivated and uninterrupted to completely satisfy the self.

ŚB 1.2.8

धर्म: स्वनुष्ठित: पुंसां विष्वक्सेनकथासु य: ।

नोत्पादयेद्यदि रतिं श्रम एव हि केवलम् ॥ ८ ॥

dharmaḥ svanuṣṭhitaḥ puṁsāṁ

viṣvaksena-kathāsu yaḥ

notpādayed yadi ratiṁ

śrama eva hi kevalam

Synonyms

dharmaḥ — occupation; svanuṣṭhitaḥ — executed in terms of one’s own position; puṁsām — of humankind; viṣvaksena — the Personality of Godhead (plenary portion); kathāsu — in the message of; yaḥ — what is; na — not; utpādayet — does produce; yadi — if; ratim — attraction; śramaḥ — useless labor; eva — only; hi — certainly; kevalam — entirely.

Translation

The occupational activities a man performs according to his own position are only so much useless labor if they do not provoke attraction for the message of the Personality of Godhead.

ŚB 1.2.11

वदन्ति तत्तत्त्वविदस्तत्त्वं यज्ज्ञानमद्वयम् ।

ब्रह्मेति परमात्मेति भगवानिति शब्द्यते ॥ ११ ॥

vadanti tat tattva-vidas

tattvaṁ yaj jñānam advayam

brahmeti paramātmeti

bhagavān iti śabdyate

Synonyms

vadanti — they say; tat — that; tattva-vidaḥ — the learned souls; tattvam — the Absolute Truth; yat — which; jñānam — knowledge; advayam — nondual; brahma iti — known as Brahman; paramātmā iti — known as Paramātmā; bhagavān iti — known as Bhagavān; śabdyate — it so sounded.

Translation

Learned transcendentalists who know the Absolute Truth call this nondual substance Brahman, Paramātmā or Bhagavān.

ŚB 1.2.12

तच्छ्रद्दधाना मुनयो ज्ञानवैराग्ययुक्तया ।

पश्यन्त्यात्मनि चात्मानं भक्त्या श्रुतगृहीतया ॥ १२ ॥

tac chraddadhānā munayo

jñāna-vairāgya-yuktayā

paśyanty ātmani cātmānaṁ

bhaktyā śruta-gṛhītayā

Synonyms

tat — that; śraddadhānāḥ — seriously inquisitive; munayaḥ — sages; jñāna — knowledge; vairāgya — detachment; yuktayā — well equipped with; paśyanti — see; ātmani — within himself; ca — and; ātmānam — the Paramātmā; bhaktyā — in devotional service; śruta — the Vedas; gṛhītayā — well received.

Translation

The seriously inquisitive student or sage, well equipped with knowledge and detachment, realizes that Absolute Truth by rendering devotional service in terms of what he has heard from the Vedānta-śruti.

ŚB SB 1.2.14

तस्मादेकेन मनसा भगवान् सात्वतां पति: ।

श्रोतव्य: कीर्तितव्यश्च ध्येय: पूज्यश्च नित्यदा ॥ १४ ॥

tasmād ekena manasā

bhagavān sātvatāṁ patiḥ

śrotavyaḥ kīrtitavyaś ca

dhyeyaḥ pūjyaś ca nityadā

Synonyms

tasmāt — therefore; ekena — by one; manasā — attention of the mind; bhagavān — the Personality of Godhead; sātvatām — of the devotees; patiḥ — protector; śrotavyaḥ — is to be heard; kīrtitavyaḥ — to be glorified; ca — and; dhyeyaḥ — to be remembered; pūjyaḥ — to be worshiped; ca — and; nityadā — constantly.

Translation

Therefore, with one-pointed attention, one should constantly hear about, glorify, remember and worship the Personality of Godhead, who is the protector of the devotees.

SB 1.2.15

यदनुध्यासिना युक्ता: कर्मग्रन्थिनिबन्धनम् ।

छिन्दन्ति कोविदास्तस्य को न कुर्यात्कथारतिम् ॥ १५ ॥

yad-anudhyāsinā yuktāḥ
karma-granthi-nibandhanam
chindanti kovidās tasya
ko na kuryāt kathā-ratim

SYNONYMS
yat—which; anudhyā—remembrance; asinā—sword; yuktāḥ—being equipped with; karma—reactionary work; granthi—knot; nibandhanam—interknit; chindanti—cut; kovidāḥ—intelligent; tasya—His; kaḥ—who; na—not; kuryāt—shall do; kathā—messages; ratim—attention.

TRANSLATION
With sword in hand, intelligent men cut through the binding knots of reactionary work [karma] by remembering the Personality of Godhead. Therefore, who will not pay attention to His message?

ALTERNATE TRANSLATION

With sword in hand, intelligent men cut through the labyrinthine knots of reactionary work, or karma, by remembering the Lord. Therefore, who will not pay attention to His message?

From SB 1.2.15 Lecture in Los Angeles, in August 18th 1972

ŚB 1.2.17

श‍ृण्वतां स्वकथा: कृष्ण: पुण्यश्रवणकीर्तन: ।

हृद्यन्त:स्थो ह्यभद्राणि विधुनोति सुहृत्सताम् ॥ १७ ॥

śṛṇvatāṁ sva-kathāḥ kṛṣṇaḥ

puṇya-śravaṇa-kīrtanaḥ

hṛdy antaḥ stho hy abhadrāṇi

vidhunoti suhṛt satām

Synonyms

śṛṇvatām — those who have developed the urge to hear the message of; sva-kathāḥ — His own words; kṛṣṇaḥ — the Personality of Godhead; puṇya — virtues; śravaṇa — hearing; kīrtanaḥ — chanting; hṛdi antaḥ sthaḥ — within one’s heart; hi — certainly; abhadrāṇi — desire to enjoy matter; vidhunoti — cleanses; suhṛt — benefactor; satām — of the truthful.

Translation

Śrī Kṛṣṇa, the Personality of Godhead, who is the Paramātmā [Supersoul] in everyone’s heart and the benefactor of the truthful devotee, cleanses desire for material enjoyment from the heart of the devotee who has developed the urge to hear His messages, which are in themselves virtuous when properly heard and chanted.

ŚB 1.2.18

नष्टप्रायेष्वभद्रेषु नित्यं भागवतसेवया ।

भगवत्युत्तमश्लोके भक्तिर्भवति नैष्ठिकी ॥ १८ ॥

naṣṭa-prāyeṣv abhadreṣu

nityaṁ bhāgavata-sevayā

bhagavaty uttama-śloke

bhaktir bhavati naiṣṭhikī

Synonyms

naṣṭa — destroyed; prāyeṣu — almost to nil; abhadreṣu — all that is inauspicious; nityam — regularly; bhāgavata — Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, or the pure devotee; sevayā — by serving; bhagavati — unto the Personality of Godhead; uttama — transcendental; śloke — prayers; bhaktiḥ — loving service; bhavati — comes into being; naiṣṭhikī — irrevocable.

Translation

By regular attendance in classes on the Bhāgavatam and by rendering of service to the pure devotee, all that is troublesome to the heart is almost completely destroyed, and loving service unto the Personality of Godhead, who is praised with transcendental songs, is established as an irrevocable fact.

ŚB 1.2.19

तदा रजस्तमोभावा: कामलोभादयश्च ये ।

चेत एतैरनाविद्धं स्थितं सत्त्वे प्रसीदति ॥ १९ ॥

tadā rajas-tamo-bhāvāḥ

kāma-lobhādayaś ca ye

ceta etair anāviddhaṁ

sthitaṁ sattve prasīdati

Synonyms

tadā — at that time; rajaḥ — in the mode of passion; tamaḥ — the mode of ignorance; bhāvāḥ — the situation; kāma — lust and desire; lobha — hankering; ādayaḥ — others; ca — and; ye — whatever they are; cetaḥ — the mind; etaiḥ — by these; anāviddham — without being affected; sthitam — being fixed; sattve — in the mode of goodness; prasīdati — thus becomes fully satisfied.

Translation

As soon as irrevocable loving service is established in the heart, the effects of nature’s modes of passion and ignorance, such as lust, desire and hankering, disappear from the heart. Then the devotee is established in goodness, and he becomes completely happy.

SB 1.2.20

एवं प्रसन्नमनसो भगवद्भक्तियोगत:

।भगवत्तत्त्वविज्ञानं मुक्तसङ्गस्य जायते ॥ २० ॥

evaṁ prasanna-manaso

bhagavad-bhakti-yogataḥ

bhagavat-tattva-vijñānaṁ

mukta-saṅgasya jāyate

Synonyms

evam — thus; prasanna — enlivened; manasaḥ — of the mind; bhagavat-bhakti — the devotional service of the Lord; yogataḥ — by contact of; bhagavat — regarding the Personality of Godhead; tattva — knowledge; vijñānam — scientific; mukta — liberated; saṅgasya — of the association; jāyate — becomes effective.

Translation

Thus established in the mode of unalloyed goodness, the man whose mind has been enlivened by contact with devotional service to the Lord gains positive scientific knowledge of the Personality of Godhead in the stage of liberation from all material association.

ŚB 1.2.21

भिद्यते हृदयग्रन्थिश्छिद्यन्ते सर्वसंशया: ।

क्षीयन्ते चास्य कर्माणि द‍ृष्ट एवात्मनीश्वरे ॥ २१ ॥

bhidyate hṛdaya-granthiś

chidyante sarva-saṁśayāḥ

kṣīyante cāsya karmāṇi

dṛṣṭa evātmanīśvare

Synonyms

bhidyate — pierced; hṛdaya — heart; granthiḥ — knots; chidyante — cut to pieces; sarva — all; saṁśayāḥ — misgivings; kṣīyante — terminated; ca — and; asya — his; karmāṇi — chain of fruitive actions; dṛṣṭe — having seen; eva — certainly; ātmani — unto the self; īśvare — dominating.

Translation

Thus the knot in the heart is pierced, and all misgivings are cut to pieces. The chain of fruitive actions is terminated when one sees the self as master.

This is the paribhasa sutra of the Srimad Bhagavatam

ŚB 1.3.28

एते चांशकला: पुंस: कृष्णस्तु भगवान् स्वयम् ।

इन्द्रारिव्याकुलं लोकं मृडयन्ति युगे युगे ॥ २८ ॥

ete cāṁśa-kalāḥ puṁsaḥ

kṛṣṇas tu bhagavān svayam

indrāri-vyākulaṁ lokaṁ

mṛḍayanti yuge yuge

Synonyms

Translation

SB 1.3.38

sa veda dhātuḥ padavīṁ parasya
duranta-vīryasya rathāṅga-pāṇeḥ
yo 'māyayā santatayānuvṛttyā
bhajeta tat-pāda-saroja-gandham

SYNONYMS

saḥ—He alone; veda—can know; dhātuḥ—of the creator; padavīm—glories; parasya—of the transcendence; duranta-vīryas ya—of the greatly powerful; ratha-aṅga-pāṇeḥ—of Lord Kṛṣṇa, who bears in His hand the wheel of a chariot; yaḥ—one who; amāyayā—without reservation; santatayā—without any gap; anuvṛttyā—favorably; bhajeta—renders service; tat-pāda—of His feet; saroja-gandham—fragrance of the lotus.

TRANSLATION

Only those who render unreserved, uninterrupted, favorable service unto the lotus feet of Lord Kṛṣṇa, who carries the wheel of the chariot in His hand, can know the creator of the universe in His full glory, power and transcendence.

ŚB 1.5.17

त्यक्त्वा स्वधर्मं चरणाम्बुजं हरे-

र्भजन्नपक्‍वोऽथ पतेत्ततो यदि ।

यत्र क्‍व वाभद्रमभूदमुष्य किं

को वार्थ आप्तोऽभजतां स्वधर्मत: ॥ १७ ॥

tyaktvā sva-dharmaṁ caraṇāmbujaṁ harer

bhajann apakvo ’tha patet tato yadi

yatra kva vābhadram abhūd amuṣya kiṁ

ko vārtha āpto ’bhajatāṁ sva-dharmataḥ

Synonyms

tyaktvā — having forsaken; sva-dharmam — one’s own occupational engagement; caraṇa-ambujam — the lotus feet; hareḥ — of Hari (the Lord); bhajan — in the course of devotional service; apakvaḥ — immature; atha — for the matter of; patet — falls down; tataḥ — from that place; yadi — if; yatra — whereupon; kva — what sort of; vā — or (used sarcastically); abhadram — unfavorable; abhūt — shall happen; amuṣya — of him; kim — nothing; kaḥ vā arthaḥ — what interest; āptaḥ — obtained; abhajatām — of the nondevotee; sva-dharmataḥ — being engaged in occupational service.

Translation

One who has forsaken his material occupations to engage in the devotional service of the Lord may sometimes fall down while in an immature stage, yet there is no danger of his being unsuccessful. On the other hand, a nondevotee, though fully engaged in occupational duties, does not gain anything.

ŚB 1.5.18

तस्यैव हेतो: प्रयतेत कोविदोन लभ्यते यद्भ्रमतामुपर्यध: ।

तल्लभ्यते दु:खवदन्यत: सुखंकालेन सर्वत्र गभीररंहसा ॥ १८ ॥

tasyaiva hetoḥ prayateta kovido

na labhyate yad bhramatām upary adhaḥ

tal labhyate duḥkhavad anyataḥ sukhaṁ

kālena sarvatra gabhīra-raṁhasā

Synonyms

tasya — for that purpose; eva — only; hetoḥ — reason; prayateta — should endeavor; kovidaḥ — one who is philosophically inclined; na labhyate — is not obtained; yat — what; bhramatām — wandering; upari adhaḥ — from top to bottom; tat — that; labhyate — can be obtained; duḥkhavat — like the miseries; anyataḥ — as a result of previous work; sukham — sense enjoyment; kālena — in course of time; sarvatra — everywhere; gabhīra — subtle; raṁhasā — progress.

Translation

Persons who are actually intelligent and philosophically inclined should endeavor only for that purposeful end which is not obtainable even by wandering from the topmost planet [Brahmaloka] down to the lowest planet [Pātāla]. As far as happiness derived from sense enjoyment is concerned, it can be obtained automatically in course of time, just as in course of time we obtain miseries even though we do not desire them.

ŚB 1.7.4

भक्तियोगेन मनसि सम्यक् प्रणिहितेऽमले ।

अपश्यत्पुरुषं पूर्णं मायां च तदपाश्रयम् ॥ ४ ॥

bhakti-yogena manasi

samyak praṇihite ’male

apaśyat puruṣaṁ pūrṇaṁ

māyāṁ ca tad-apāśrayām

Synonyms

bhakti — devotional service; yogena — by the process of linking up; manasi — upon the mind; samyak — perfectly; praṇihite — engaged in and fixed upon; amale — without any matter; apaśyat — saw; puruṣam — the Personality of Godhead; pūrṇam — absolute; māyām — energy; ca — also; tat — His; apāśrayam — under full control.

Translation

Thus he fixed his mind, perfectly engaging it by linking it in devotional service [bhakti-yoga] without any tinge of materialism, and thus he saw the Absolute Personality of Godhead along with His external energy, which was under full control.

Purport by MGDas

This is the inspiration for Vyasadeva to write the Srimad Bhagavatam.

ŚB 1.7.6

अनर्थोपशमं साक्षाद्भक्तियोगमधोक्षजे ।

लोकस्याजानतो विद्वांश्चक्रे सात्वतसंहिताम् ॥ ६ ॥

anarthopaśamaṁ sākṣād

bhakti-yogam adhokṣaje

lokasyājānato vidvāṁś

cakre sātvata-saṁhitām

Synonyms

anartha — things which are superfluous; upaśamam — mitigation; sākṣāt — directly; bhakti-yogam — the linking process of devotional service; adhokṣaje — unto the Transcendence; lokasya — of the general mass of men; ajānataḥ — those who are unaware of; vidvān — the supremely learned; cakre — compiled; sātvata — in relation with the Supreme Truth; saṁhitām — Vedic literature.

Translation

The material miseries of the living entity, which are superfluous to him, can be directly mitigated by the linking process of devotional service. But the mass of people do not know this, and therefore the learned Vyāsadeva compiled this Vedic literature, which is in relation to the Supreme Truth.

ŚB 1.7.10

सूत उवाचआत्मारामाश्च मुनयो निर्ग्रन्था अप्युरुक्रमे ।

कुर्वन्त्यहैतुकीं भक्तिमित्थम्भूतगुणो हरि: ॥ १० ॥

sūta uvāca

ātmārāmāś ca munayo

nirgranthā apy urukrame

kurvanty ahaitukīṁ bhaktim

ittham-bhūta-guṇo hariḥ

Synonyms

sūtaḥ uvāca — Sūta Gosvāmī said; ātmārāmāḥ — those who take pleasure in the ātmā (generally, spirit self); ca — also; munayaḥ — sages; nirgranthāḥ — freed from all bondage; api — in spite of; urukrame — unto the great adventurer; kurvanti — do; ahaitukīm — unalloyed; bhaktim — devotional service; ittham-bhūta — such wonderful; guṇaḥ — qualities; hariḥ — of the Lord.

Translation

Sūta Gosvāmī said: All different varieties of ātmārāmas [those who take pleasure in the ātmā, or spirit self], especially those established on the path of self-realization, though freed from all kinds of material bondage, desire to render unalloyed devotional service unto the Personality of Godhead. This means that the Lord possesses transcendental qualities and therefore can attract everyone, including liberated souls.

ŚB 1.18.13

तुलयाम लवेनापि न स्वर्गं नापुनर्भवम् ।

भगवत्सङ्गिसङ्गस्य मर्त्यानां किमुताशिष: ॥ १३ ॥

tulayāma lavenāpina

svargaṁ nāpunar-bhavam

bhagavat-saṅgi-saṅgasya

martyānāṁ kim utāśiṣaḥ

Synonyms

tulayāma — to be balanced with; lavena — by a moment; api — even; na — never; svargam — heavenly planets; na — nor; apunaḥ-bhavam — liberation from matter; bhagavat-saṅgi — devotee of the Lord; saṅgasya — of the association; martyānām — those who are meant for death; kim — what is there; uta — to speak of; āśiṣaḥ — worldly benediction.

Translation

The value of a moment’s association with the devotee of the Lord cannot even be compared to the attainment of heavenly planets or liberation from matter, and what to speak of worldly benedictions in the form of material prosperity, which are for those who are meant for death.

ŚB 1.8.21

कृष्णाय वासुदेवाय देवकीनन्दनाय च ।

नन्दगोपकुमाराय गोविन्दाय नमो नम: ॥ २१ ॥

kṛṣṇāya vāsudevāya

devakī-nandanāya ca

nanda-gopa-kumārāya

govindāya namo namaḥ

Synonyms

kṛṣṇāya — the Supreme Lord; vāsudevāya — unto the son of Vasudeva; devakī-nandanāya — unto the son of Devakī; ca — and; nanda-gopa — Nanda and the cowherd men; kumārāya — unto their son; govindāya — unto the Personality of Godhead, who enlivens the cows and the senses; namaḥ — respectful obeisances; namaḥ — obeisances.

Translation

Let me therefore offer my respectful obeisances unto the Lord, who has become the son of Vasudeva, the pleasure of Devakī, the boy of Nanda and the other cowherd men of Vṛndāvana, and the enlivener of the cows and the senses.

ŚB 1.8.25

vipadaḥ santu tāḥ śaśvat

tatra tatra jagad-guro

bhavato darśanaṁ yat syād

apunar bhava-darśanam

Synonyms

vipadaḥ — calamities; santu — let there be; tāḥ — all; śaśvat — again and again; tatra — there; tatra — and there; jagat-guro — O Lord of the universe; bhavataḥ — Your; darśanam — meeting; yat — that which; syāt — is; apunaḥ — not again; bhava-darśanam — seeing repetition of birth and death.

Translation

I wish that all those calamities would happen again and again so that we could see You again and again, for seeing You means that we will no longer see repeated births and deaths.

ŚB 1.8.26

जन्मैश्वर्यश्रुतश्रीभिरेधमानमद: पुमान् ।

नैवार्हत्यभिधातुं वै त्वामकिञ्चनगोचरम् ॥ २६ ॥

janmaiśvarya-śruta-śrībhir

edhamāna-madaḥ pumān

naivārhaty abhidhātuṁ vai

tvām akiñcana-gocaram

Synonyms

janma — birth; aiśvarya — opulence; śruta — education; śrībhiḥ — by the possession of beauty; edhamāna — progressively increasing; madaḥ — intoxication; pumān — the human being; na — never; eva — ever; arhati — deserves; abhidhātum — to address in feeling; vai — certainly; tvām — You; akiñcana-gocaram — one who is approached easily by the materially exhausted man.

Translation

My Lord, Your Lordship can easily be approached, but only by those who are materially exhausted. One who is on the path of [material] progress, trying to improve himself with respectable parentage, great opulence, high education and bodily beauty, cannot approach You with sincere feeling.

ŚB 1.8.42

त्वयि मेऽनन्यविषया मतिर्मधुपतेऽसकृत् ।

रतिमुद्वहतादद्धा गङ्गेवौघमुदन्वति ॥ ४२ ॥

tvayi me ’nanya-viṣayā

matir madhu-pate ’sakṛt

ratim udvahatād addhā

gaṅgevaugham udanvati

Synonyms

tvayi — unto You; me — my; ananya-viṣayā — unalloyed; matiḥ — attention; madhu-pate — O Lord of Madhu; asakṛt — continuously; ratim — attraction; udvahatāt — may overflow; addhā — directly; gaṅgā — the Ganges; iva — like; ogham — flows; udanvati — down to the sea.

Translation

O Lord of Madhu, as the Ganges forever flows to the sea without hindrance, let my attraction be constantly drawn unto You without being diverted to anyone else.

ŚB 1.9.12

अहो कष्टमहोऽन्याय्यं यद्यूयं धर्मनन्दना: ।

जीवितुं नार्हथ क्लिष्टं विप्रधर्माच्युताश्रया: ॥ १२ ॥

aho kaṣṭam aho ’nyāyyaṁ

yad yūyaṁ dharma-nandanāḥ

jīvituṁ nārhatha kliṣṭaṁ

vipra-dharmācyutāśrayāḥ

Synonyms

aho — oh; kaṣṭam — what terrible sufferings; aho — oh; anyāyyam — what terrible injustice; yat — because; yūyam — all of you good souls; dharma-nandanāḥ — sons of religion personified; jīvitum — to remain alive; na — never; arhatha — deserve; kliṣṭam — suffering; vipra — brāhmaṇas; dharma — piety; acyuta — God; āśrayāḥ — being protected by.

Translation

Bhīṣmadeva said: Oh, what terrible sufferings and what terrible injustices you good souls suffer for being the sons of religion personified. You did not deserve to remain alive under those tribulations, yet you were protected by the brāhmaṇas, God and religion.

ŚB 1.9.14

सर्वं कालकृतं मन्ये भवतां च यदप्रियम् ।

सपालो यद्वशे लोको वायोरिव घनावलि: ॥ १४ ॥

sarvaṁ kāla-kṛtaṁ manye

bhavatāṁ ca yad-apriyam

sapālo yad-vaśe loko

vāyor iva ghanāvaliḥ

Synonyms

sarvam — all this; kāla-kṛtam — done by inevitable time; manye — I think; bhavatām ca — for you also; yat — whatever; apriyam — detestable; sa-pālaḥ — with the rulers; yat-vaśe — under the control of that time; lokaḥ — everyone in every planet; vāyoḥ — the wind carries; iva — as; ghana-āvaliḥ — a line of clouds.

Translation

In my opinion, this is all due to inevitable time, under whose control everyone in every planet is carried, just as the clouds are carried by the wind.

SB 1.9.16

na hy asya karhicid rājan

pumān veda vidhitsitam

yad vijijñāsayā yuktā

muhyanti kavayo ’pi hi

Synonyms

na — never; hi — certainly; asya — His; karhicit — whatsoever; rājan — O King; pumān — anyone; veda — knows; vidhitsitam — plan; yat — which; vijijñāsayā — with exhaustive inquiries; yuktāḥ — being engaged; muhyanti — bewildered; kavayaḥ — great philosophers; api — even; hi — certainly.

Translation

O King, no one can know the plan of the Lord [Śrī Kṛṣṇa]. Even though great philosophers inquire exhaustively, they are bewildered.

ŚB 1.11.38

एतदीशनमीशस्य प्रकृतिस्थोऽपि तद्गुणै: ।

न युज्यते सदात्मस्थैर्यथा बुद्धिस्तदाश्रया ॥ ३८ ॥

etad īśanam īśasya

prakṛti-stho ’pi tad-guṇaiḥ

na yujyate sadātma-sthair

yathā buddhis tad-āśrayā

Synonyms

etat — this; īśanam — divinity; īśasya — of the Personality of Godhead; prakṛti-sthaḥ — being in contact with material nature; api — in spite of; tat-guṇaiḥ — by the qualities; na — never; yujyate — is affected; sadā ātma-sthaiḥ — by those who are situated in eternity; yathā — as is; buddhiḥ — intelligence; tat — the Lord; āśrayā — those who are under the shelter of.

Translation

This is the divinity of the Personality of Godhead: He is not affected by the qualities of material nature, even though He is in contact with them. Similarly, the devotees who have taken shelter of the Lord do not become influenced by the material qualities.

ŚB 1.13.10

भवद्विधा भागवतास्तीर्थभूता: स्वयं विभो ।

तीर्थीकुर्वन्ति तीर्थानि स्वान्त:स्थेन गदाभृता ॥ १० ॥

bhavad-vidhā bhāgavatās

tīrtha-bhūtāḥ svayaṁ vibho

tīrthī-kurvanti tīrthānis

vāntaḥ-sthena gadābhṛtā

Synonyms

bhavat — your good self; vidhāḥ — like; bhāgavatāḥ — devotees; tīrtha — the holy places of pilgrimage; bhūtāḥ — converted into; svayam — personally; vibho — O powerful one; tīrthī-kurvanti — make into a holy place of pilgrimage; tīrthāni — the holy places; sva-antaḥ-sthena — having been situated in the heart; gadā-bhṛtā — the Personality of Godhead.

Translation

My lord, devotees like your good self are verily holy places personified. Because you carry the Personality of Godhead within your heart, you turn all places into places of pilgrimage.

SB 1.18.13

तुलयाम लवेनापि न स्वर्गं नापुनर्भवम् ।

भगवत्सङ्गिसङ्गस्य मर्त्यानां किमुताशिष: ॥ १३ ॥

tulayāma lavenāpina

svargaṁ nāpunar-bhavam

bhagavat-saṅgi-saṅgasya

martyānāṁ kim utāśiṣaḥ

Synonyms

Translation

ŚB 1.15.40

विसृज्य तत्र तत् सर्वं दुकूलवलयादिकम् ।

निर्ममो निरहङ्कार: सञ्छिन्नाशेषबन्धन: ॥ ४० ॥

visṛjya tatra tat sarvaṁ

dukūla-valayādikam

nirmamo nirahaṅkāraḥ

sañchinnāśeṣa-bandhanaḥ

Synonyms

visṛjya — relinquishing; tatra — all those; tat — that; sarvam — everything; dukūla — belt; valaya-ādikam — and bangles; nirmamaḥ — uninterested; nirahaṅkāraḥ — unattached; sañchinna — perfectly cut off; aśeṣa-bandhanaḥ — unlimited attachment.

Translation

Mahārāja Yudhiṣṭhira at once relinquished all his garments, belt and ornaments of the royal order and became completely disinterested and unattached to everything.

ŚB 2.1.10

तदहं तेऽभिधास्यामि महापौरुषिको भवान् ।

यस्य श्रद्दधतामाशु स्यान्मुकुन्दे मति: सती ॥ १० ॥

tad ahaṁ te ’bhidhāsyāmi

mahā-pauruṣiko bhavān

yasya śraddadhatām āśu

syān mukunde matiḥ satī

Synonyms

tat — that; aham — I; te — unto you; abhidhāsyāmi — shall recite; mahā-pauruṣikaḥ — the most sincere devotee of Lord Kṛṣṇa; bhavān — your good self; yasya — of which; śraddadhatām — of one who gives full respect and attention; āśu — very soon; syāt — it so becomes; mukunde — unto the Lord, who awards salvation; matiḥ — faith; satī — unflinching.

Translation

That very Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam I shall recite before you because you are the most sincere devotee of Lord Kṛṣṇa. One who gives full attention and respect to hearing Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam achieves unflinching faith in the Supreme Lord, the giver of salvation.

ŚB 2.1.11

एतन्निर्विद्यमानानामिच्छतामकुतोभयम् ।

योगिनां नृप निर्णीतं हरेर्नामानुकीर्तनम् ॥ ११ ॥

etan nirvidyamānānām

icchatām akuto-bhayam

yogināṁ nṛpa nirṇītaṁ

harer nāmānu kīrtanam

Synonyms

etat — it is; nirvidyamānānām — of those who are completely free from all material desires; icchatām — of those who are desirous of all sorts of material enjoyment; akutaḥ-bhayam — free from all doubts and fear; yoginām — of all who are self-satisfied; nṛpa — O King; nirṇītam — decided truth; hareḥ — of the Lord, Śrī Kṛṣṇa; nāma — holy name; anu — after someone, always; kīrtanam — chanting.

Translation

O King, constant chanting of the holy name of the Lord after the ways of the great authorities is the doubtless and fearless way of success for all, including those who are free from all material desires, those who are desirous of all material enjoyment, and also those who are self-satisfied by dint of transcendental knowledge.

ŚB 2.2.10
उन्निद्रहृत्पङ्कजकर्णिकालये
योगेश्वरास्थापितपादपल्लवम् ।
श्रीलक्षणं कौस्तुभरत्नकन्धर-
मम्‍लानलक्ष्म्या वनमालयाचितम् ॥ १० ॥

unnidra-hṛt-paṅkaja-karṇikālaye
yogeśvarāsthāpita-pāda-pallavam
śrī-lakṣaṇaṁ kaustubha-ratna-kandharam
amlāna-lakṣmyā vana-mālayācitam

Synonyms
unnidra — blooming; hṛt — heart; paṅkaja — lotus flower; karṇikā-ālaye — on the surface of the whorl; yoga-īśvara — the great mystics; āsthāpita — placed; pāda-pallavam — lotus feet; śrī — the goddess of fortune, or a beautiful calf; lakṣaṇam — marked in that way; kaustubha — the Kaustubha jewel; ratna — other jewels; kandharam — on the shoulder; amlāna — quite fresh; lakṣmyā — beauty; vana-mālayā — by a flower garland; ācitam — spread over.

Translation
His lotus feet are placed over the whorls of the lotuslike hearts of great mystics. On His chest is the Kaustubha jewel, engraved with a beautiful calf, and there are other jewels on His shoulders. His complete torso is garlanded with fresh flowers.

ŚB 2.2.34
भगवान् ब्रह्म कार्त्स्‍न्येन त्रिरन्वीक्ष्य मनीषया ।
तदध्यवस्यत् कूटस्थो रतिरात्मन् यतो भवेत् ॥ ३४ ॥

bhagavān brahma kārtsnyena
trir anvīkṣya manīṣayā
tad adhyavasyat kūṭa-stho
ratir ātman yato bhavet

Synonyms

bhagavān — the great personality Brahmā; brahma — the Vedas; kārtsnyena — by summarization; triḥ — three times; anvīkṣya — scrutinizingly examined; manīṣayā — with scholarly attention; tat — that; adhyavasyat — ascertained it; kūṭa-sthaḥ — with concentration of the mind; ratiḥ — attraction; ātman (ātmani) — unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead Śrī Kṛṣṇa; yataḥ — by which; bhavet — it so happens.

Translation
The great personality Brahmā, with great attention and concentration of the mind, studied the Vedas three times, and after scrutinizingly examining them, he ascertained that attraction for the Supreme Personality of Godhead Śrī Kṛṣṇa is the highest perfection of religion.

ŚB 2.3.10
अकाम: सर्वकामो वा मोक्षकाम उदारधी: ।
तीव्रेण भक्तियोगेन यजेत पुरुषं परम् ॥ १० ॥

akāmaḥ sarva-kāmo vā
mokṣa-kāma udāra-dhīḥ
tīvreṇa bhakti-yogena
yajeta puruṣaṁ param

Synonyms
akāmaḥ — one who has transcended all material desires; sarva-kāmaḥ — one who has the sum total of material desires; vā — either; mokṣa-kāmaḥ — one who desires liberation; udāra-dhīḥ — with broader intelligence; tīvreṇa — with great force; bhakti-yogena — by devotional service to the Lord; yajeta — should worship; puruṣam — the Lord; param — the supreme whole.

Translation
A person who has broader intelligence, whether he be full of all material desire, without any material desire, or desiring liberation, must by all means worship the supreme whole, the Personality of Godhead.

ŚB 2.3.17

आयुर्हरति वै पुंसामुद्यन्नस्तं च यन्नसौ ।

तस्यर्ते यत्क्षणो नीत उत्तमश्लोकवार्तया ॥ १७ ॥

āyur harati vai puṁsām

udyann astaṁ ca yann asau

tasyarte yat-kṣaṇo nīta

uttama-śloka-vārtayā

Synonyms

āyuḥ — duration of life; harati — decreases; vai — certainly; puṁsām — of the people; udyan — rising; astam — setting; ca — also; yan — moving; asau — the sun; tasya — of one who glorifies the Lord; ṛte — except; yat — by whom; kṣaṇaḥ — time; nītaḥ — utilized; uttama-śloka — the all-good Personality of Godhead; vārtayā — in the topics of.

Translation

Both by rising and by setting, the sun decreases the duration of life of everyone, except one who utilizes the time by discussing topics of the all-good Personality of Godhead.

ŚB 2.3.18

तरव: किं न जीवन्ति भस्त्रा: किं न श्वसन्त्युत ।

न खादन्ति न मेहन्ति किं ग्रामे पशवोऽपरे ॥ १८ ॥

taravaḥ kiṁ na jīvanti

bhastrāḥ kiṁ na śvasanty uta

na khādanti na mehanti

kiṁ grāme paśavo ’pare

Synonyms

taravaḥ — the trees; kim — whether; na — do not; jīvanti — live; bhastrāḥ — bellows; kim — whether; na — do not; śvasanti — breathe; uta — also; na — do not; khādanti — eat; na — do not; mehanti — discharge semen; kim — whether; grāme — in the locality; paśavaḥ — beastly living being; apare — others.

Translation

Do the trees not live? Do the bellows of the blacksmith not breathe? All around us, do the beasts not eat and discharge semen?

ŚB 2.3.24

तदश्मसारं हृदयं बतेदं

यद् गृह्यमाणैर्हरिनामधेयै:

।न विक्रियेताथ यदा विकारो

नेत्रे जलं गात्ररुहेषु हर्ष: ॥ २४ ॥

tad aśma-sāraṁ hṛdayaṁ batedaṁ

yad gṛhyamāṇair hari-nāma-dheyaiḥ

na vikriyetātha yadā vikāro

netre jalaṁ gātra-ruheṣu harṣaḥ

Synonyms

tat — that; aśma-sāram — is steel-framed; hṛdayam — heart; bata idam — certainly that; yat — which; gṛhyamāṇaiḥ — in spite of chanting; hari-nāma — the holy name of the Lord; dheyaiḥ — by concentration of the mind; na — does not; vikriyeta — change; atha — thus; yadā — when; vikāraḥ — reaction; netre — in the eyes; jalam — tears; gātra-ruheṣu — at the pores; harṣaḥ — eruptions of ecstasy.

Translation

Certainly that heart is steel-framed which, in spite of one’s chanting the holy name of the Lord with concentration, does not change when ecstasy takes place, tears fill the eyes and the hairs stand on end.

Comment MGDAS

See also: CC Madhya 2.31, purport (by Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī Ṭhākura)

ŚB 2.4.18

kirāta-hūṇāndhra-pulinda-pulkaśā

ābhīra-śumbhā yavanāḥ khasādayaḥ

ye ’nye ca pāpā yad-apāśrayāśrayāḥ

śudhyanti tasmai prabhaviṣṇave namaḥ

Synonyms

kirāta — a province of old Bhārata; hūṇa — part of Germany and Russia; āndhra — a province of southern India; pulinda — the Greeks; pulkaśāḥ — another province; ābhīra — part of old Sind; śumbhāḥ — another province; yavanāḥ — the Turks; khasa-ādayaḥ — the Mongolian province; ye — even those; anye — others; ca — also; pāpāḥ — addicted to sinful acts; yat — whose; apāśraya-āśrayāḥ — having taken shelter of the devotees of the Lord; śudhyanti — at once purified; tasmai — unto Him; prabhaviṣṇave — unto the powerful Viṣṇu; namaḥ — my respectful obeisances.

Translation

Kirāta, Hūṇa, Āndhra, Pulinda, Pulkaśa, Ābhīra, Śumbha, Yavana, members of the Khasa races and even others addicted to sinful acts can be purified by taking shelter of the devotees of the Lord, due to His being the supreme power. I beg to offer my respectful obeisances unto Him.

Purport

Kirāta: A province of old Bhārata-varṣa mentioned in the Bhīṣma-parva of Mahābhārata. Generally the Kirātas are known as the aboriginal tribes of India, and in modern days the Santal Parganas in Bihar and Chota Nagpur might comprise the old province named Kirāta.

Hūṇa: The area of East Germany and part of Russia is known as the province of the Hūṇas. Accordingly, sometimes a kind of hill tribe is known as the Hūṇas.Āndhra: A province in southern India mentioned in the Bhīṣma-parva of Mahābhārata. It is still extant under the same name.

Pulinda: It is mentioned in the Mahābhārata (Ādi-parva 174.38), viz., the inhabitants of the province of the name Pulinda. This country was conquered by Bhīmasena and Sahadeva. The Greeks are known as Pulindas, and it is mentioned in the Vana-parva of Mahābhārata that the non-Vedic race of this part of the world would rule over the world. This Pulinda province was also one of the provinces of Bhārata, and the inhabitants were classified amongst the kṣatriya kings. But later on, due to their giving up the brahminical culture, they were mentioned as mlecchas (just as those who are not followers of the Islamic culture are called kafirs and those who are not followers of the Christian culture are called heathens).

Ābhīra: This name also appears in the Mahābhārata, both in the Sabhā-parva and Bhīṣma-parva. It is mentioned that this province was situated on the River Sarasvatī in Sind. The modern Sind province formerly extended on the other side of the Arabian Sea, and all the inhabitants of that province were known as the Ābhīras. They were under the domination of Mahārāja Yudhiṣṭhira, and according to the statements of Mārkaṇḍeya the mlecchas of this part of the world would also rule over Bhārata. Later on this proved to be true, as in the case of the Pulindas. On behalf of the Pulindas, Alexander the Great conquered India, and on behalf of the Ābhīras, Muhammad Ghori conquered India. These Ābhīras were also formerly kṣatriyas within the brahminical culture, but they gave up the connection. The kṣatriyas who were afraid of Paraśurāma and had hidden themselves in the Caucasian hilly regions later on became known as the Ābhīras, and the place they inhabited was known as Ābhīradeśa.

Śumbhas or Kaṅkas: The inhabitants of the Kaṅka province of old Bhārata, mentioned in the Mahābhārata.

Yavanas: Yavana was the name of one of the sons of Mahārāja Yayāti who was given the part of the world known as Turkey to rule. Therefore the Turks are Yavanas due to being descendants of Mahārāja Yavana. The Yavanas were therefore kṣatriyas, and later on, by giving up the brahminical culture, they became mleccha-yavanas. Descriptions of the Yavanas are in the Mahābhārata (Ādi-parva 85.34). Another prince, called Turvasu, was also known as Yavana, and his country was conquered by Sahadeva, one of the Pāṇḍavas. The western Yavana joined with Duryodhana in the Battle of Kurukṣetra under the pressure of Karṇa. It was also foretold that these Yavanas also would conquer India, and it proved to be true.

Khasa: The inhabitants of the Khasadeśa are mentioned in the Mahābhārata (Droṇa-parva). Those who have a stunted growth of hair on the upper lip are generally called Khasas. As such, the Khasa are the Mongolians, the Chinese and others who are so designated.

SB 2.8.4

श‍ृण्वत: श्रद्धया नित्यं गृणतश्च स्वचेष्टितम् ।

कालेन नातिदीर्घेण भगवान् विशते हृदि ॥ ४ ॥

śṛṇvataḥ śraddhayā nityaṁ

gṛṇataś ca sva-ceṣṭitam

kālena nātidīrgheṇa

bhagavān viśate hṛdi

Synonyms

śṛṇvataḥ — of those who hear; śraddhayā — in earnestness; nityam — regularly, always; gṛṇataḥ — taking the matter; ca — also; sva-ceṣṭitam — seriously by one’s own endeavor; kālena — duration; na — not; ati-dīrgheṇa — very prolonged time; bhagavān — the Personality of Godhead Śrī Kṛṣṇa; viśate — becomes manifest; hṛdi — within one’s heart.

Translation

Persons who hear Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam regularly and are always taking the matter very seriously will have the Personality of Godhead Śrī Kṛṣṇa manifested in their hearts within a short time.

ŚB 2.8.5

प्रविष्ट: कर्णरन्ध्रेण स्वानां भावसरोरुहम् ।

धुनोति शमलं कृष्ण: सलिलस्य यथा शरत् ॥ ५ ॥

praviṣṭaḥ karṇa-randhreṇa

svānāṁ bhāva-saroruham

dhunoti śamalaṁ kṛṣṇaḥ

salilasya yathā śarat

Synonyms

praviṣṭaḥ — thus being entered; karṇa-randhreṇa — through the holes of the ears; svānām — according to one’s liberated position; bhāva — constitutional relationship; saraḥ-ruham — the lotus flower; dhunoti — cleanses; śamalam — material qualities like lust, anger, avarice and hankering; kṛṣṇaḥ — Lord Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead; salilasya — of the reservoir of waters; yathā — as it were; śarat — the autumn season.

Translation

The sound incarnation of Lord Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Soul [i.e., Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam], enters into the heart of a self-realized devotee, sits on the lotus flower of his loving relationship, and thus cleanses the dust of material association, such as lust, anger and hankering. Thus it acts like autumnal rains upon pools of muddy water.

ŚB 2.9.21

वरं वरय भद्रं ते वरेशं माभिवाञ्छितम् ।

ब्रह्मञ्छ्रेय:परिश्राम: पुंसां मद्दर्शनावधि: ॥ २१ ॥

varaṁ varaya bhadraṁ te

vareśaṁ mābhivāñchitam

brahmañ chreyaḥ-pariśrāmaḥ

puṁsāṁ mad-darśanāvadhiḥ

Synonyms

varam — benediction; varaya — just ask from; bhadram — auspicious; te — unto you; vara-īśam — the giver of all benediction; mā (mām) — from Me; abhivāñchitam — wishing; brahman — O Brahmā; śreyaḥ — the ultimate success; pariśrāmaḥ — for all penances; puṁsām — for everyone; mat — My; darśana — realization; avadhiḥ — up to the limit of.

Translation

I wish you good luck. O Brahmā, you may ask from Me, the giver of all benediction, all that you may desire. You may know that the ultimate benediction, as the result of all penances, is to see Me by realization.

Purport

[...]The next stage of life is to discharge devotional service to the Lord just to satisfy Him. [...]

The Catur-sloki of Srimad Bhagavatam: 2.9.33, 2.9.34, 2.9.35, 2.9.36

ŚB 2.9.33

अहमेवासमेवाग्रे नान्यद् यत् सदसत् परम् ।

पश्चादहं यदेतच्च योऽवशिष्येत सोऽस्म्यहम् ॥ ३३ ॥

aham evāsam evāgre

nānyad yat sad-asat param

paścād ahaṁ yad etac ca

yo ’vaśiṣyeta so ’smy aham

Synonyms

aham — I, the Personality of Godhead; eva — certainly; āsam — existed; eva — only; agre — before the creation; na — never; anyat — anything else; yat — all those; sat — the effect; asat — the cause; param — the supreme; paścāt — at the end; aham — I, the Personality of Godhead; yat — all these; etat — creation; ca — also; yaḥ — everything; avaśiṣyeta — remains; saḥ — that; asmi — I am; aham — I, the Personality of Godhead.

Translation

Brahmā, it is I, the Personality of Godhead, who was existing before the creation, when there was nothing but Myself. Nor was there the material nature, the cause of this creation. That which you see now is also I, the Personality of Godhead, and after annihilation what remains will also be I, the Personality of Godhead.

ŚB 3.2.20

तथैव चान्ये नरलोकवीराय आहवे कृष्णमुखारविन्दम् ।

नेत्रै: पिबन्तो नयनाभिरामंपार्थास्त्रपूत: पदमापुरस्य ॥ २० ॥

tathaiva cānye nara-loka-vīrā

ya āhave kṛṣṇa-mukhāravindam

netraiḥ pibanto nayanābhirāmaṁ

pārthāstra-pūtaḥ padam āpur asya

Synonyms

tathā — as also; eva ca — and certainly; anye — others; nara-loka — human society; vīrāḥ — fighters; ye — those; āhave — on the battlefield (of Kurukṣetra); kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa’s; mukha-aravindam — face like a lotus flower; netraiḥ — with the eyes; pibantaḥ — while seeing; nayana-abhirāmam — very pleasing to the eyes; pārtha — Arjuna; astra-pūtaḥ — purified by arrows; padam — abode; āpuḥ — achieved; asya — of Him.

Translation

Certainly others who were fighters on the Battlefield of Kurukṣetra were purified by the onslaught of Arjuna’s arrows, and while seeing the lotuslike face of Kṛṣṇa, so pleasing to the eyes, they achieved the abode of the Lord.

ŚB 3.9.11

त्वं भक्तियोगपरिभावितहृत्सरोज

आस्से श्रुतेक्षितपथो ननु नाथ पुंसाम् ।

यद्यद्धिया त उरुगाय विभावयन्ति

तत्तद्वपु: प्रणयसे सदनुग्रहाय ॥ ११ ॥

tvaṁ bhakti-yoga-paribhāvita-hṛt-saroja

āsse śrutekṣita-patho nanu nātha puṁsām

yad-yad-dhiyā ta urugāya vibhāvayanti

tat-tad-vapuḥ praṇayase sad-anugrahāya

Synonyms

tvam — unto You; bhakti-yoga — in devotional service; paribhāvita — being one-hundred-percent engaged; hṛt — of the heart; saroje — on the lotus; āsse — You reside; śruta-īkṣita — seen through the ear; pathaḥ — the path; nanu — now; nātha — O my Lord; puṁsām — of the devotees; yat-yat — whichever; dhiyā — by meditating; te — Your; urugāya — O multiglorious; vibhāvayanti — they specifically think of; tat-tat — the very same; vapuḥ — transcendental form; praṇayase — do You manifest; sat-anugrahāya — to show Your causeless mercy.

Translation

O my Lord, Your devotees can see You through the ears by the process of bona fide hearing, and thus their hearts become cleansed, and You take Your seat there. You are so merciful to Your devotees that You manifest Yourself in the particular eternal form of transcendence in which they always think of You.

ŚB 3.15.23

यन्न व्रजन्त्यघभिदो रचनानुवादा-

च्छृण्वन्ति येऽन्यविषया: कुकथा मतिघ्नी: ।

यास्तु श्रुता हतभगैर्नृभिरात्तसारा-

स्तांस्तान् क्षिपन्त्यशरणेषु तम:सु हन्त ॥ २३ ॥

yan na vrajanty agha-bhido racanānuvādāc

chṛṇvanti ye ’nya-viṣayāḥ kukathā mati-ghnīḥ

yās tu śrutā hata-bhagair nṛbhir ātta-sārās

tāṁs tān kṣipanty aśaraṇeṣu tamaḥsu hanta

Synonyms

yat — Vaikuṇṭha; na — never; vrajanti — approach; agha-bhidaḥ — of the vanquisher of all kinds of sins; racanā — of the creation; anuvādāt — than narrations; śṛṇvanti — hear; ye — those who; anya — other; viṣayāḥ — subject matter; ku-kathāḥ — bad words; mati-ghnīḥ — killing intelligence; yāḥ — which; tu — but; śrutāḥ — are heard; hata-bhagaiḥ — unfortunate; nṛbhiḥ — by men; ātta — taken away; sārāḥ — values of life; tān tān — such persons; kṣipanti — are thrown; aśaraṇeṣu — devoid of all shelter; tamaḥsu — in the darkest part of material existence; hanta — alas.

Translation

It is very much regrettable that unfortunate people do not discuss the description of the Vaikuṇṭha planets but engage in topics which are unworthy to hear and which bewilder one’s intelligence. Those who give up the topics of Vaikuṇṭha and take to talk of the material world are thrown into the darkest region of ignorance.

ŚB 3.20.12

मैत्रेय उवाचदैवेन दुर्वितर्क्येण परेणानिमिषेण च ।

जातक्षोभाद्भगवतो महानासीद् गुणत्रयात् ॥ १२ ॥

maitreya uvāca

daivena durvitarkyeṇa

pareṇānimiṣeṇa ca

jāta-kṣobhād bhagavato

mahān āsīd guṇa-trayāt

Synonyms

maitreyaḥ uvāca — Maitreya said; daivena — by superior management known as destiny; durvitarkyeṇa — beyond empiric speculation; pareṇa — by Mahā-Viṣṇu; animiṣeṇa — by the potency of eternal time; ca — and; jāta-kṣobhāt — the equilibrium was agitated; bhagavataḥ — of the Personality of Godhead; mahān — the total material elements (the mahat-tattva); āsīt — were produced; guṇa-trayāt — from the three modes of nature.

Translation

Maitreya said: When the equilibrium of the combination of the three modes of nature was agitated by the unseen activity of the living entity, by Mahā-Viṣṇu and by the force of time, the total material elements were produced.

ŚB 3.20.13

रज:प्रधानान्महतस्त्रिलिङ्गो दैवचोदितात् ।

जात: ससर्ज भूतादिर्वियदादीनि पञ्चश: ॥ १३ ॥

rajaḥ-pradhānān mahatas

tri-liṅgo daiva-coditāt

jātaḥ sasarja bhūtādir

viyad-ādīni pañcaśaḥ

Synonyms

rajaḥ-pradhānāt — in which the element of rajas, or passion, predominates; mahataḥ — from the mahat-tattva; tri-liṅgaḥ — of three kinds; daiva-coditāt — impelled by superior authority; jātaḥ — was born; sasarja — evolved; bhūta-ādiḥ — the false ego (origin of the material elements); viyat — the ether; ādīni — beginning with; pañcaśaḥ — in groups of five.

Translation

As impelled by the destiny of the jīva, the false ego, which is of three kinds, evolved from the mahat-tattva, in which the element of rajas predominates. From the ego, in turn, evolved many groups of five principles.

ŚB 3.20.14

तानि चैकैकश: स्रष्टुमसमर्थानि भौतिकम् ।

संहत्य दैवयोगेन हैममण्डमवासृजन् ॥ १४ ॥

tāni caikaikaśaḥ sraṣṭum

asamarthāni bhautikam

saṁhatya daiva-yogena

haimam aṇḍam avāsṛjan

Synonyms

tāni — those elements; ca — and; eka-ekaśaḥ — separately; sraṣṭum — to produce; asamarthāni — unable; bhautikam — the material universe; saṁhatya — having combined; daiva-yogena — with the energy of the Supreme Lord; haimam — shining like gold; aṇḍam — globe; avāsṛjan — produced.

Translation

Separately unable to produce the material universe, they combined with the help of the energy of the Supreme Lord and were able to produce a shining egg.

ŚB 3.25.20

प्रसङ्गमजरं पाशमात्मन: कवयो विदु: ।

स एव साधुषु कृतो मोक्षद्वारमपावृतम् ॥ २० ॥

prasaṅgam ajaraṁ pāśam

ātmanaḥ kavayo viduḥ

sa eva sādhuṣu kṛto

mokṣa-dvāram apāvṛtam

Synonyms

prasaṅgam — attachment; ajaram — strong; pāśam — entanglement; ātmanaḥ — of the soul; kavayaḥ — learned men; viduḥ — know; saḥ eva — that same; sādhuṣu — to the devotees; kṛtaḥ — applied; mokṣa-dvāram — the door of liberation; apāvṛtam — opened.

Translation

Every learned man knows very well that attachment for the material is the greatest entanglement of the spirit soul. But that same attachment, when applied to the self-realized devotees, opens the door of liberation.

ŚB 3.25.21

तितिक्षव: कारुणिका: सुहृद: सर्वदेहिनाम् ।

अजातशत्रव: शान्ता: साधव: साधुभूषणा: ॥ २१ ॥

titikṣavaḥ kāruṇikāḥ

suhṛdaḥ sarva-dehinām

ajāta-śatravaḥ śāntāḥ

sādhavaḥ sādhu-bhūṣaṇāḥ

Synonyms

titikṣavaḥ — tolerant; kāruṇikāḥ — merciful; suhṛdaḥ — friendly; sarva-dehinām — to all living entities; ajāta-śatravaḥ — inimical to none; śāntāḥ — peaceful; sādhavaḥ — abiding by scriptures; sādhu-bhūṣaṇāḥ — adorned with sublime characteristics.

Translation

The symptoms of a sādhu are that he is tolerant, merciful and friendly to all living entities. He has no enemies, he is peaceful, he abides by the scriptures, and all his characteristics are sublime.a

ŚB 3.25.25

सतां प्रसङ्गान्मम वीर्यसंविदो

भवन्ति हृत्कर्णरसायना: कथा: ।

तज्जोषणादाश्वपवर्गवर्त्मनि

श्रद्धा रतिर्भक्तिरनुक्रमिष्यति ॥ २५ ॥

satāṁ prasaṅgān mama vīrya-saṁvido

bhavanti hṛt-karṇa-rasāyanāḥ kathāḥ

taj-joṣaṇād āśv apavarga-vartmani

śraddhā ratir bhaktir anukramiṣyati

Synonyms

satām — of pure devotees; prasaṅgāt — through the association; mama — My; vīrya — wonderful activities; saṁvidaḥ — by discussion of; bhavanti — become; hṛt — to the heart; karṇa — to the ear; rasa-ayanāḥ — pleasing; kathāḥ — the stories; tat — of that; joṣaṇāt — by cultivation; āśu — quickly; apavarga — of liberation; vartmani — on the path; śraddhā — firm faith; ratiḥ — attraction; bhaktiḥ — devotion; anukramiṣyati — will follow in order.

Translation

In the association of pure devotees, discussion of the pastimes and activities of the Supreme Personality of Godhead is very pleasing and satisfying to the ear and the heart. By cultivating such knowledge one gradually becomes advanced on the path of liberation, and thereafter he is freed, and his attraction becomes fixed. Then real devotion and devotional service begin.

ŚB 3.25.38

na karhicin mat-parāḥ śānta-rūpe

naṅkṣyanti no me ’nimiṣo leḍhi hetiḥ

yeṣām ahaṁ priya ātmā sutaś ca

sakhā guruḥ suhṛdo daivam iṣṭam

Synonyms

na — not; karhicit — ever; mat-parāḥ — My devotees; śānta-rūpe — O mother; naṅkṣyanti — will lose; no — not; me — My; animiṣaḥ — time; leḍhi — destroys; hetiḥ — weapon; yeṣām — of whom; aham — I; priyaḥ — dear; ātmā — self; sutaḥ — son; ca — and; sakhā — friend; guruḥ — preceptor; suhṛdaḥ — benefactor; daivam — Deity; iṣṭam — chosen.

Translation

The Lord continued: My dear mother, devotees who receive such transcendental opulences are never bereft of them; neither weapons nor the change of time can destroy such opulences. Because the devotees accept Me as their friend, their relative, their son, preceptor, benefactor and Supreme Deity, they cannot be deprived of their possessions at any time.

ŚB 3.26.27
वैकारिकाद्विकुर्वाणान्मनस्तत्त्वमजायत ।
यत्सङ्कल्पविकल्पाभ्यां वर्तते कामसम्भव: ॥ २७ ॥

vaikārikād vikurvāṇān
manas-tattvam ajāyata
yat-saṅkalpa-vikalpābhyāṁ
vartate kāma-sambhavaḥ

Synonyms
vaikārikāt — from the false ego of goodness; vikurvāṇāt — undergoing transformation; manaḥ — the mind; tattvam — principle; ajāyata — evolved; yat — whose; saṅkalpa — thoughts; vikalpābhyām — and by reflections; vartate — happens; kāma-sambhavaḥ — the rise of desire.

Translation
From the false ego of goodness, another transformation takes place. From this evolves the mind, whose thoughts and reflections give rise to desire.

ŚB 3.26.29
तैजसात्तु विकुर्वाणाद् बुद्धितत्त्वमभूत्सति ।
द्रव्यस्फुरणविज्ञानमिन्द्रियाणामनुग्रह: ॥ २९ ॥
taijasāt tu vikurvāṇād
buddhi-tattvam abhūt sati
dravya-sphuraṇa-vijñānam
indriyāṇām anugrahaḥ

Synonyms
taijasāt — from the false ego in passion; tu — then; vikurvāṇāt — undergoing transformation; buddhi — intelligence; tattvam — principle; abhūt — took birth; sati — O virtuous lady; dravya — objects; sphuraṇa — coming into view; vijñānam — ascertaining; indriyāṇām — to the senses; anugrahaḥ — giving assistance.

Translation
By transformation of the false ego in passion, intelligence takes birth, O virtuous lady. The functions of intelligence are to help in ascertaining the nature of objects when they come into view, and to help the senses.

ŚB 3.26.31
तैजसानीन्द्रियाण्येव क्रियाज्ञानविभागश: ।
प्राणस्य हि क्रियाशक्तिर्बुद्धेर्विज्ञानशक्तिता ॥ ३१ ॥

taijasānīndriyāṇy eva
kriyā-jñāna-vibhāgaśaḥ
prāṇasya hi kriyā-śaktir
buddher vijñāna-śaktitā

Synonyms
taijasāni — produced from egoism in the mode of passion; indriyāṇi — the senses; eva — certainly; kriyā — action; jñāna — knowledge; vibhāgaśaḥ — according to; prāṇasya — of the vital energy; hi — indeed; kriyā-śaktiḥ — the senses of action; buddheḥ — of the intelligence; vijñāna-śaktitā — the senses for acquiring knowledge.

Translation
Egoism in the mode of passion produces two kinds of senses: the senses for acquiring knowledge and the senses of action. The senses of action depend on the vital energy, and the senses for acquiring knowledge depend on intelligence.

ŚB 3.28.9

प्राणस्य शोधयेन्मार्गं पूरकुम्भकरेचकै: ।

प्रतिकूलेन वा चित्तं यथा स्थिरमचञ्चलम् ॥ ९ ॥

prāṇasya śodhayen mārgaṁ

pūra-kumbhaka-recakaiḥ

pratikūlena vā cittaṁ

yathā sthiram acañcalam

Synonyms

prāṇasya — of vital air; śodhayet — one should clear; mārgam — the passage; pūra-kumbhaka-recakaiḥ — by inhaling, retaining and exhaling; pratikūlena — by reversing; vā — or; cittam — the mind; yathā — so that; sthiram — steady; acañcalam — free from disturbances.

Translation

The yogī should clear the passage of vital air by breathing in the following manner: first he should inhale very deeply, then hold the breath in, and finally exhale. Or, reversing the process, the yogi can first exhale, then hold the breath outside, and finally inhale. This is done so that the mind may become steady and free from external disturbances.

SB 3.29.13

sālokya-sārṣṭi-sāmīpya-

sārūpyaikatvam apy uta

dīyamānaṁ na gṛhṇanti

vinā mat-sevanaṁ janāḥ

Synonyms

sālokya — living on the same planet; sārṣṭi — having the same opulence; sāmīpya — to be a personal associate; sārūpya — having the same bodily features; ekatvam — oneness; api — also; uta — even; dīyamānam — being offered; na — not; gṛhṇanti — do accept; vinā — without; mat — My; sevanam — devotional service; janāḥ — pure devotees.

Translation

A pure devotee does not accept any kind of liberation — sālokya, sārṣṭi, sāmīpya, sārūpya or ekatva — even though they are offered by the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

ŚB 3.31.1

श्रीभगवानुवाचकर्मणा दैवनेत्रेण जन्तुर्देहोपपत्तये ।

स्त्रिया: प्रविष्ट उदरं पुंसो रेत:कणाश्रय: ॥ १ ॥

śrī-bhagavān uvāca

karmaṇā daiva-netreṇa

jantur dehopapattaye

striyāḥ praviṣṭa udaraṁ

puṁso retaḥ-kaṇāśrayaḥ

Synonyms

śrī-bhagavān uvāca — the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; karmaṇā — by the result of work; daiva-netreṇa — under the supervision of the Lord; jantuḥ — the living entity; deha — a body; upapattaye — for obtaining; striyāḥ — of a woman; praviṣṭaḥ — enters; udaram — the womb; puṁsaḥ — of a man; retaḥ — of semen; kaṇa — a particle; āśrayaḥ — dwelling in.

Translation

The Personality of Godhead said: Under the supervision of the Supreme Lord and according to the result of his work, the living entity, the soul, is made to enter into the womb of a woman through the particle of male semen to assume a particular type of body.

ŚB 3.33.7

अहो बत श्वपचोऽतो गरीया

न्यज्जिह्वाग्रे वर्तते नाम तुभ्यम् ।

तेपुस्तपस्ते जुहुवु: सस्‍नुरार्या

ब्रह्मानूचुर्नाम गृणन्ति ये ते ॥ ७ ॥

aho bata śva-paco ’to garīyān

yaj-jihvāgre vartate nāma tubhyam

tepus tapas te juhuvuḥ sasnur āryā

brahmānūcur nāma gṛṇanti ye te

Synonyms

aho bata — oh, how glorious; śva-pacaḥ — a dog-eater; ataḥ — hence; garīyān — worshipable; yat — of whom; jihvā-agre — on the tip of the tongue; vartate — is; nāma — the holy name; tubhyam — unto You; tepuḥ tapaḥ — practiced austerities; te — they; juhuvuḥ — executed fire sacrifices; sasnuḥ — took bath in the sacred rivers; āryāḥ — Āryans; brahma anūcuḥ — studied the Vedas; nāma — the holy name; gṛṇanti — accept; ye — they who; te — Your.

Translation

Oh, how glorious are they whose tongues are chanting Your holy name! Even if born in the families of dog-eaters, such persons are worshipable. Persons who chant the holy name of Your Lordship must have executed all kinds of austerities and fire sacrifices and achieved all the good manners of the Āryans. To be chanting the holy name of Your Lordship, they must have bathed at holy places of pilgrimage, studied the Vedas and fulfilled everything required.

Purport by MGDAS

See also CC Antya-lila 16.26

ŚB 4.1.64

तेभ्यो दधार कन्ये द्वे वयुनां धारिणीं स्वधा ।

उभे ते ब्रह्मवादिन्यौ ज्ञानविज्ञानपारगे ॥ ६४ ॥

tebhyo dadhāra kanye dve

vayunāṁ dhāriṇīṁ svadhā

ubhe te brahma-vādinyau

jñāna-vijñāna-pārage

Synonyms

tebhyaḥ — from them; dadhāra — produced; kanye — daughters; dve — two; vayunām — Vayunā; dhāriṇīm — Dhāriṇī; svadhā — Svadhā; ubhe — both of them; te — they; brahma-vādinyau — impersonalists; jñāna-vijñāna-pāra-ge — expert in both transcendental and Vedic knowledge.

Translation

Svadhā, who was offered to the Pitās, begot two daughters named Vayunā and Dhāriṇī, both of whom were impersonalists and were expert in transcendental and Vedic knowledge.

ŚB 4.2.12

गृहीत्वा मृगशावाक्ष्या: पाणिं मर्कटलोचन: ।

प्रत्युत्थानाभिवादार्हे वाचाप्यकृत नोचितम् ॥ १२ ॥

gṛhītvā mṛga-śāvākṣyāḥ

pāṇiṁ markaṭa-locanaḥ

pratyutthānābhivādārhe

vācāpy akṛta nocitam

Synonyms

gṛhītvā — taking; mṛga-śāva — like a deer cub; akṣyāḥ — of her who has eyes; pāṇim — the hand; markaṭa — of a monkey; locanaḥ — he who has the eyes; pratyutthāna — of rising from one’s seat; abhivāda — the honor; arhe — to me, who deserves; vācā — with sweet words; api — even; akṛta na — he did not do; ucitam — honor.

Translation

He has eyes like a monkey’s, yet he has married my daughter, whose eyes are just like those of a deer cub. Nevertheless he did not stand up to receive me, nor did he think it fit to welcome me with sweet words.

ŚB 4.2.16

तस्मा उन्मादनाथाय नष्टशौचाय दुर्हृदे ।

दत्ता बत मया साध्वी चोदिते परमेष्ठिना ॥ १६ ॥

tasmā unmāda-nāthāya

naṣṭa-śaucāya durhṛde

dattā bata mayā sādhvī

codite parameṣṭhinā

Synonyms

tasmai — to him; unmāda-nāthāya — to the lord of ghosts; naṣṭa-śaucāya — being devoid of all cleanliness; durhṛde — heart filled with nasty things; dattā — was given; bata — alas; mayā — by me; sādhvī — Satī; codite — being requested; parameṣṭhinā — by the supreme teacher (Brahmā).

Translation

On the request of Lord Brahmā I handed over my chaste daughter to him, although he is devoid of all cleanliness and his heart is filled with nasty things.

ŚB 4.2.35

आप्लुत्यावभृथं यत्र गङ्गा यमुनयान्विता ।

विरजेनात्मना सर्वे स्वं स्वं धाम ययुस्तत: ॥ ३५ ॥

āplutyāvabhṛthaṁ yatra

gaṅgā yamunayānvitā

virajenātmanā sarve

svaṁ svaṁ dhāma yayus tataḥ

Synonyms

āplutya — taking a bath; avabhṛtham — the bath which is taken after performing sacrifices; yatra — where; gaṅgā — the river Ganges; yamunayā — by the river Yamunā; anvitā — mixed; virajena — without infection; ātmanā — by the mind; sarve — all; svam svam — their respective; dhāma — abodes; yayuḥ — went; tataḥ — from there.

Translation

My dear Vidura, carrier of bows and arrows, all the demigods who were performing the sacrifice took their bath at the confluence of the Ganges and the Yamunā after completing the yajña performance. Such a bath is called avabhṛtha-snāna. After thus becoming purified in heart, they departed for their respective abodes.

ŚB 4.3.5-7

तदुपश्रुत्य नभसि खेचराणां प्रजल्पताम् ।

सती दाक्षायणी देवी पितृयज्ञमहोत्सवम् ॥ ५ ॥

व्रजन्ती: सर्वतो दिग्भ्य उपदेववरस्त्रिय: ।

विमानयाना: सप्रेष्ठा निष्ककण्ठी: सुवासस: ॥ ६ ॥

दृष्ट्वा स्वनिलयाभ्याशे लोलाक्षीर्मृष्टकुण्डला: ।

पतिं भूतपतिं देवमौत्सुक्यादभ्यभाषत ॥ ७ ॥

tad upaśrutya nabhasi

khe-carāṇāṁ prajalpatām

satī dākṣāyaṇī devī

pitṛ-yajña-mahotsavam

vrajantīḥ sarvato digbhya

upadeva-vara-striyaḥ

vimāna-yānāḥ sa-preṣṭhā

niṣka-kaṇṭhīḥ suvāsasaḥ

dṛṣṭvā sva-nilayābhyāśe

lolākṣīr mṛṣṭa-kuṇḍalāḥ

patiṁ bhūta-patiṁ devam

autsukyād abhyabhāṣata

Synonyms

tat — then; upaśrutya — hearing; nabhasi — in the sky; khe-carāṇām — of those who were flying in the air (the Gandharvas); prajalpatām — the conversation; satī — Satī; dākṣāyaṇī — the daughter of Dakṣa; devī — the wife of Śiva; pitṛ-yajña-mahā-utsavam — the great festival of sacrifice performed by her father; vrajantīḥ — were going; sarvataḥ — from all; digbhyaḥ — directions; upadeva-vara-striyaḥ — the beautiful wives of the demigods; vimāna-yānāḥ — flying in their airplanes; sa-preṣṭhāḥ — along with their husbands; niṣka-kaṇṭhīḥ — having nice necklaces with lockets; su-vāsasaḥ — dressed in fine clothing; dṛṣṭvā — seeing; sva-nilaya-abhyāśe — near her residence; lola-akṣīḥ — having beautiful glittering eyes; mṛṣṭa-kuṇḍalāḥ — nice earrings; patim — her husband; bhūta-patim — the master of the bhūtas; devam — the demigod; autsukyāt — from great anxiety; abhyabhāṣata — she spoke.

Translation

The chaste lady Satī, the daughter of Dakṣa, heard the heavenly denizens flying in the sky conversing about the great sacrifice being performed by her father. When she saw that from all directions the beautiful wives of the heavenly denizens, their eyes very beautifully glittering, were near her residence and were going to the sacrifice dressed in fine clothing and ornamented with earrings and necklaces with lockets, she approached her husband, the master of the bhūtas, in great anxiety, and spoke as follows.

ŚB 4.3.13

कथं सुताया: पितृगेहकौतुकं

निशम्य देह: सुरवर्य नेङ्गते ।

अनाहुता अप्यभियन्ति सौहृदं

भर्तुर्गुरोर्देहकृतश्च केतनम् ॥ १३ ॥

kathaṁ sutāyāḥ pitṛ-geha-kautukaṁ

niśamya dehaḥ sura-varya neṅgate

anāhutā apy abhiyanti sauhṛdaṁ

bhartur guror deha-kṛtaś ca ketanam

Synonyms

katham — how; sutāyāḥ — of a daughter; pitṛ-geha-kautukam — the festival in the house of her father; niśamya — hearing; dehaḥ — the body; sura-varya — O best of the demigods; na — not; iṅgate — disturbed; anāhutāḥ — without being called; api — even; abhiyanti — goes; sauhṛdam — a friend; bhartuḥ — of the husband; guroḥ — of the spiritual master; deha-kṛtaḥ — of the father; ca — and; ketanam — the house.

Translation

O best of the demigods, how can the body of a daughter remain undisturbed when she hears that some festive event is taking place in her father’s house? Even though you may be considering that I have not been invited, there is no harm if one goes to the house of one’s friend, husband, spiritual master or father without invitation.

ŚB 4.3.16

श्रीभगवानुवाच

त्वयोदितं शोभनमेव शोभने

अनाहुता अप्यभियन्ति बन्धुषु ।

ते यद्यनुत्पादितदोषद‍ृष्टयोबली

यसानात्म्यमदेन मन्युना ॥ १६ ॥

śrī-bhagavān uvāca

tvayoditaṁ śobhanam eva śobhane

anāhutā apy abhiyanti bandhuṣu

te yady anutpādita-doṣa-dṛṣṭayo

balīyasānātmya-madena manyunā

Synonyms

śrī-bhagavān uvāca — the great lord replied; tvayā — by you; uditam — said; śobhanam — is true; eva — certainly; śobhane — my dear beautiful wife; anāhutāḥ — without being invited; api — even; abhiyanti — go; bandhuṣu — among friends; te — those (friends); yadi — if; anutpādita-doṣa-dṛṣṭayaḥ — not finding fault; balīyasā — more important; anātmya-madena — by pride caused by identification with the body; manyunā — by anger.

Translation

The great lord replied: My dear beautiful wife, you have said that one may go to a friend’s house without being invited, and this is true, provided such a friend does not find fault with the guest because of bodily identification and thereby become angry towards him.

ŚB 4.3.17

विद्यातपोवित्तवपुर्वय:कुलै:

सतां गुणै: षड्‌भिरसत्तमेतरै: ।

स्मृतौ हतायां भृतमानदुर्दृश:

स्तब्धा न पश्यन्ति हि धाम भूयसाम् ॥ १७ ॥

vidyā-tapo-vitta-vapur-vayaḥ-kulaiḥ

satāṁ guṇaiḥ ṣaḍbhir asattametaraiḥ

smṛtau hatāyāṁ bhṛta-māna-durdṛśaḥs

tabdhā na paśyanti hi dhāma bhūyasām

Synonyms

vidyā — education; tapaḥ — austerity; vitta — wealth; vapuḥ — beauty of body, etc.; vayaḥ — youth; kulaiḥ — with heritage; satām — of the pious; guṇaiḥ — by such qualities; ṣaḍbhiḥ — six; asattama-itaraiḥ — having the opposite result to those who are not great souls; smṛtau — good sense; hatāyām — being lost; bhṛta-māna-durdṛśaḥ — blind due to pride; stabdhāḥ — being proud; na — not; paśyanti — see; hi — for; dhāma — the glories; bhūyasām — of the great souls.

Translation

Although the six qualities education, austerity, wealth, beauty, youth and heritage are for the highly elevated, one who is proud of possessing them becomes blind, and thus he loses his good sense and cannot appreciate the glories of great personalities.

ŚB 4.3.18

नैताद‍ृशानां स्वजनव्यपेक्षया

गृहान्प्रतीयादनवस्थितात्मनाम् ।

येऽभ्यागतान् वक्रधियाभिचक्षते

आरोपितभ्रूभिरमर्षणाक्षिभि: ॥ १८ ॥

naitādṛśānāṁ sva-jana-vyapekṣayā

gṛhān pratīyād anavasthitātmanām

ye ’bhyāgatān vakra-dhiyābhicakṣate

āropita-bhrūbhir amarṣaṇākṣibhiḥ

Synonyms

na — not; etādṛśānām — like this; sva-jana — kinsmen; vyapekṣayā — depending on that; gṛhān — in the house of; pratīyāt — one should go; anavasthita — disturbed; ātmanām — mind; ye — those; abhyāgatān — guests; vakra-dhiyā — with a cold reception; abhicakṣate — looking at; āropita-bhrūbhiḥ — with raised eyebrows; amarṣaṇa — angry; akṣibhiḥ — with the eyes.

Translation

One should not go to anyone’s house, even on the consideration of his being a relative or a friend, when the man is disturbed in his mind and looks upon the guest with raised eyebrows and angry eyes.

ŚB 4.3.19

तथारिभिर्न व्यथते शिलीमुखै:

शेतेऽर्दिताङ्गो हृदयेन दूयता ।

स्वानां यथा वक्रधियां दुरुक्तिभि-

र्दिवानिशं तप्यति मर्मताडित: ॥ १९ ॥

tathāribhir na vyathate śilīmukhaiḥ

śete ’rditāṅgo hṛdayena dūyatā

svānāṁ yathā vakra-dhiyāṁ duruktibhir

divā-niśaṁ tapyati marma-tāḍitaḥ

Synonyms

tathā — so; aribhiḥ — enemy; na — not; vyathate — is hurt; śilīmukhaiḥ — by the arrows; śete — rests; ardita — aggrieved; aṅgaḥ — a part; hṛdayena — by the heart; dūyatā — grieving; svānām — of relatives; yathā — as; vakra-dhiyām — deceitful; duruktibhiḥ — by harsh words; divā-niśam — day and night; tapyati — suffers; marma-tāḍitaḥ — one whose feelings are hurt.

Translation

Lord Śiva continued: If one is hurt by the arrows of an enemy, one is not as aggrieved as when cut by the unkind words of a relative, for such grief continues to rend one’s heart day and night.

ŚB 4.4.27

तत: स्वभर्तुश्चरणाम्बुजासवं

जगद्गुरोश्चिन्तयती न चापरम् ।

ददर्श देहो हतकल्मष: सती

सद्य: प्रजज्वाल समाधिजाग्निना ॥ २७ ॥

tataḥ sva-bhartuś caraṇāmbujāsavaṁ

jagad-guroś cintayatī na cāparam

dadarśa deho hata-kalmaṣaḥ satī

sadyaḥ prajajvāla samādhijāgninā

Synonyms

tataḥ — there; sva-bhartuḥ — of her husband; caraṇa-ambuja-āsavam — on the nectar of the lotus feet; jagat-guroḥ — of the supreme spiritual teacher of the universe; cintayatī — meditating; na — not; ca — and; aparam — not other (than her husband); dadarśa — saw; dehaḥ — her body; hata-kalmaṣaḥ — taints of sin being destroyed; satī — Satī; sadyaḥ — soon; prajajvāla — burned; samādhi-ja-agninā — by fire produced by meditation.

Translation

Satī concentrated all her meditation on the holy lotus feet of her husband, Lord Śiva, who is the supreme spiritual master of all the world. Thus she became completely cleansed of all taints of sin and quit her body in a blazing fire by meditation on the fiery elements.

ŚB 4.4.30

सोऽयं दुर्मर्षहृदयो ब्रह्मध्रुक् च

लोकेऽपकीर्तिं महतीमवाप्स्यति ।

यदङ्गजां स्वां पुरुषद्विडुद्यतां

न प्रत्यषेधन्मृतयेऽपराधत: ॥ ३० ॥

so ’yaṁ durmarṣa-hṛdayo brahma-dhruk ca

loke ’pakīrtiṁ mahatīm avāpsyati

yad-aṅgajāṁ svāṁ puruṣa-dviḍ udyatāṁ

na pratyaṣedhan mṛtaye ’parādhataḥ

Synonyms

saḥ — he; ayam — that; durmarṣa-hṛdayaḥ — hardhearted; brahma-dhruk — unworthy to be a brāhmaṇa; ca — and; loke — in the world; apakīrtim — ill fame; mahatīm — extensive; avāpsyati — will gain; yat-aṅga-jām — the daughter of whom; svām — own; puruṣa-dviṭ — the enemy of Lord Śiva; udyatām — who was preparing; na pratyaṣedhat — did not prevent; mṛtaye — for death; aparādhataḥ — because of his offenses.

Translation

Dakṣa, who is so hardhearted that he is unworthy to be a brāhmaṇa, will gain extensive ill fame because of his offenses to his daughter, because of not having prevented her death, and because of his great envy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

ŚB 4.5.5

आज्ञप्त एवं कुपितेन मन्युना

स देवदेवं परिचक्रमे विभुम् ।

मेने तदात्मानमसङ्गरंहसा

महीयसां तात सह: सहिष्णुम् ॥ ५ ॥

ājñapta evaṁ kupitena manyunā

sa deva-devaṁ paricakrame vibhum

mene tadātmānam asaṅga-raṁhasā

mahīyasāṁ tāta sahaḥ sahiṣṇum

Synonyms

ājñaptaḥ — being ordered; evam — in this manner; kupitena — angry; manyunā — by Lord Śiva (who is anger personified); saḥ — he (Vīrabhadra); deva-devam — he who is worshiped by the demigods; paricakrame — circumambulated; vibhum — Lord Śiva; mene — considered; tadā — at that time; ātmānam — himself; asaṅga-raṁhasā — with the power of Lord Śiva that cannot be opposed; mahīyasām — of the most powerful; tāta — my dear Vidura; sahaḥ — strength; sahiṣṇum — capable of coping with.

Translation

Maitreya continued: My dear Vidura, that black person was the personified anger of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and he was prepared to execute the orders of Lord Śiva. Thus, considering himself capable of coping with any power offered against him, he circumambulated Lord Śiva.

ŚB 4.5.21

पूष्णो ह्यपातयद्दन्तान् कालिङ्गस्य यथा बल: ।

शप्यमाने गरिमणि योऽहसद्दर्शयन्दत: ॥ २१ ॥

pūṣṇo hy apātayad dantān

kāliṅgasya yathā balaḥ

śapyamāne garimaṇi

yo ’hasad darśayan dataḥ

Synonyms

pūṣṇaḥ — of Pūṣā; hi — since; apātayat — extracted; dantān — the teeth; kāliṅgasya — of the King of Kaliṅga; yathā — as; balaḥ — Baladeva; śapyamāne — while being cursed; garimaṇi — Lord Śiva; yaḥ — who (Pūṣā); ahasat — smiled; darśayan — showing; dataḥ — his teeth.

Translation

Just as Baladeva knocked out the teeth of Dantavakra, the King of Kaliṅga, during the gambling match at the marriage ceremony of Aniruddha, Vīrabhadra knocked out the teeth of both Dakṣa, who had shown them while cursing Lord Śiva, and Pūṣā, who by smiling sympathetically had also shown his teeth.

ŚB 4.6.4

तदाकर्ण्य विभु: प्राह तेजीयसि कृतागसि ।

क्षेमाय तत्र सा भूयान्न प्रायेण बुभूषताम् ॥ ४ ॥

tad ākarṇya vibhuḥ prāha

tejīyasi kṛtāgasi

kṣemāya tatra sā bhūyān

na prāyeṇa bubhūṣatām

Synonyms

tat — the events related by the demigods and the others; ākarṇya — after hearing; vibhuḥ — Lord Brahmā; prāha — replied; tejīyasi — a great personality; kṛta-āgasi — has been offended; kṣemāya — for your happiness; tatra — in that way; sā — that; bhūyāt na — is not conducive; prāyeṇa — generally; bubhūṣatām — desire to exist.

Translation

When Lord Brahmā heard everything from the demigods and the members who had attended the sacrifice, he replied: You cannot be happy in executing a sacrifice if you blaspheme a great personality and thereby offend his lotus feet. You cannot have happiness in that way.

ŚB 4.6.9

जन्मौषधितपोमन्त्रयोगसिद्धैर्नरेतरै: ।

जुष्टं किन्नरगन्धर्वैरप्सरोभिर्वृतं सदा ॥ ९ ॥

janmauṣadhi-tapo-mantra-

yoga-siddhair naretaraiḥ

juṣṭaṁ kinnara-gandharvair

apsarobhir vṛtaṁ sadā

Synonyms

janma — birth; auṣadhi — herbs; tapaḥ — austerity; mantra — Vedic hymns; yoga — mystic yoga practices; siddhaiḥ — with perfected beings; nara-itaraiḥ — by demigods; juṣṭam — enjoyed; kinnara-gandharvaiḥ — by Kinnaras and Gandharvas; apsarobhiḥ — by Apsarās; vṛtam — full of; sadā — always.

Translation

The abode known as Kailāsa is full of different herbs and vegetables, and it is sanctified by Vedic hymns and mystic yoga practice. Thus the residents of that abode are demigods by birth and have all mystic powers. Besides them there are other human beings, who are known as Kinnaras and Gandharvas and are accompanied by their beautiful wives, who are known as Apsarās, or angels.

ŚB 4.6.50

कुर्वध्वरस्योद्धरणं हतस्य भो:

त्वयासमाप्तस्य मनो प्रजापते: ।

न यत्र भागं तव भागिनो ददु:

कुयाजिनो येन मखो निनीयते ॥ ५० ॥

kurv adhvarasyoddharaṇaṁ hatasya bhoḥ

tvayāsamāptasya mano prajāpateḥ

na yatra bhāgaṁ tava bhāgino daduḥ

kuyājino yena makho ninīyate

Synonyms

kuru — just execute; adhvarasya — of the sacrifice; uddharaṇam — complete regularly; hatasya — killed; bhoḥ — O; tvayā — by you; asamāptasya — of the unfinished sacrifice; mano — O Lord Śiva; prajāpateḥ — of Mahārāja Dakṣa; na — not; yatra — where; bhāgam — share; tava — your; bhāginaḥ — deserving to take the share; daduḥ — did not give; ku-yājinaḥ — bad priests; yena — by the bestower; makhaḥ — sacrifice; ninīyate — gets the result.

Translation

My dear Lord Śiva, you are a shareholder of a portion of the sacrifice, and you are the giver of the result. The bad priests did not deliver your share, and therefore you destroyed everything, and the sacrifice remains unfinished. Now you can do the needful and take your rightful share.

ŚB 4.6.53

एष ते रुद्र भागोऽस्तु यदुच्छिष्टोऽध्वरस्य वै ।

यज्ञस्ते रुद्रभागेन कल्पतामद्य यज्ञहन् ॥ ५३ ॥

eṣa te rudra bhāgo ’stu

yad-ucchiṣṭo ’dhvarasya vai

yajñas te rudra bhāgena

kalpatām adya yajña-han

Synonyms

eṣaḥ — this; te — your; rudra — O Lord Śiva; bhāgaḥ — portion; astu — let it be; yat — whatever; ucchiṣṭaḥ — is the remainder; adhvarasya — of the sacrifice; vai — indeed; yajñaḥ — the sacrifice; te — your; rudra — O Rudra; bhāgena — by the portion; kalpatām — may be completed; adya — today; yajña-han — O destroyer of the sacrifice.

Translation

O destroyer of the sacrifice, please take your portion of the sacrifice and let the sacrifice be completed by your grace.

ŚB 4.7.2

महादेव उवाच

नाघं प्रजेश बालानां वर्णये नानुचिन्तये ।

देवमायाभिभूतानां दण्डस्तत्र धृतो मया ॥ २ ॥

mahādeva uvāca

nāghaṁ prajeśa bālānāṁ

varṇaye nānucintaye

deva-māyābhibhūtānāṁ

daṇḍas tatra dhṛto mayā

Synonyms

mahādevaḥ — Lord Śiva; uvāca — said; na — not; agham — offense; prajā-īśa — O lord of created beings; bālānām — of the children; varṇaye — I regard; na — not; anucintaye — I consider; deva-māyā — the external energy of the Lord; abhibhūtānām — of those deluded by; daṇḍaḥ — rod; tatra — there; dhṛtaḥ — used; mayā — by me.

Translation

Lord Śiva said: My dear father, Brahmā, I do not mind the offenses created by the demigods. Because these demigods are childish and less intelligent, I do not take a serious view of their offenses, and I have punished them only in order to right them.

ŚB 4.7.5

बाहुभ्यामश्विनो: पूष्णो हस्ताभ्यां कृतबाहव: ।

भवन्‍त्वध्वर्यवश्चान्ये बस्तश्मश्रुर्भृगुर्भवेत् ॥ ५ ॥

bāhubhyām aśvinoḥ pūṣṇo

hastābhyāṁ kṛta-bāhavaḥ

bhavantv adhvaryavaś cānye

basta-śmaśrur bhṛgur bhavet

Synonyms

bāhubhyām — with two arms; aśvinoḥ — of Aśvinī-kumāra; pūṣṇaḥ — of Pūṣā; hastābhyām — with two hands; kṛta-bāhavaḥ — those in need of arms; bhavantu — they will have to; adhvaryavaḥ — the priests; ca — and; anye — others; basta-śmaśruḥ — the beard of the goat; bhṛguḥ — Bhṛgu; bhavet — he may have.

Translation

Those who have had their arms cut off will have to work with the arms of Aśvinī-kumāra, and those whose hands were cut off will have to do their work with the hands of Pūṣā. The priests will also have to act in that manner. As for Bhṛgu, he will have the beard from the goat’s head.

ŚB 4.7.33

पत्‍न्य ऊचु:

यज्ञोऽयं तव यजनाय केन सृष्टो

विध्वस्त: पशुपतिनाद्य दक्षकोपात् ।

तं नस्त्वं शवशयनाभशान्तमेधं

यज्ञात्मन्नलिनरुचा द‍ृशा पुनीहि ॥ ३३ ॥

patnya ūcuḥ

yajño ’yaṁ tava yajanāya kena sṛṣṭo

vidhvastaḥ paśupatinādya dakṣa-kopāt

taṁ nas tvaṁ śava-śayanābha-śānta-medhaṁ

yajñātman nalina-rucā dṛśā punīhi

Synonyms

patnyaḥ ūcuḥ — the wives of the executors of the sacrifice said; yajñaḥ — the sacrifice; ayam — this; tava — Your; yajanāya — worshiping; kena — by Brahmā; sṛṣṭaḥ — arranged; vidhvastaḥ — devastated; paśupatinā — by Lord Śiva; adya — today; dakṣa-kopāt — from anger at Dakṣa; tam — it; naḥ — our; tvam — You; śava-śayana — dead bodies; ābha — like; śānta-medham — the still sacrificial animals; yajña-ātman — O Lord of sacrifice; nalina — lotus; rucā — beautiful; dṛśā — by the vision of Your eyes; punīhi — sanctify.

Translation

The wives of the performers of the sacrifice said: My dear Lord, this sacrifice was arranged under the instruction of Brahmā, but unfortunately Lord Śiva, being angry at Dakṣa, devastated the entire scene, and because of his anger the animals meant for sacrifice are lying dead. Therefore the preparations of the yajña have been lost. Now, by the glance of Your lotus eyes, the sanctity of this sacrificial arena may be again invoked.

ŚB 4.7.37

लोकपाला ऊचु:

द‍ृष्ट: किं नो द‍ृग्भिरसद्ग्रहैस्त्वं

प्रत्यग्द्रष्टा द‍ृश्यते येन विश्वम् ।

माया ह्येषा भवदीया हि भूमन्य

स्त्वं षष्ठ: पञ्चभिर्भासि भूतै: ॥ ३७ ॥

lokapālā ūcuḥ

dṛṣṭaḥ kiṁ no dṛgbhir asad-grahais tvaṁ

pratyag-draṣṭā dṛśyate yena viśvam

māyā hy eṣā bhavadīyā hi bhūman

yas tvaṁ ṣaṣṭhaḥ pañcabhir bhāsi bhūtaiḥ

Synonyms

loka-pālāḥ — the governors of the different planets; ūcuḥ — said; dṛṣṭaḥ — seen; kim — whether; naḥ — by us; dṛgbhiḥ — by the material senses; asat-grahaiḥ — revealing the cosmic manifestation; tvam — You; pratyak-draṣṭā — inner witness; dṛśyate — is seen; yena — by whom; viśvam — the universe; māyā — material world; hi — because; eṣā — this; bhavadīyā — Your; hi — certainly; bhūman — O possessor of the universe; yaḥ — because; tvam — You; ṣaṣṭhaḥ — the sixth; pañcabhiḥ — with the five; bhāsi — appear; bhūtaiḥ — with the elements.

Translation

The governors of various planets spoke as follows: Dear Lord, we believe only in our direct perception, and therefore we see You as a creation of the material world. But under the circumstances we do not know whether we have actually seen You with our material senses. By our material senses we can simply perceive the cosmic manifestation, but You are beyond the five elements. You are the sixth.

ŚB 4.9.11

भक्तिं मुहु: प्रवहतां त्वयि मे प्रसङ्गो

भूयादनन्त महताममलाशयानाम् ।

येनाञ्जसोल्बणमुरुव्यसनं भवाब्धिं

नेष्ये भवद्गुणकथामृतपानमत्त: ॥ ११ ॥

bhaktiṁ muhuḥ pravahatāṁ tvayi me prasaṅgo

bhūyād ananta mahatām amalāśayānām

yenāñjasolbaṇam uru-vyasanaṁ bhavābdhiṁ

neṣye bhavad-guṇa-kathāmṛta-pāna-mattaḥ

Synonyms

bhaktim — devotional service; muhuḥ — constantly; pravahatām — of those who perform; tvayi — unto You; me — my; prasaṅgaḥ — intimate association; bhūyāt — may it become; ananta — O unlimited; mahatām — of the great devotees; amala-āśayānām — whose hearts are freed from material contamination; yena — by which; añjasā — easily; ulbaṇam — terrible; uru — great; vyasanam — full of dangers; bhava-abdhim — the ocean of material existence; neṣye — I shall cross; bhavat — Your; guṇa — transcendental qualities; kathā — pastimes; amṛta — nectar, eternal; pāna — by drinking; mattaḥ — mad.

Translation

Dhruva Mahārāja continued: O unlimited Lord, kindly bless me so that I may associate with great devotees who engage in Your transcendental loving service constantly, as the waves of a river constantly flow. Such transcendental devotees are completely situated in an uncontaminated state of life. By the process of devotional service I shall surely be able to cross the nescient ocean of material existence, which is filled with the waves of blazing, firelike dangers. It will be very easy for me, for I am becoming mad to hear about Your transcendental qualities and pastimes, which are eternally existent.

Purport

The significant point in Dhruva Mahārāja’s statement is that he wanted the association of pure devotees. Transcendental devotional service cannot be complete and cannot be relishable without the association of devotees. We have therefore established the International Society for Krishna Consciousness. Anyone who is trying to be aloof from this Krishna Consciousness Society and yet engage in Kṛṣṇa consciousness is living in a great hallucination, for this is not possible. [...]

ŚB 4.11.22

केचित्कर्म वदन्त्येनं स्वभावमपरे नृप ।

एके कालं परे दैवं पुंस: काममुतापरे ॥ २२ ॥

kecit karma vadanty enaṁ

svabhāvam apare nṛpa

eke kālaṁ pare daivaṁ

puṁsaḥ kāmam utāpare

Synonyms

kecit — some; karma — fruitive activities; vadanti — explain; enam — that; svabhāvam — nature; apare — others; nṛpa — my dear King Dhruva; eke — some; kālam — time; pare — others; daivam — fate; puṁsaḥ — of the living entity; kāmam — desire; uta — also; apare — others.

Translation

The differentiation among varieties of life and their suffering and enjoyment is explained by some to be the result of karma. Others say it is due to nature, others due to time, others due to fate, and still others say that it is due to desire.

ŚB 4.11.24

न चैते पुत्रक भ्रातुर्हन्तारो धनदानुगा: ।

विसर्गादानयोस्तात पुंसो दैवं हि कारणम् ॥ २४ ॥

na caite putraka bhrātur

hantāro dhanadānugāḥ

visargādānayos tāta

puṁso daivaṁ hi kāraṇam

Synonyms

na — never; ca — also; ete — all these; putraka — my dear son; bhrātuḥ — of your brother; hantāraḥ — killers; dhanada — of Kuvera; anugāḥ — followers; visarga — of birth; ādānayoḥ — of death; tāta — my dear son; puṁsaḥ — of a living entity; daivam — the Supreme; hi — certainly; kāraṇam — the cause.

Translation

My dear son, those Yakṣas, who are descendants of Kuvera, are not actually the killers of your brother; the birth and death of every living entity are caused by the Supreme, who is certainly the cause of all causes.

ŚB 4.11.31

संयच्छ रोषं भद्रं ते प्रतीपं श्रेयसां परम् ।

श्रुतेन भूयसा राजन्नगदेन यथामयम् ॥ ३१ ॥

saṁyaccha roṣaṁ bhadraṁ te

pratīpaṁ śreyasāṁ param

śrutena bhūyasā rājann

agadena yathāmayam

Synonyms

saṁyaccha — just control; roṣam — anger; bhadram — all good fortune; te — to you; pratīpam — enemy; śreyasām — of all goodness; param — the foremost; śrutena — by hearing; bhūyasā — constantly; rājan — my dear King; agadena — by medicinal treatment; yathā — as; āmayam — disease.

Translation

My dear King, just consider what I have said to you, which will act as medicinal treatment upon disease. Control your anger, for anger is the foremost enemy on the path of spiritual realization. I wish all good fortune for you. Please follow my instructions.

ŚB 4.11.32

येनोपसृष्टात्पुरुषाल्लोक उद्विजते भृशम् ।

न बुधस्तद्वशं गच्छेदिच्छन्नभयमात्मन: ॥ ३२ ॥

yenopasṛṣṭāt puruṣāl

loka udvijate bhṛśam

na budhas tad-vaśaṁ gacched

icchann abhayam ātmanaḥ

Synonyms

yena — by which; upasṛṣṭāt — being overwhelmed; puruṣāt — by the person; lokaḥ — everyone; udvijate — becomes terrified; bhṛśam — greatly; na — never; budhaḥ — a learned person; tat — of anger; vaśam — under the control; gacchet — should go; icchan — desiring; abhayam — fearlessness, liberation; ātmanaḥ — of the self.

Translation

A person who desires liberation from this material world should not fall under the control of anger because when bewildered by anger one becomes a source of dread for all others.

ŚB 4.13.10

जडान्धबधिरोन्मत्तमूकाकृतिरतन्मति: ।

लक्षित: पथि बालानां प्रशान्तार्चिरिवानल: ॥ १० ॥

jaḍāndha-badhironmatta-

mūkākṛtir atan-matiḥ

lakṣitaḥ pathi bālānāṁ

praśāntārcir ivānalaḥ

Synonyms

jaḍa — foolish; andha — blind; badhira — deaf; unmatta — mad; mūka — dumb; ākṛtiḥ — appearance; a-tat — not like that; matiḥ — his intelligence; lakṣitaḥ — he was seen; pathi — on the road; bālānām — by the less intelligent; praśānta — calmed; arciḥ — with flames; iva — like; analaḥ — fire.

Translation

Utkala appeared to the less intelligent persons on the road to be foolish, blind, dumb, deaf and mad, although actually he was not so. He remained like fire covered with ashes, without blazing flames.

ŚB 4.13.43

प्रायेणाभ्यर्चितो देवो येऽप्रजा गृहमेधिन: ।

कदपत्यभृतं दु:खं ये न विन्दन्ति दुर्भरम् ॥ ४३ ॥

prāyeṇābhyarcito devo

ye ’prajā gṛha-medhinaḥ

kad-apatya-bhṛtaṁ duḥkhaṁ

ye na vindanti durbharam

Synonyms

prāyeṇa — probably; abhyarcitaḥ — was worshiped; devaḥ — the Lord; ye — they who; aprajāḥ — without a son; gṛha-medhinaḥ — persons living at home; kad-apatya — by a bad son; bhṛtam — caused; duḥkham — unhappiness; ye — they who; na — not; vindanti — suffer; durbharam — unbearable.

Translation

The King thought to himself: Persons who have no son are certainly fortunate. They must have worshiped the Lord in their previous lives so that they would not have to suffer the unbearable unhappiness caused by a bad son.

ŚB 4.13.46

कदपत्यं वरं मन्ये सदपत्याच्छुचां पदात् ।

निर्विद्येत गृहान्मर्त्यो यत्‍क्‍लेशनिवहा गृहा: ॥ ४६ ॥

kad-apatyaṁ varaṁ manye

sad-apatyāc chucāṁ padāt

nirvidyeta gṛhān martyo

yat-kleśa-nivahā gṛhāḥ

Synonyms

kad-apatyam — bad son; varam — better; manye — I think; sat-apatyāt — than a good son; śucām — of grief; padāt — the source; nirvidyeta — becomes detached; gṛhāt — from home; martyaḥ — a mortal man; yat — because of whom; kleśa-nivahāḥ — hellish; gṛhāḥ — home.

Translation

Then the King thought: A bad son is better than a good son because a good son creates an attachment for home, whereas a bad son does not. A bad son creates a hellish home from which an intelligent man naturally becomes very easily detached.

ŚB 4.20.11

उदासीनमिवाध्यक्षं द्रव्यज्ञानक्रियात्मनाम् ।

कूटस्थमिममात्मानं यो वेदाप्नोति शोभनम् ॥ ११ ॥

udāsīnam ivādhyakṣaṁ

dravya-jñāna-kriyātmanām

kūṭa-stham imam ātmānaṁ

yo vedāpnoti śobhanam

Synonyms

udāsīnam — indifferent; iva — simply; adhyakṣam — the superintendent; dravya — of the physical elements; jñāna — knowledge-acquiring senses; kriyā — working senses; ātmanām — and of the mind; kūṭa-stham — fixed; imam — this; ātmānam — soul; yaḥ — anyone who; veda — knows; āpnoti — gets; śobhanam — all good fortune.

Translation

Anyone who knows that this material body, made of the five gross elements, the sense organs, the working senses and the mind, is simply supervised by the fixed soul is eligible to be liberated from material bondage.

ŚB 4.20.12

भिन्नस्य लिङ्गस्य गुणप्रवाहोद्रव्यक्रियाकारकचेतनात्मन: ।

द‍ृष्टासु सम्पत्सु विपत्सु सूरयोन विक्रियन्ते मयि बद्धसौहृदा: ॥ १२ ॥

bhinnasya liṅgasya guṇa-pravāho

dravya-kriyā-kāraka-cetanātmanaḥ

dṛṣṭāsu sampatsu vipatsu sūrayo

na vikriyante mayi baddha-sauhṛdāḥ

Synonyms

bhinnasya — different; liṅgasya — of the body; guṇa — of the three modes of material nature; pravāhaḥ — the constant change; dravya — physical elements; kriyā — activities of the senses; kāraka — demigods; cetanā — and the mind; ātmanaḥ — consisting of; dṛṣṭāsu — when experienced; sampatsu — happiness; vipatsu — distress; sūrayaḥ — those who are advanced in knowledge; na — never; vikriyante — become disturbed; mayi — unto Me; baddha-sauhṛdāḥ — bound in friendship.

Translation

Lord Viṣṇu told King Pṛthu: My dear King, the constant change of this material world is due to the interaction of the three modes of material nature. The five elements, the senses, the demigods who control the senses, as well as the mind, which is agitated by the spirit soul — all these taken together comprise the body. Since the spirit soul is completely different from this combination of gross and subtle material elements, My devotee who is connected with Me in intense friendship and affection, being completely in knowledge, is never agitated by material happiness and distress.

ŚB 4.20.13

सम: समानोत्तममध्यमाधम:सुखे च दु:खे च जितेन्द्रियाशय: ।

मयोपक्लृप्ताखिललोकसंयुतोविधत्स्व वीराखिललोकरक्षणम् ॥ १३ ॥

samaḥ samānottama-madhyamādhamaḥ

sukhe ca duḥkhe ca jitendriyāśayaḥ

mayopakḷptākhila-loka-saṁyuto

vidhatsva vīrākhila-loka-rakṣaṇam

Synonyms

samaḥ — equipoised; samāna — all equal; uttama — one who is greater; madhyama — one who is in an intermediate position; adhamaḥ — one who is in a lower standard of life; sukhe — in happiness; ca — and; duḥkhe — in distress; ca — also; jita-indriya — having controlled the senses; āśayaḥ — and mind; mayā — by Me; upakḷpta — arranged; akhila — all; loka — by people; saṁyutaḥ — being accompanied; vidhatsva — give; vīra — O hero; akhila — all; loka — to the citizens; rakṣaṇam — protection.

Translation

My dear heroic King, please keep yourself always equipoised and treat people equally, whether they are greater than you, in the intermediate stage or lower than you. Do not be disturbed by temporary distress or happiness. Fully control your mind and senses. In this transcendental position, try to execute your duty as king in whatever condition of life you may be posted by My arrangement, for your only duty here is to give protection to the citizens of your kingdom.

ŚB 4.25.7

नारद उवाचभो भो:

प्रजापते राजन् पशून् पश्यत्वयाध्वरे ।

संज्ञापिताञ्जीवसङ्घान्निर्घृणेन सहस्रश: ॥ ७ ॥

nārada uvāca

bhoḥ bhoḥ prajāpate rājan

paśūn paśya tvayādhvare

saṁjñāpitāñ jīva-saṅghān

nirghṛṇena sahasraśaḥ

Synonyms

nāradaḥ uvāca — the great sage Nārada replied; bhoḥ bhoḥ — hello; prajā-pate — O ruler of the citizens; rājan — O King; paśūn — animals; paśya — please see; tvayā — by you; adhvare — in the sacrifice; saṁjñāpitān — killed; jīva-saṅghān — groups of animals; nirghṛṇena — without pity; sahasraśaḥ — in thousands.

Translation

The great saint Nārada said: O ruler of the citizens, my dear King, please see in the sky those animals which you have sacrificed without compassion and without mercy in the sacrificial arena.

SB 4.28.48

उत्तिष्ठोत्तिष्ठ राजर्षे इमामुदधिमेखलाम् ।

दस्युभ्य: क्षत्रबन्धुभ्यो बिभ्यतीं पातुमर्हसि ॥ ४८ ॥

uttiṣṭhottiṣṭha rājarṣe

imām udadhi-mekhalām

dasyubhyaḥ kṣatra-bandhubhyo

bibhyatīṁ pātum arhasi

Synonyms

uttiṣṭha — please get up; uttiṣṭha — please get up; rāja-ṛṣe — O saintly king; imām — this earth; udadhi — by the ocean; mekhalām — surrounded; dasyubhyaḥ — from the rogues; kṣatra-bandhubhyaḥ — from the unclean kings; bibhyatīm — very much afraid; pātum — to protect; arhasi — you ought.

Translation

O best of kings, please get up! Get up! Just see this world surrounded by water and infested with rogues and so-called kings. This world is very much afraid, and it is your duty to protect her.

Purport

Whenever an ācārya comes, following the superior orders of the Supreme Personality of Godhead or His representative, he establishes the principles of religion, as enunciated in Bhagavad-gītā. Religion means abiding by the orders of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Religious principles begin from the time one surrenders to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. It is the ācārya’s duty to spread a bona fide religious system and induce everyone to bow down before the Supreme Lord. One executes the religious principles by rendering devotional service, specifically the nine items like hearing, chanting and remembering. Unfortunately, when the ācārya disappears, rogues and nondevotees take advantage and immediately begin to introduce unauthorized principles in the name of so-called svāmīs, yogīs, philanthropists, welfare workers and so on. Actually, human life is meant for executing the orders of the Supreme Lord, and this is stated in Bhagavad-gītā (9.34):

man-manā bhava mad-bhakto

mad-yājī māṁ namaskuru

mām evaiṣyasi yuktvaivam

ātmānaṁ mat-parāyaṇaḥ

“Engage your mind always in thinking of Me and become My devotee. Offer obeisances and worship Me. Being completely absorbed in Me, surely you will come to Me.”

The main business of human society is to think of the Supreme Personality of Godhead at all times, to become His devotees, to worship the Supreme Lord and to bow down before Him. The ācārya, the authorized representative of the Supreme Lord, establishes these principles, but when he disappears, things once again become disordered. The perfect disciples of the ācārya try to relieve the situation by sincerely following the instructions of the spiritual master. At the present moment practically the entire world is afraid of rogues and nondevotees; therefore this Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement is started to save the world from irreligious principles. Everyone should cooperate with this movement in order to bring about actual peace and happiness in the world.

ŚB 4.30.34

तुलयाम लवेनापि न स्वर्गं नापुनर्भवम् ।

भगवत्सङ्गिसङ्गस्य मर्त्यानां किमुताशिष: ॥ ३४ ॥

tulayāma lavenāpina

svargaṁ nāpunar-bhavam

bhagavat-saṅgi-saṅgasya

martyānāṁ kim utāśiṣaḥ

Synonyms

tulayāma — we compare; lavena — with a moment; api — even; na — not; svargam — attainment of the heavenly planets; na — not; apunaḥ-bhavam — merging into the Brahman effulgence; bhagavat — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; saṅgi — with associates; saṅgasya — of association; martyānām — of persons who are destined to die; kim uta — how much less; āśiṣaḥ — benedictions.

Translation

Even a moment’s association with a pure devotee cannot be compared to being transferred to heavenly planets or even merging into the Brahman effulgence in complete liberation. For living entities who are destined to give up the body and die, association with pure devotees is the highest benediction.

ŚB 4.31.14

यथा तरोर्मूलनिषेचनेन

तृप्यन्ति तत्स्कन्धभुजोपशाखा: ।

प्राणोपहाराच्च यथेन्द्रियाणां

तथैव सर्वार्हणमच्युतेज्या ॥ १४ ॥

yathā taror mūla-niṣecanena

tṛpyanti tat-skandha-bhujopaśākhāḥ

prāṇopahārāc ca yathendriyāṇāṁ

tathaiva sarvārhaṇam acyutejyā

Synonyms

yathā — as; taroḥ — of a tree; mūla — the root; niṣecanena — by watering; tṛpyanti — are satisfied; tat — its; skandha — trunk; bhuja — branches; upaśākhāḥ — and twigs; prāṇa — the life air; upahārāt — by feeding; ca — and; yathā — as; indriyāṇām — of the senses; tathā eva — similarly; sarva — of all demigods; arhaṇam — worship; acyuta — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ijyā — worship.

Translation

As pouring water on the root of a tree energizes the trunk, branches, twigs and everything else, and as supplying food to the stomach enlivens the senses and limbs of the body, simply worshiping the Supreme Personality of Godhead through devotional service automatically satisfies the demigods, who are parts of that Supreme Personality.

ŚB 5.5.1

ऋषभ उवाचनायं देहो देहभाजां

नृलोकेकष्टान् कामानर्हते विड्भुजां ये ।

तपो दिव्यं पुत्रका येन सत्त्वं

शुद्ध्येद्यस्माद् ब्रह्मसौख्यं त्वनन्तम् ॥ १ ॥

ṛṣabha uvāca

nāyaṁ deho deha-bhājāṁ nṛloke

kaṣṭān kāmān arhate viḍ-bhujāṁ ye

tapo divyaṁ putrakā yena sattvaṁ

śuddhyed yasmād brahma-saukhyaṁ tv anantam

Synonyms

ṛṣabhaḥ uvāca — Lord Ṛṣabhadeva said; na — not; ayam — this; dehaḥ — body; deha-bhājām — of all living entities who have accepted material bodies; nṛ-loke — in this world; kaṣṭān — troublesome; kāmān — sense gratification; arhate — deserves; viṭ-bhujām — of stool-eaters; ye — which; tapaḥ — austerities and penances; divyam — divine; putrakāḥ — My dear sons; yena — by which; sattvam — the heart; śuddhyet — becomes purified; yasmāt — from which; brahma-saukhyam — spiritual happiness; tu — certainly; anantam — unending.

Translation

Lord Ṛṣabhadeva told His sons: My dear boys, of all the living entities who have accepted material bodies in this world, one who has been awarded this human form should not work hard day and night simply for sense gratification, which is available even for dogs and hogs that eat stool. One should engage in penance and austerity to attain the divine position of devotional service. By such activity, one’s heart is purified, and when one attains this position, he attains eternal, blissful life, which is transcendental to material happiness and which continues forever.

ŚB 5.5.2

महत्सेवां द्वारमाहुर्विमुक्ते-

स्तमोद्वारं योषितां सङ्गिसङ्गम् ।

महान्तस्ते समचित्ता: प्रशान्ता

विमन्यव: सुहृद: साधवो ये ॥ २ ॥

mahat-sevāṁ dvāram āhur vimuktes

tamo-dvāraṁ yoṣitāṁ saṅgi-saṅgam

mahāntas te sama-cittāḥ praśāntā

vimanyavaḥ suhṛdaḥ sādhavo ye

Synonyms

mahat-sevām — service to the spiritually advanced persons called mahātmās; dvāram — the way; āhuḥ — they say; vimukteḥ — of liberation; tamaḥ-dvāram — the way to the dungeon of a dark, hellish condition of life; yoṣitām — of women; saṅgi — of associates; saṅgam — association; mahāntaḥ — highly advanced in spiritual understanding; te — they; sama-cittāḥ — persons who see everyone in a spiritual identity; praśāntāḥ — very peaceful, situated in Brahman or Bhagavān; vimanyavaḥ — without anger (one must distribute Kṛṣṇa consciousness to persons who are hostile without becoming angry at them); suhṛdaḥ — well-wishers of everyone; sādhavaḥ — qualified devotees, without abominable behavior; ye — they who.

Translation

One can attain the path of liberation from material bondage only by rendering service to highly advanced spiritual personalities. These personalities are impersonalists and devotees. Whether one wants to merge into the Lord’s existence or wants to associate with the Personality of Godhead, one should render service to the mahātmās. For those who are not interested in such activities, who associate with people fond of women and sex, the path to hell is wide open. The mahātmās are equipoised. They do not see any difference between one living entity and another. They are very peaceful and are fully engaged in devotional service. They are devoid of anger, and they work for the benefit of everyone. They do not behave in any abominable way. Such people are known as mahātmās.

ŚB 5.5.4

नूनं प्रमत्त: कुरुते विकर्मयदिन्द्रियप्रीतय आपृणोति ।

न साधु मन्ये यत आत्मनोऽय-मसन्नपि क्लेशद आस देह: ॥ ४ ॥

nūnaṁ pramattaḥ kurute vikarma

yad indriya-prītaya āpṛṇoti

na sādhu manye yata ātmano ’yam

asann api kleśada āsa dehaḥ

Synonyms

nūnam — indeed; pramattaḥ — mad; kurute — performs; vikarma — sinful activities forbidden in the scriptures; yat — when; indriya-prītaye — for sense gratification; āpṛṇoti — engages; na — not; sādhu — befitting; manye — I think; yataḥ — by which; ātmanaḥ — of the soul; ayam — this; asan — being temporary; api — although; kleśa-daḥ — giving misery; āsa — became possible; dehaḥ — the body.

Translation

When a person considers sense gratification the aim of life, he certainly becomes mad after materialistic living and engages in all kinds of sinful activity. He does not know that due to his past misdeeds he has already received a body which, although temporary, is the cause of his misery. Actually the living entity should not have taken on a material body, but he has been awarded the material body for sense gratification. Therefore I think it not befitting an intelligent man to involve himself again in the activities of sense gratification by which he perpetually gets material bodies one after another.

ŚB 5.5.5

पराभवस्तावदबोधजातो

यावन्न जिज्ञासत आत्मतत्त्वम् ।

यावत्क्रियास्तावदिदं मनो वै

कर्मात्मकं येन शरीरबन्ध: ॥ ५ ॥

parābhavas tāvad abodha-jāto

yāvan na jijñāsata ātma-tattvam

yāvat kriyās tāvad idaṁ mano vai

karmātmakaṁ yena śarīra-bandhaḥ

Synonyms

parābhavaḥ — defeat, misery; tāvat — so long; abodha-jātaḥ — produced from ignorance; yāvat — as long as; na — not; jijñāsate — inquires about; ātma-tattvam — the truth of the self; yāvat — as long as; kriyāḥ — fruitive activities; tāvat — so long; idam — this; manaḥ — mind; vai — indeed; karma-ātmakam — absorbed in material activities; yena — by which; śarīra-bandhaḥ — bondage in this material body.

Translation

As long as one does not inquire about the spiritual values of life, one is defeated and subjected to miseries arising from ignorance. Be it sinful or pious, karma has its resultant actions. If a person is engaged in any kind of karma, his mind is called karmātmaka, colored with fruitive activity. As long as the mind is impure, consciousness is unclear, and as long as one is absorbed in fruitive activity, he has to accept a material body.

ŚB 5.5.6

एवं मन: कर्मवशं प्रयुङ्क्तेअविद्ययाऽऽत्मन्युपधीयमाने ।

प्रीतिर्न यावन्मयि वासुदेवेन मुच्यते देहयोगेन तावत् ॥ ६ ॥

evaṁ manaḥ karma-vaśaṁ prayuṅkte

avidyayātmany upadhīyamāne

prītir na yāvan mayi vāsudeve

na mucyate deha-yogena tāvat

Synonyms

evam — thus; manaḥ — the mind; karma-vaśam — subjugated by fruitive activities; prayuṅkte — acts; avidyayā — by ignorance; ātmani — when the living entity; upadhīyamāne — is covered; prītiḥ — love; na — not; yāvat — as long as; mayi — unto Me; vāsudeve — Vāsudeva, Kṛṣṇa; na — not; mucyate — is delivered; deha-yogena — from contact with the material body; tāvat — so long.

Translation

When the living entity is covered by the mode of ignorance, he does not understand the individual living being and the supreme living being, and his mind is subjugated by fruitive activity. Therefore, until one has love for Lord Vāsudeva, who is none other than Myself, he is certainly not delivered from having to accept a material body again and again.

ŚB 5.5.8

पुंस: स्त्रिया मिथुनीभावमेतंतयोर्मिथो हृदयग्रन्थिमाहु: ।

अतो गृहक्षेत्रसुताप्तवित्तै-र्जनस्य मोहोऽयमहं ममेति ॥ ८ ॥

puṁsaḥ striyā mithunī-bhāvam etaṁ

tayor mitho hṛdaya-granthim āhuḥ

ato gṛha-kṣetra-sutāpta-vittair

janasya moho ’yam ahaṁ mameti

Synonyms

puṁsaḥ — of a male; striyāḥ — of a female; mithunī-bhāvam — attraction for sexual life; etam — this; tayoḥ — of both of them; mithaḥ — between one another; hṛdaya-granthim — the knot of the hearts; āhuḥ — they call; ataḥ — thereafter; gṛha — by home; kṣetra — field; suta — children; āpta — relatives; vittaiḥ — and by wealth; janasya — of the living being; mohaḥ — illusion; ayam — this; aham — I; mama — mine; iti — thus.

Translation

The attraction between male and female is the basic principle of material existence. On the basis of this misconception, which ties together the hearts of the male and female, one becomes attracted to his body, home, property, children, relatives and wealth. In this way one increases life’s illusions and thinks in terms of “I and mine.”

ŚB 5.14.38

एतस्मिन् संसाराध्वनि नानाक्लेशोपसर्गबाधित आपन्नविपन्नो यत्र यस्तमु ह वावेतरस्तत्र विसृज्य जातं जातमुपादाय शोचन्मुह्यन् बिभ्यद्विवदन् क्रदन्

संहृष्यन्गायन्नह्यमान: साधुवर्जितो नैवावर्ततेऽद्यापि यत आरब्ध एष नरलोकसार्थो यमध्वन: पारमुपदिशन्ति ॥ ३८ ॥

etasmin saṁsārādhvani nānā-kleśopasarga-bādhita āpanna-vipanno yatra yas tam u ha vāvetaras tatra visṛjya jātaṁ jātam upādāya śocan muhyan bibhyad-vivadan krandan saṁhṛṣyan gāyan nahyamānaḥ sādhu-varjito naivāvartate ’dyāpi yata ārabdha eṣa nara-loka-sārtho yam adhvanaḥ pāram upadiśanti.

Synonyms

etasmin — on this; saṁsāra — of miserable conditions; adhvani — path; nānā — various; kleśa — by miseries; upasarga — by the troubles of material existence; bādhitaḥ — disturbed; āpanna — sometimes having gained; vipannaḥ — sometimes having lost; yatra — in which; yaḥ — who; tam — him; u ha vāva — or; itaraḥ — someone else; tatra — thereupon; visṛjya — giving up; jātam jātam — newly born; upādāya — accepting; śocan — lamenting; muhyan — being illusioned; bibhyat — fearing; vivadan — sometimes exclaiming loudly; krandan — sometimes crying; saṁhṛṣyan — sometimes being pleased; gāyan — singing; nahyamānaḥ — being bound; sādhu-varjitaḥ — being away from saintly persons; na — not; eva — certainly; āvartate — achieves; adya api — even until now; yataḥ — from whom; ārabdhaḥ — commenced; eṣaḥ — this; nara-loka — of the material world; sa-arthaḥ — the self-interested living entities; yam — whom (the Supreme Personality of Godhead); adhvanaḥ — of the path of material existence; pāram — the other end; upadiśanti — saintly persons indicate.

Translation

The path of this material world is full of material miseries, and various troubles disturb the conditioned souls. Sometimes he loses, and sometimes he gains. In either case, the path is full of danger. Sometimes the conditioned soul is separated from his father by death or other circumstances. Leaving him aside he gradually becomes attached to others, such as his children. In this way, the conditioned soul is sometimes illusioned and afraid. Sometimes he cries loudly out of fear. Sometimes he is happy maintaining his family, and sometimes he is overjoyed and sings melodiously. In this way he becomes entangled and forgets his separation from the Supreme Personality of Godhead since time immemorial. Thus he traverses the dangerous path of material existence, and on this path he is not at all happy. Those who are self-realized simply take shelter of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in order to get out of this dangerous material existence. Without accepting the devotional path, one cannot get out of the clutches of material existence. The conclusion is that no one can be happy in material life. One must take to Kṛṣṇa consciousness.

Purport

[...] Material energy sometimes gives him a chance at so-called happiness, but the conditioned soul is perpetually being punished by material nature. It is therefore said: daṇḍya-jane rājā yena nadīte cubāya (Cc. Madhya 20.118). Materialistic life means continuous unhappiness, but sometimes we accept happiness as it appears between the gaps. Sometimes a condemned person is submerged in water and hauled out. Actually all of this is meant for punishment, but he feels a little comfort when he is taken out of the water. [...]

ŚB 5.11.3

न तस्य तत्त्वग्रहणाय साक्षाद्वरीयसीरपि वाच: समासन् ।

स्वप्ने निरुक्त्या गृहमेधिसौख्यंन यस्य हेयानुमितं स्वयं स्यात् ॥ ३ ॥

na tasya tattva-grahaṇāya sākṣād

varīyasīr api vācaḥ samāsan

svapne niruktyā gṛhamedhi-saukhyaṁ

na yasya heyānumitaṁ svayaṁ syāt

Synonyms

na — not; tasya — of him (a student studying the Vedas); tattva-grahaṇāya — for accepting the real purpose of Vedic knowledge; sākṣāt — directly; varīyasīḥ — very exalted; api — although; vācaḥ — words of the Vedas; samāsan — sufficiently became; svapne — in a dream; niruktyā — by example; gṛha-medhi-saukhyam — happiness within this material world; na — not; yasya — of him who; heya-anumitam — concluded to be inferior; svayam — automatically; syāt — become.

Translation

A dream becomes automatically known to a person as false and immaterial, and similarly one eventually realizes that material happiness in this life or the next, on this planet or a higher planet, is insignificant. When one realizes this, the Vedas, although an excellent source, are insufficient to bring about direct knowledge of the truth.

ŚB 5.11.10

गन्धाकृतिस्पर्शरसश्रवांसिविसर्गरत्यर्त्यभिजल्पशिल्पा: ।

एकादशं स्वीकरणं ममेतिशय्यामहं द्वादशमेक आहु: ॥ १० ॥

gandhākṛti-sparśa-rasa-śravāṁsi

visarga-raty-arty-abhijalpa-śilpāḥ

ekādaśaṁ svīkaraṇaṁ mameti

śayyām ahaṁ dvādaśam eka āhuḥ

Synonyms

gandha — smell; ākṛti — form; sparśa — touch; rasa — taste; śravāṁsi — and sound; visarga — evacuating; rati — sexual intercourse; arti — movement; abhijalpa — speaking; śilpāḥ — grasping or releasing; ekādaśam — eleventh; svīkaraṇam — accepting as; mama — mine; iti — thus; śayyām — this body; aham — I; dvādaśam — twelfth; eke — some; āhuḥ — have said.

Translation

Sound, touch, form, taste and smell are the objects of the five knowledge-acquiring senses. Speech, touch, movement, evacuation and sexual intercourse are the objects of the working senses. Besides this, there is another conception by which one thinks, “This is my body, this is my society, this is my family, this is my nation,” and so forth. This eleventh function of the mind is called the false ego. According to some philosophers, this is the twelfth function, and its field of activity is the body.

ŚB 5.12.15

सा मां स्मृतिर्मृगदेहेऽपि वीर

कृष्णार्चनप्रभवा नो जहाति ।

अथो अहं जनसङ्गादसङ्गो

विशङ्कमानोऽविवृतश्चरामि ॥ १५ ॥

sā māṁ smṛtir mṛga-dehe ’pi vīra

kṛṣṇārcana-prabhavā no jahāti

atho ahaṁ jana-saṅgād asaṅgo

viśaṅkamāno ’vivṛtaś carāmi

Synonyms

sā — that; mām — me; smṛtiḥ — remembrance of the activities of my previous life; mṛga-dehe — in the body of a deer; api — although; vīra — O great hero; kṛṣṇa-arcana-prabhavā — which appeared because of the influence of sincere service to Kṛṣṇa; no jahāti — did not leave; atho — therefore; aham — I; jana-saṅgāt — from the association of ordinary men; asaṅgaḥ — completely detached; viśaṅkamānaḥ — being afraid; avivṛtaḥ — unobserved by others; carāmi — I go here and there.

Translation

My dear heroic King, due to my past sincere service to the Lord, I could remember everything of my past life even while in the body of a deer. Because I am aware of the falldown in my past life, I always keep myself separate from the association of ordinary men. Being afraid of their bad, materialistic association, I wander alone unnoticed by others.

ŚB 5.17.11

तत्रापि भारतमेव वर्षं कर्मक्षेत्रमन्यान्यष्ट वर्षाणि स्वर्गिणां पुण्यशेषोपभोगस्थानानि भौमानि स्वर्गपदानि व्यपदिशन्ति ॥ ११ ॥

tatrāpi bhāratam eva varṣaṁ karma-kṣetram anyāny aṣṭa varṣāṇi svargiṇāṁ puṇya-śeṣopabhoga-sthānāni bhaumāni svarga-padāni vyapadiśanti.

Synonyms

tatra api — out of all of them; bhāratam — known as Bhārata-varṣa; eva — certainly; varṣam — the tract of land; karma-kṣetram — the field of activities; anyāni — the others; aṣṭa varṣāṇi — eight tracts of land; svargiṇām — of the living entities elevated to the heavenly planets by extraordinary pious activities; puṇya — of the results of pious activities; śeṣa — of the remainder; upabhoga-sthānāni — the places for material enjoyment; bhaumāni svarga-padāni — as the heavenly places on earth; vyapadiśanti — they designate.

Translation

Among the nine varṣas, the tract of land known as Bhārata-varṣa is understood to be the field of fruitive activities. Learned scholars and saintly persons declare the other eight varṣas to be meant for very highly elevated pious persons. After returning from the heavenly planets, they enjoy the remaining results of their pious activities in these eight earthly varṣas.

ŚB 5.17.12

एषु पुरुषाणामयुतपुरुषायुर्वर्षाणां देवकल्पानां नागायुतप्राणानां वज्रसंहननबलवयोमोदप्रमुदितमहासौरतमिथुनव्यवायापवर्गवर्षधृतैकगर्भ

कलत्राणां तत्र तु त्रेतायुगसम: कालो वर्तते ॥ १२ ॥

eṣu puruṣāṇām ayuta-puruṣāyur-varṣāṇāṁ

deva-kalpānāṁ nāgāyuta-prāṇānāṁ

vajra-saṁhanana-bala-vayo-moda-pramudita-mahā-saurata-mithuna-vyavāyāpavarga-varṣa-dhṛtaika-garbha-kalatrāṇāṁ

tatra tu tretā-yuga-samaḥ kālo vartate.

Synonyms

eṣu — in these (eight) varṣas, or tracts of land; puruṣāṇām — of all the men; ayuta — ten thousand; puruṣa — by the measure of men; āyuḥ-varṣāṇām — of those whose years of life; deva-kalpānām — who are like the demigods; nāga-ayuta-prāṇānām — having the strength of ten thousand elephants; vajra-saṁhanana — by bodies as solid as thunderbolts; bala — by bodily strength; vayaḥ — by youth; moda — by abundant sense enjoyment; pramudita — being excited; mahā-saurata — a great deal of sexual; mithuna — combinations of man and woman; vyavāya-apavarga — at the end of their period of sexual enjoyment; varṣa — in the last year; dhṛta-eka-garbha — who conceive one child; kalatrāṇām — of those who have wives; tatra — there; tu — but; tretā-yuga-samaḥ — exactly like the Tretā-yuga (when there is no tribulation); kālaḥ — time; vartate — exists.

Translation

In these eight varṣas, or tracts of land, human beings live ten thousand years according to earthly calculations. All the inhabitants are almost like demigods. They have the bodily strength of ten thousand elephants. Indeed, their bodies are as sturdy as thunderbolts. The youthful duration of their lives is very pleasing, and both men and women enjoy sexual union with great pleasure for a long time. After years of sensual pleasure — when a balance of one year of life remains — the wife conceives a child. Thus the standard of pleasure for the residents of these heavenly regions is exactly like that of the human beings who lived during Tretā-yuga.

ŚB 5.18.8

ॐ नमो भगवते नरसिंहाय नमस्तेजस्तेजसे आविराविर्भव वज्रनख वज्रदंष्ट्र कर्माशयान् रन्धय रन्धय तमो ग्रस ग्रस ॐ स्वाहा । अभयमभयमात्मनि भूयिष्ठा ॐ क्ष्रौम् ॥ ८ ॥

oṁ namo bhagavate narasiṁhāya

namas tejas-tejase āvir-āvirbhava

vajra-nakha vajra-daṁṣṭra karmāśayān

randhaya randhaya tamo grasa grasa om svāhā;

abhayam abhayam ātmani bhūyiṣṭhā oṁ kṣraum.

Synonyms

om — O Lord; namaḥ — my respectful obeisances; bhagavate — unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead; nara-siṁhāya — known as Lord Nṛsiṁha; namaḥ — obeisances; tejaḥ-tejase — the power of all power; āviḥ-āvirbhava — please be fully manifest; vajra-nakha — O You who possess nails like thunderbolts; vajra-daṁṣṭra — O You who possess teeth like thunderbolts; karma-āśayān — demoniac desires to be happy by material activities; randhaya randhaya — kindly vanquish; tamaḥ — ignorance in the material world; grasa — kindly drive away; grasa — kindly drive away; om — O my Lord; svāhā — respectful oblations; abhayam — fearlessness; abhayam — fearlessness; ātmani — in my mind; bhūyiṣṭhāḥ — may You appear; om — O Lord; kṣraum — the bīja, or seed, of mantras offering prayers to Lord Nṛsiṁha.

Translation

I offer my respectful obeisances unto Lord Nṛsiṁhadeva, the source of all power. O my Lord who possess nails and teeth just like thunderbolts, kindly vanquish our demonlike desires for fruitive activity in this material world. Please appear in our hearts and drive away our ignorance so that by Your mercy we may become fearless in the struggle for existence in this material world.

ŚB 5.18.12

यस्यास्ति भक्तिर्भगवत्यकिञ्चनासर्वैर्गुणैस्तत्र समासते सुरा: ।

हरावभक्तस्य कुतो महद्गुणामनोरथेनासति धावतो बहि: ॥ १२ ॥

yasyāsti bhaktir bhagavaty akiñcanā

sarvair guṇais tatra samāsate surāḥ

harāv abhaktasya kuto mahad-guṇā

manorathenāsati dhāvato bahiḥ

Synonyms

yasya — of whom; asti — there is; bhaktiḥ — devotional service; bhagavati — to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; akiñcanā — without any motive; sarvaiḥ — with all; guṇaiḥ — good qualities; tatra — there (in that person); samāsate — reside; surāḥ — all the demigods; harau — unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead; abhaktasya — of a person who is not devoted; kutaḥ — where; mahat-guṇāḥ — good qualities; manorathena — by mental speculation; asati — in the temporary material world; dhāvataḥ — who is running; bahiḥ — outside.

Translation

All the demigods and their exalted qualities, such as religion, knowledge and renunciation, become manifest in the body of one who has developed unalloyed devotion for the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Vāsudeva. On the other hand, a person devoid of devotional service and engaged in material activities has no good qualities. Even if he is adept at the practice of mystic yoga or the honest endeavor of maintaining his family and relatives, he must be driven by his own mental speculations and must engage in the service of the Lord’s external energy. How can there be any good qualities in such a man?

ŚB 5.19.27

सत्यं दिशत्यर्थितमर्थितो नृणांनैवार्थदो यत्पुनरर्थिता यत: ।

स्वयं विधत्ते भजतामनिच्छता-मिच्छापिधानं निजपादपल्लवम् ॥ २७ ॥

satyaṁ diśaty arthitam arthito nṛṇāṁ

naivārthado yat punar arthitā yataḥ

svayaṁ vidhatte bhajatām anicchatām

icchāpidhānaṁ nija-pāda-pallavam

Synonyms

satyam — certainly; diśati — He offers; arthitam — the object prayed for; arthitaḥ — being prayed to; nṛṇām — by the human beings; na — not; eva — indeed; artha-daḥ — the bestower of benedictions; yat — which; punaḥ — again; arthitā — a demand for a benediction; yataḥ — from which; svayam — personally; vidhatte — He gives; bhajatām — unto those engaged in His service; anicchatām — although not desiring it; icchā-pidhānam — which covers all desirable things; nija-pāda-pallavam — His own lotus feet.

Translation

The Supreme Personality of Godhead fulfills the material desires of a devotee who approaches Him with such motives, but He does not bestow benedictions upon the devotee that will cause him to demand more benedictions again. However, the Lord willingly gives the devotee shelter at His own lotus feet, even though such a person does not aspire for it, and that shelter satisfies all his desires. That is the Supreme Personality’s special mercy.

ŚB 5.20.3-4

शिवं यवसं सुभद्रं शान्तं क्षेमममृतमभयमिति वर्षाणि तेषु गिरयो नद्यश्च सप्तैवाभिज्ञाता: ॥ ३ ॥

मणिकूटो वज्रकूट इन्द्रसेनो ज्योतिष्मान् सुपर्णो हिरण्यष्ठीवो मेघमाल इति सेतुशैला: ।

अरुणा नृम्णाऽऽङ्गिरसी सावित्री सुप्तभाता ऋतम्भरा सत्यम्भरा इति महानद्य: ।

यासां जलोपस्पर्शनविधूतरजस्तमसो हंसपतङ्गोर्ध्वायनसत्याङ्गसंज्ञाश्चत्वारो वर्णा:

सहस्रायुषो विबुधोपमसन्दर्शनप्रजनना: स्वर्गद्वारं त्रय्या विद्यया भगवन्तं त्रयीमयं सूर्यमात्मानं यजन्ते ॥ ४ ॥

śivaṁ yavasaṁ subhadraṁ śāntaṁ kṣemam amṛtam abhayam iti varṣāṇi teṣu girayo nadyaś ca saptaivābhijñātāḥ;

maṇikūṭo vajrakūṭa indraseno jyotiṣmān suparṇo hiraṇyaṣṭhīvo meghamāla iti setu-śailāḥ aruṇā nṛmṇāṅgirasī sāvitrī suptabhātā ṛtambharā satyambharā iti mahā-nadyaḥ;

yāsāṁ jalopasparśana-vidhūta-rajas-tamaso haṁsa-pataṅgordhvāyana-satyāṅga-saṁjñāś catvāro varṇāḥ

sahasrāyuṣo vibudhopama-sandarśana-prajananāḥ

svarga-dvāraṁ trayyā vidyayā bhagavantaṁ trayīmayaṁ sūryam ātmānaṁ yajante

Synonyms

śivam — Śiva; yavasam — Yavasa; subhadram — Subhadra; śāntam — Śānta; kṣemam — Kṣema; amṛtam — Amṛta; abhayam — Abhaya; iti — thus; varṣāṇi — the tracts of land according to the names of the seven sons; teṣu — in them; girayaḥ — mountains; nadyaḥ ca — and rivers; sapta — seven; eva — indeed; abhijñātāḥ — are known; maṇi-kūṭaḥ — Maṇikūṭa; vajra-kūṭaḥ — Vajrakūṭa; indra-senaḥ — Indrasena; jyotiṣmān — Jyotiṣmān; suparṇaḥ — Suparṇa; hiraṇya-ṣṭhīvaḥ — Hiraṇyaṣṭhīva; megha-mālaḥ — Meghamāla; iti — thus; setu-śailāḥ — the ranges of mountains marking the borders of the varṣas; aruṇā — Aruṇā; nṛmṇā — Nṛmṇā; āṅgirasī — Āṅgirasī; sāvitrī — Sāvitrī; supta-bhātā — Suptabhātā; ṛtambharā — Ṛtambharā; satyambharā — Satyambharā; iti — thus; mahā-nadyaḥ — very large rivers; yāsām — of which; jala-upasparśana — simply by touching the water; vidhūta — washed off; rajaḥ-tamasaḥ — whose modes of passion and ignorance; haṁsa — Haṁsa; pataṅga — Pataṅga; ūrdhvāyana — Ūrdhvāyana; satyāṅga — Satyāṅga; saṁjñāḥ — named; catvāraḥ — four; varṇāḥ — castes or divisions of men; sahasra-āyuṣaḥ — living for one thousand years; vibudha-upama — similar to the demigods; sandarśana — in having very beautiful forms; prajananāḥ — and in producing children; svarga-dvāram — the gateway to the heavenly planets; trayyā vidyayā — by performing ritualistic ceremonies according to Vedic principles; bhagavantam — the Supreme Personality of Godhead; trayī-mayam — established in the Vedas; sūryam ātmānam — the Supersoul, represented by the sun-god; yajante — they worship.

Translation

The seven islands [varṣas] are named according to the names of those seven sons — Śiva, Yavasa, Subhadra, Śānta, Kṣema, Amṛta and Abhaya. In those seven tracts of land, there are seven mountains and seven rivers. The mountains are named Maṇikūṭa, Vajrakūṭa, Indrasena, Jyotiṣmān, Suparṇa, Hiraṇyaṣṭhīva and Meghamāla, and the rivers are named Aruṇā, Nṛmṇā, Āṅgirasī, Sāvitrī, Suptabhātā, Ṛtambharā and Satyambharā. One can immediately be free from material contamination by touching or bathing in those rivers, and the four castes of people who live in Plakṣadvīpa — the Haṁsas, Pataṅgas, Ūrdhvāyanas and Satyāṅgas — purify themselves in that way. The inhabitants of Plakṣadvīpa live for one thousand years. They are beautiful like the demigods, and they also beget children like the demigods. By completely performing the ritualistic ceremonies mentioned in the Vedas and by worshiping the Supreme Personality of Godhead as represented by the sun-god, they attain the sun, which is a heavenly planet.

ŚB 5.20.29

एवमेव दधिमण्डोदात्परत: पुष्करद्वीपस्ततो द्विगुणायाम: समन्तत उपकल्पित: समानेन स्वादूदकेन समुद्रेण बहिरावृतो यस्मिन् बृहत्पुष्करं ज्वलनशिखामलकनकपत्रायुतायुतं भगवत: कमलासनस्याध्यासनं परिकल्पितम् ॥ २९ ॥

evam eva dadhi-maṇḍodāt parataḥ puṣkaradvīpas tato dvi-guṇāyāmaḥ samantata upakalpitaḥ samānena svādūdakena samudreṇa bahir āvṛto yasmin bṛhat-puṣkaraṁ jvalana-śikhāmala-kanaka-patrāyutāyutaṁ bhagavataḥ kamalāsanasyādhyāsanaṁ parikalpitam

Synonyms

evam eva — thus; dadhi-maṇḍa-udāt — the ocean of yogurt; parataḥ — beyond; puṣkara-dvīpaḥ — another island, named Puṣkaradvīpa; tataḥ — than that (Śākadvīpa); dvi-guṇa-āyāmaḥ — whose measurement is twice as great; samantataḥ — on all sides; upakalpitaḥ — surrounded; samānena — equal in width; svādu-udakena — possessing sweet water; samudreṇa — by an ocean; bahiḥ — outside; āvṛtaḥ — surrounded; yasmin — in which; bṛhat — very big; puṣkaram — lotus flower; jvalana-śikhā — like the flames of a blazing fire; amala — pure; kanaka — gold; patra — leaves; ayuta-ayutam — possessing 100,000,000; bhagavataḥ — greatly powerful; kamala āsanasya — of Lord Brahmā, whose sitting place is on the lotus flower; adhyāsanam — sitting place; parikalpitam — considered.

Translation

Outside the ocean of yogurt is another island, known as Puṣkaradvīpa, which is 6,400,000 yojanas [51,200,000 miles] wide, twice as wide as the ocean of yogurt. It is surrounded by an ocean of very tasteful water as broad as the island itself. On Puṣkaradvīpa there is a great lotus flower with 100,000,000 pure golden petals, as effulgent as the flames of fire. That lotus flower is considered the sitting place of Lord Brahmā, who is the most powerful living being and who is therefore sometimes called bhagavān.

ŚB 5.20.30

तद्‌द्वीपमध्ये मानसोत्तरनामैक एवार्वाचीनपराचीनवर्षयोर्मर्यादाचलोऽयुतयोजनोच्छ्रायायामो यत्र तु चतसृषु दिक्षु चत्वारि पुराणि लोकपालानामिन्द्रादीनां यदुपरिष्टात्सूर्यरथस्य मेरुं परिभ्रमत: संवत्सरात्मकं चक्रं देवानामहोरात्राभ्यां परिभ्रमति ॥ ३० ॥

tad-dvīpa-madhye mānasottara-nāmaika evārvācīna-parācīna-varṣayor maryādācalo ’yuta-yojanocchrāyāyāmo yatra tu catasṛṣu dikṣu catvāri purāṇi loka-pālānām indrādīnāṁ yad-upariṣṭāt sūrya-rathasya meruṁ paribhramataḥ saṁvatsarātmakaṁ cakraṁ devānām aho-rātrābhyāṁ paribhramati

Synonyms

tat-dvīpa-madhye — within that island; mānasottara — Mānasottara; nāma — named; ekaḥ — one; eva — indeed; arvācīna — on this side; parācīna — and beyond, or outside; varṣayoḥ — of tracts of land; maryādā — indicating the boundary; acalaḥ — a great mountain; ayuta — ten thousand; yojana — eight miles; ucchrāya-āyāmaḥ — whose height and width; yatra — where; tu — but; catasṛṣu — in the four; dikṣu — directions; catvāri — four; purāṇi — cities; loka-pālānām — of the directors of planetary systems; indra-ādīnām — headed by Indra; yat — of which; upariṣṭāt — on the top; sūrya-rathasya — of the chariot of the sun-god; merum — Meru Mountain; paribhramataḥ — while circumambulating; saṁvatsara-ātmakam — consisting of one saṁvatsara; cakram — wheel or orbit; devānām — of the demigods; ahaḥ-rātrābhyām — by the day and night; paribhramati — moves around.

Translation

In the middle of that island is a great mountain named Mānasottara, which forms the boundary between the inner side and the outer side of the island. Its breadth and height are 10,000 yojanas [80,000 miles]. On that mountain, in the four directions, are the residential quarters of demigods such as Indra. In the chariot of the sun-god, the sun travels on the top of the mountain in an orbit called the Saṁvatsara, encircling Mount Meru. The sun’s path on the northern side is called Uttarāyaṇa, and its path on the southern side is called Dakṣiṇāyana. One side represents a day for the demigods, and the other represents their night.

ŚB 5.20.40

तेषां स्वविभूतीनां लोकपालानां च विविधवीर्योपबृंहणाय भगवान् परममहापुरुषो महाविभूतिपतिरन्तर्याम्यात्मनो विशुद्धसत्त्वं धर्मज्ञानवैराग्यैश्वर्याद्यष्टमहासिद्ध्युपलक्षणं विष्वक्सेनादिभि: स्वपार्षदप्रवरै: परिवारितो निजवरायुधोपशोभितैर्निजभुजदण्डै: सन्धारय-माणस्तस्मिन् गिरिवरे समन्तात्सकललोकस्वस्तय आस्ते ॥ ४० ॥

teṣāṁ sva-vibhūtīnāṁ loka-pālānāṁ ca vividha-vīryopabṛṁhaṇāya bhagavān parama-mahā-puruṣo mahā-vibhūti-patir antaryāmy ātmano viśuddha-sattvaṁ dharma-jñāna-vairāgyaiśvaryādy-aṣṭa-mahā-siddhy-upalakṣaṇaṁ viṣvaksenādibhiḥ sva-pārṣada-pravaraiḥ parivārito nija-varāyudhopaśobhitair nija-bhuja-daṇḍaiḥ sandhārayamāṇas tasmin giri-vare samantāt sakala-loka-svastaya āste.

Synonyms

teṣām — of all of them; sva-vibhūtīnām — who are his personal expansions and assistants; loka-pālānām — who are entrusted with looking after the universal affairs; ca — and; vividha — varieties; vīrya-upabṛṁhaṇāya — for expanding the powers; bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead; parama-mahā-puruṣaḥ — the foremost master of all kinds of opulence, the Supreme Personality of Godhead; mahā-vibhūti-patiḥ — the master of all inconceivable potencies; antaryāmī — the Supersoul; ātmanaḥ — of Himself; viśuddha-sattvam — having an existence without contamination by the material modes of nature; dharma-jñāna-vairāgya — of religion, pure knowledge and renunciation; aiśvarya-ādi — of all kinds of opulence; aṣṭa — eight; mahā-siddhi — and of great mystic perfections; upalakṣaṇam — having the characteristics; viṣvaksena-ādibhiḥ — by His expansion known as Viṣvaksena and others; sva-pārṣada-pravaraiḥ — the best of personal assistants; parivāritaḥ — surrounded; nija — His own; vara-āyudha — by different types of weapons; upaśobhitaiḥ — being decorated; nija — own; bhuja-daṇḍaiḥ — with stout arms; sandhārayamāṇaḥ — manifesting this form; tasmin — on that; giri-vare — great mountain; samantāt — all around; sakala-loka-svastaye — for the benefit of all the planetary systems; āste — exists.

Translation

The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the master of all transcendental opulences and the master of the spiritual sky. He is the Supreme Person, Bhagavān, the Supersoul of everyone. The demigods, led by Indra, the King of heaven, are entrusted with seeing to the affairs of the material world. To benefit all living beings in all the varied planets and to increase the power of those elephants and of the demigods, the Lord manifests Himself on top of that mountain in a spiritual body, uncontaminated by the modes of material nature. Surrounded by His personal expansions and assistants like Viṣvaksena, He exhibits all His perfect opulences, such as religion and knowledge, and His mystic powers such as aṇimā, laghimā and mahimā. He is beautifully situated, and He is decorated by the different weapons in His four hands.

ŚB 5.23.8

एतदु हैव भगवतो विष्णो: सर्वदेवतामयं रूपमहरह: सन्ध्यायां प्रयतो वाग्यतो निरीक्षमाण उपतिष्ठेत नमो ज्योतिर्लोकाय कालायनायानिमिषां पतये महापुरुषायाभिधीमहीति ॥ ८ ॥

etad u haiva bhagavato viṣṇoḥ sarva-devatāmayaṁ rūpam aharahaḥ sandhyāyāṁ prayato vāgyato nirīkṣamāṇa upatiṣṭheta

namo jyotir-lokāya

kālāyanāyānimiṣāṁ

pataye mahā-puruṣāyābhidhīmahīti

Synonyms

etat — this; u ha — indeed; eva — certainly; bhagavataḥ — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; viṣṇoḥ — of Lord Viṣṇu; sarva-devatā-mayam — consisting of all the demigods; rūpam — form; ahaḥ-ahaḥ — always; sandhyāyām — in the morning, noon and evening; prayataḥ — meditating upon; vāgyataḥ — controlling the words; nirīkṣamāṇaḥ — observing; upatiṣṭheta — one should worship; namaḥ — respectful obeisances; jyotiḥ-lokāya — unto the resting place of all the planetary systems; kālāyanāya — in the form of supreme time; animiṣām — of the demigods; pataye — unto the master; mahā-puruṣāya — unto the Supreme person; abhidhīmahi — let us meditate; iti — thus.

Translation

My dear King, the body of the śiśumāra, as thus described, should be considered the external form of Lord Viṣṇu, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Morning, noon and evening, one should silently observe the form of the Lord as the Śiśumāra-cakra and worship Him with this mantra: “O Lord who have assumed the form of time! O resting place of all the planets moving in different orbits! O master of all demigods, O Supreme Person, I offer my respectful obeisances unto You and meditate upon You.”

ŚB 5.23.9

ग्रहर्क्षतारामयमाधिदैविकंपापापहं मन्त्रकृतां त्रिकालम् ।

नमस्यत: स्मरतो वा त्रिकालंनश्येत तत्कालजमाशु पापम् ॥ ९ ॥

graharkṣatārāmayam ādhidaivikaṁ

pāpāpahaṁ mantra-kṛtāṁ tri-kālam

namasyataḥ smarato vā tri-kālaṁ

naśyeta tat-kālajam āśu pāpam

Synonyms

graha-ṛkṣa-tārā-mayam — consisting of all the planets and stars; ādhidaivikam — the leader of all the demigods; pāpa-apaham — the killer of sinful reactions; mantra-kṛtām — of those who chant the mantra mentioned above; tri-kālam — three times; namasyataḥ — offering obeisances; smarataḥ — meditating; vā — or; tri-kālam — three times; naśyeta — destroys; tat-kāla-jam — born at that time; āśu — very quickly; pāpam — all sinful reactions.

Translation

The body of the Supreme Lord, Viṣṇu, which forms the Śiśumāra-cakra, is the resting place of all the demigods and all the stars and planets. One who chants this mantra to worship that Supreme Person three times a day — morning, noon and evening — will surely be freed from all sinful reactions. If one simply offers his obeisances to this form or remembers this form three times a day, all his recent sinful activities will be destroyed.

ŚB 5.24.19

नो एवैतत्साक्षात्कारो भूमिदानस्य यत्तद्भ‍गवत्यशेषजीवनिकायानां जीवभूतात्मभूते परमात्मनि वासुदेवे तीर्थतमे पात्र उपपन्ने परया श्रद्धया परमादरसमाहितमनसा सम्प्रतिपादितस्य साक्षादपवर्गद्वारस्य यद्ब‍िलनिलयैश्वर्यम् ॥ १९ ॥

no evaitat sākṣātkāro bhūmi-dānasya yat tad bhagavaty aśeṣa-jīva-nikāyānāṁ jīva-bhūtātma-bhūte paramātmani vāsudeve tīrthatame pātra upapanne parayā śraddhayā paramādara-samāhita-manasā sampratipāditasya sākṣād apavarga-dvārasya yad bila-nilayaiśvaryam

Synonyms

no — not; eva — indeed; etat — this; sākṣātkāraḥ — the direct result; bhūmi-dānasya — of contribution of land; yat — which; tat — that; bhagavati — unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead; aśeṣa-jīva-nikāyānām — of unlimited numbers of living entities; jīva-bhūta-ātma-bhūte — who is the life and the Supersoul; parama-ātmani — the supreme regulator; vāsudeve — Lord Vāsudeva (Kṛṣṇa); tīrtha-tame — who is the best of all places of pilgrimage; pātre — the most worthy recipient; upapanne — having approached; parayā — by the topmost; śraddhayā — faith; parama-ādara — with great respect; samāhita-manasā — with an attentive mind; sampratipāditasya — which was given; sākṣāt — directly; apavarga-dvārasya — the gate of liberation; yat — which; bila-nilaya — of bila-svarga, the imitation heavenly planets; aiśvaryam — the opulence.

Translation

My dear King, Bali Mahārāja donated all his possessions to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Vāmanadeva, but one should certainly not conclude that he achieved his great worldly opulence in bila-svarga as a result of his charitable disposition. The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the source of life for all living entities, lives within everyone as the friendly Supersoul, and under His direction a living entity enjoys or suffers in the material world. Greatly appreciating the transcendental qualities of the Lord, Bali Mahārāja offered everything at His lotus feet. His purpose, however, was not to gain anything material, but to become a pure devotee. For a pure devotee, the door of liberation is automatically opened. One should not think that Bali Mahārāja was given so much material opulence merely because of his charity. When one becomes a pure devotee in love, he may also be blessed with a good material position by the will of the Supreme Lord. However, one should not mistakenly think that the material opulence of a devotee is the result of his devotional service. The real result of devotional service is the awakening of pure love for the Supreme Personality of Godhead, which continues under all circumstances.

ŚB 5.25.8

य एष एवमनुश्रुतो ध्यायमानो मुमुक्षूणामनादिकालकर्मवासनाग्रथितमविद्यामयं हृदयग्रन्थिं सत्त्वरजस्तमोमयमन्तर्हृदयं गत आशु निर्भिनत्ति तस्यानुभावान् भगवान् स्वायम्भुवो नारद: सह तुम्बुरुणा सभायां ब्रह्मण: संश्लोकयामास ॥ ८ ॥

ya eṣa evam anuśruto dhyāyamāno mumukṣūṇām anādi-kāla-karma-vāsanā-grathitam avidyāmayaṁ hṛdaya-granthiṁ sattva-rajas-tamomayam antar-hṛdayaṁ gata āśu nirbhinatti tasyānubhāvān bhagavān svāyambhuvo nāradaḥ saha tumburuṇā sabhāyāṁ brahmaṇaḥ saṁślokayām āsa

Synonyms

yaḥ — who; eṣaḥ — this one; evam — thus; anuśrutaḥ — being heard from a bona fide spiritual master; dhyāyamānaḥ — being meditated upon; mumukṣūṇām — of persons desiring liberation from conditioned life; anādi — from immemorial; kāla — time; karma-vāsanā — by the desire for fruitive activities; grathitam — tied tightly; avidyā-mayam — consisting of the illusory energy; hṛdaya-granthim — the knot within the heart; sattva-rajaḥ-tamaḥ-mayam — made of the three modes of material nature; antaḥ-hṛdayam — in the core of the heart; gataḥ — situated; āśu — very soon; nirbhinatti — cuts; tasya — of Saṅkarṣaṇa; anubhāvān — the glories; bhagavān — the greatly powerful; svāyambhuvaḥ — the son of Lord Brahmā; nāradaḥ — the sage Nārada; saha — along with; tumburuṇā — the stringed instrument called a Tumburu; sabhāyām — in the assembly; brahmaṇaḥ — of Lord Brahmā; saṁślokayām āsa — described in verses.

Translation

If persons who are very serious about being liberated from material life hear the glories of Anantadeva from the mouth of a spiritual master in the chain of disciplic succession, and if they always meditate upon Saṅkarṣaṇa, the Lord enters the cores of their hearts, vanquishes all the dirty contamination of the material modes of nature, and cuts to pieces the hard knot within the heart, which has been tied tightly since time immemorial by the desire to dominate material nature through fruitive activities. Nārada Muni, the son of Lord Brahmā, always glorifies Anantadeva in his father’s assembly. There he sings blissful verses of his own composition, accompanied by his stringed instrument [or a celestial singer] known as Tumburu.

ŚB 5.26.5

ऋषिरुवाचअन्तराल एव त्रिजगत्यास्तु दिशि दक्षिणस्यामधस्ताद्भ‍ूमेरुपरिष्टाच्च जलाद्यस्यामग्निष्वात्तादय: पितृगणा दिशि स्वानां गोत्राणां परमेण समाधिना सत्या एवाशिष आशासाना निवसन्ति ॥ ५ ॥

ṛṣir uvāca

antarāla eva tri-jagatyās tu diśi dakṣiṇasyām adhastād bhūmer upariṣṭāc ca jalād yasyām agniṣvāttādayaḥ pitṛ-gaṇā diśi svānāṁ gotrāṇāṁ parameṇa samādhinā satyā evāśiṣa āśāsānā nivasanti

Synonyms

ṛṣiḥ uvāca — the great sage replied; antarāle — in the intermediate space; eva — certainly; tri-jagatyāḥ — of the three worlds; tu — but; diśi — in the direction; dakṣiṇasyām — southern; adhastāt — beneath; bhūmeḥ — on the earth; upariṣṭāt — a little above; ca — and; jalāt — the Garbhodaka Ocean; yasyām — in which; agniṣvāttā-ādayaḥ — headed by Agniṣvāttā; pitṛ-gaṇāḥ — the persons known as pitās; diśi — direction; svānām — their own; gotrāṇām — of the families; parameṇa — with great; samādhinā — absorption in thoughts of the Lord; satyāḥ — in truth; eva — certainly; āśiṣaḥ — blessings; āśāsānāḥ — desiring; nivasanti — they live.

Translation

The great sage Śukadeva Gosvāmī answered: All the hellish planets are situated in the intermediate space between the three worlds and the Garbhodaka Ocean. They lie on the southern side of the universe, beneath Bhū-maṇḍala, and slightly above the water of the Garbhodaka Ocean. Pitṛloka is also located in this region between the Garbhodaka Ocean and the lower planetary systems. All the residents of Pitṛloka, headed by Agniṣvāttā, meditate in great samādhi on the Supreme Personality of Godhead and always wish their families well.

ŚB 5.26.6

यत्र ह वाव भगवान् पितृराजो वैवस्वत: स्वविषयं प्रापितेषु स्वपुरुषैर्जन्तुषु सम्परेतेषु यथाकर्मावद्यं दोषमेवानुल्लङ्घितभगवच्छासन: सगणो दमं धारयति ॥ ६ ॥

yatra ha vāva bhagavān pitṛ-rājo vaivasvataḥ sva-viṣayaṁ prāpiteṣu sva-puruṣair jantuṣu sampareteṣu yathā-karmāvadyaṁ doṣam evānullaṅghita-bhagavac-chāsanaḥ sagaṇo damaṁ dhārayati

Synonyms

yatra — where; ha vāva — indeed; bhagavān — the most powerful; pitṛ-rājaḥ — Yamarāja, the king of the pitās; vaivasvataḥ — the son of the sun-god; sva-viṣayam — his own kingdom; prāpiteṣu — when caused to reach; sva-puruṣaiḥ — by his own messengers; jantuṣu — the human beings; sampareteṣu — dead; yathā-karma-avadyam — according to how much they have violated the rules and regulations of conditional life; doṣam — the fault; eva — certainly; anullaṅghita-bhagavat-śāsanaḥ — who never oversteps the Supreme Personality of Godhead’s order; sagaṇaḥ — along with his followers; damam — punishment; dhārayati — executes.

Translation

The King of the pitās is Yamarāja, the very powerful son of the sun-god. He resides in Pitṛloka with his personal assistants and, while abiding by the rules and regulations set down by the Supreme Lord, has his agents, the Yamadūtas, bring all the sinful men to him immediately upon their death. After bringing them within his jurisdiction, he properly judges them according to their specific sinful activities and sends them to one of the many hellish planets for suitable punishments.

ŚB 5.26.38

निवृत्तिलक्षणमार्ग आदावेव व्याख्यात: ।

एतावानेवाण्डकोशो यश्चतुर्दशधा पुराणेषु विकल्पित उपगीयते यत्तद्भ‍गवतो नारायणस्य साक्षान्महापुरुषस्य स्थविष्ठं रूपमात्ममायागुणमयमनुवर्णितमाद‍ृत: पठति श‍ृणोति श्रावयति स उपगेयं भगवत: परमात्मनोऽग्राह्यमपि श्रद्धाभक्तिविशुद्धबुद्धिर्वेद

॥३८ ॥

nivṛtti-lakṣaṇa-mārga ādāv eva vyākhyātaḥ;

etāvān evāṇḍa-kośo yaś caturdaśadhā purāṇeṣu

vikalpita upagīyate yat tad bhagavato nārāyaṇasya

sākṣān mahā-puruṣasya sthaviṣṭhaṁ rūpam

ātmamāyā-guṇamayam anuvarṇitam ādṛtaḥ paṭhati

śṛṇoti śrāvayati sa upageyaṁ bhagavataḥ

paramātmano ’grāhyam api

śraddhā-bhakti-viśuddha-buddhir veda

Synonyms

nivṛtti-lakṣaṇa-mārgaḥ — the path symptomized by renunciation, or the path of liberation; ādau — in the beginning (the second and third cantos); eva — indeed; vyākhyātaḥ — described; etāvān — this much; eva — certainly; aṇḍa-kośaḥ — the universe, which resembles a big egg; yaḥ — which; caturdaśa-dhā — in fourteen parts; purāṇeṣu — in the Purāṇas; vikalpitaḥ — divided; upagīyate — is described; yat — which; tat — that; bhagavataḥ — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; nārāyaṇasya — of Lord Nārāyaṇa; sākṣāt — directly; mahā-puruṣasya — of the Supreme Person; sthaviṣṭham — the gross; rūpam — form; ātma-māyā — of His own energy; guṇa — of the qualities; mayam — consisting; anuvarṇitam — described; ādṛtaḥ — venerating; paṭhati — one reads; śṛṇoti — or hears; śrāvayati — or explains; saḥ — that person; upageyam — song; bhagavataḥ — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; paramātmanaḥ — of the Supersoul; agrāhyam — difficult to understand; api — although; śraddhā — by faith; bhakti — and devotion; viśuddha — purified; buddhiḥ — whose intelligence; veda — understands.

Translation

In the beginning [the second and third cantos of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam] I have already described how one can progress on the path of liberation. In the Purāṇas the vast universal existence, which is like an egg divided into fourteen parts, is described. This vast form is considered the external body of the Lord, created by His energy and qualities. It is generally called the virāṭ-rūpa. If one reads the description of this external form of the Lord with great faith, or if one hears about it or explains it to others to propagate bhāgavata-dharma, or Kṛṣṇa consciousness, his faith and devotion in spiritual consciousness, Kṛṣṇa consciousness, will gradually increase. Although developing this consciousness is very difficult, by this process one can purify himself and gradually come to an awareness of the Supreme Absolute Truth.

ŚB 6.1.1

श्रीपरीक्षिदुवाचनिवृत्तिमार्ग: कथित आदौ भगवता यथा ।

क्रमयोगोपलब्धेन ब्रह्मणा यदसंसृति: ॥ १ ॥

śrī-parīkṣid uvāca

nivṛtti-mārgaḥ kathita

ādau bhagavatā yathā

krama-yogopalabdhena

brahmaṇā yad asaṁsṛtiḥ

Synonyms

śrī-parīkṣit uvāca — Mahārāja Parīkṣit said; nivṛtti-mārgaḥ — the path of liberation; kathitaḥ — described; ādau — in the beginning; bhagavatā — by Your Holiness; yathā — duly; krama — gradually; yoga-upalabdhena — obtained by the yoga process; brahmaṇā — along with Lord Brahmā (after reaching Brahmaloka); yat — by which way; asaṁsṛtiḥ — cessation of the repetition of birth and death.

Translation

Mahārāja Parīkṣit said: O my lord, O Śukadeva Gosvāmī, you have already described [in the Second Canto] the path of liberation [nivṛtti-mārga]. By following that path, one is certainly elevated gradually to the highest planetary system, Brahmaloka, from which one is promoted to the spiritual world along with Lord Brahmā. Thus one’s repetition of birth and death in the material world ceases.

ŚB 6.1.10

क्‍वचिन्निवर्ततेऽभद्रात्‍क्‍वचिच्चरति तत्पुन: ।

प्रायश्चित्तमथोऽपार्थं मन्ये कुञ्जरशौचवत् ॥ १० ॥

kvacin nivartate ’bhadrāt

kvacic carati tat punaḥ

prāyaścittam atho ’pārthaṁ

manye kuñjara-śaucavat

Synonyms

kvacit — sometimes; nivartate — ceases; abhadrāt — from sinful activity; kvacit — sometimes; carati — commits; tat — that (sinful activity); punaḥ — again; prāyaścittam — the process of atonement; atho — therefore; apārtham — useless; manye — I consider; kuñjara-śaucavat — exactly like the bathing of an elephant.

Translation

Sometimes one who is very alert so as not to commit sinful acts is victimized by sinful life again. I therefore consider this process of repeated sinning and atoning to be useless. It is like the bathing of an elephant, for an elephant cleanses itself by taking a full bath, but then throws dust over its head and body as soon as it returns to the land.

ŚB 6.1.15

केचित्केवलया भक्त्या वासुदेवपरायणा: ।

अघं धुन्वन्ति कार्त्स्‍न्येन नीहारमिव भास्कर: ॥ १५ ॥

kecit kevalayā bhaktyā

vāsudeva-parāyaṇāḥ

aghaṁ dhunvanti kārtsnyena

nīhāram iva bhāskaraḥ

Synonyms

kecit — some people; kevalayā bhaktyā — by executing unalloyed devotional service; vāsudeva — to Lord Kṛṣṇa, the all-pervading Supreme Personality of Godhead; parāyaṇāḥ — completely attached (only to such service, without dependence on austerity, penance, cultivation of knowledge or pious activities); agham — all kinds of sinful reactions; dhunvanti — destroy; kārtsnyena — completely (with no possibility that sinful desires will revive); nīhāram — fog; iva — like; bhāskaraḥ — the sun.

Translation

Only a rare person who has adopted complete, unalloyed devotional service to Kṛṣṇa can uproot the weeds of sinful actions with no possibility that they will revive. He can do this simply by discharging devotional service, just as the sun can immediately dissipate fog by its rays.

ŚB 6.2.15

पतित: स्खलितो भग्न: सन्दष्टस्तप्त आहत: ।

हरिरित्यवशेनाह पुमान्नार्हति यातना: ॥ १५ ॥

patitaḥ skhalito bhagnaḥ

sandaṣṭas tapta āhataḥ

harir ity avaśenāha

pumān nārhati yātanāḥ

Synonyms

patitaḥ — fallen down; skhalitaḥ — slipped; bhagnaḥ — having broken his bones; sandaṣṭaḥ — bitten; taptaḥ — severely attacked by fever or similar painful conditions; āhataḥ — injured; hariḥ — Lord Kṛṣṇa; iti — thus; avaśena — accidentally; āha — chants; pumān — a person; na — not; arhati — deserves; yātanāḥ — hellish conditions.

Translation

If one chants the holy name of Hari and then dies because of an accidental misfortune, such as falling from the top of a house, slipping and suffering broken bones while traveling on the road, being bitten by a serpent, being afflicted with pain and high fever, or being injured by a weapon, one is immediately absolved from having to enter hellish life, even though he is sinful.

ŚB 6.3.16

यं वै न गोभिर्मनसासुभिर्वाहृदा गिरा वासुभृतो विचक्षते ।

आत्मानमन्तर्हृदि सन्तमात्मनांचक्षुर्यथैवाकृतयस्तत: परम् ॥ १६ ॥

yaṁ vai na gobhir manasāsubhir vā

hṛdā girā vāsu-bhṛto vicakṣate

ātmānam antar-hṛdi santam ātmanāṁ

cakṣur yathaivākṛtayas tataḥ param

Synonymsyam — whom; vai — indeed; na — not; gobhiḥ — by the senses; manasā — by the mind; asubhiḥ — by the life breath; vā — or; hṛdā — by thoughts; girā — by words; vā — or; asu-bhṛtaḥ — the living entities; vicakṣate — see or know; ātmānam — the Supersoul; antaḥ-hṛdi — within the core of the heart; santam — existing; ātmanām — of the living entities; cakṣuḥ — the eyes; yathā — just like; eva — indeed; ākṛtayaḥ — the different parts or limbs of the body; tataḥ — than them; param — higher.

Translation

As the different limbs of the body cannot see the eyes, the living entities cannot see the Supreme Lord, who is situated as the Supersoul in everyone’s heart. Not by the senses, by the mind, by the life air, by thoughts within the heart, or by the vibration of words can the living entities ascertain the real situation of the Supreme Lord.

SB 6.3.20-21

svayambhūr nāradaḥ śambhuḥ
kumāraḥ kapilo manuḥ
prahlādo janako bhīṣmo
balir vaiyāsakir vayam

dvādaśaite vijānīmo
dharmaṁ bhāgavataṁ bhaṭāḥ
guhyaṁ viśuddhaṁ durbodhaṁ
yaṁ jñātvāmṛtam aśnute

SYNONYMS
svayambhūḥ — Lord Brahmā; nāradaḥ — the great saint Nārada; śambhuḥ — Lord Śiva; kumāraḥ — the four Kumāras; kapilaḥ — Lord Kapila; manuḥ — Svāyambhuva Manu; prahlādaḥ — Prahlāda Mahārāja; janakaḥ — Janaka Mahārāja; bhīṣmaḥ — Grandfather Bhīṣma; baliḥ — Bali Mahārāja; vaiyāsakiḥ — Śukadeva, the son of Vyāsadeva; vayam — we; dvādaśa—twelve; ete—these; vijānīmaḥ—know; dharmam—real religious principles; bhāgavatam—which teach a person how to love the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhaṭāḥ—O my dear servants; guhyam—very confidential; viśuddham—transcendental, not contaminated by the material modes of nature; durbodham—not easily understood; yam—which; jñātvā—understanding; amṛtam—eternal life; aśnute—he enjoys.

TRANSLATION
Lord Brahmā, Bhagavān Nārada, Lord Śiva, the four Kumāras, Lord Kapila [the son of Devahūti], Svāyambhuva Manu, Prahlāda Mahārāja, Janaka Mahārāja, Grandfather Bhīṣma, Bali Mahārāja, Śukadeva Gosvāmī and I myself know the real religious principle. My dear servants, this transcendental religious principle, which is known as bhāgavata-dharma, or surrender unto the Supreme Lord and love for Him, is uncontaminated by the material modes of nature. It is very confidential and difficult for ordinary human beings to understand, but if by chance one fortunately understands it, he is immediately liberated, and thus he returns home, back to Godhead.

ŚB 6.3.26

एवं विमृश्य सुधियो भगवत्यनन्तेसर्वात्मना विदधते खलु भावयोगम् ।

ते मे न दण्डमर्हन्त्यथ यद्यमीषांस्यात् पातकं तदपि हन्त्युरुगायवाद: ॥ २६ ॥

evaṁ vimṛśya sudhiyo bhagavaty anante

sarvātmanā vidadhate khalu bhāva-yogam

te me na daṇḍam arhanty atha yady amīṣāṁ

syāt pātakaṁ tad api hanty urugāya-vādaḥ

Synonyms

evam — thus; vimṛśya — considering; su-dhiyaḥ — those whose intelligence is sharp; bhagavati — unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead; anante — the unlimited; sarva-ātmanā — with all their heart and soul; vidadhate — take to; khalu — indeed; bhāva-yogam — the process of devotional service; te — such persons; me — my; na — not; daṇḍam — punishment; arhanti — deserve; atha — therefore; yadi — if; amīṣām — of them; syāt — there is; pātakam — some sinful activity; tat — that; api — also; hanti — destroys; urugāya-vādaḥ — the chanting of the holy name of the Supreme Lord.

Translation

Considering all these points, therefore, intelligent men decide to solve all problems by adopting the devotional service of chanting the holy name of the Lord, who is situated in everyone’s heart and who is a mine of all auspicious qualities. Such persons are not within my jurisdiction for punishment. Generally they never commit sinful activities, but even if by mistake or because of bewilderment or illusion they sometimes commit sinful acts, they are protected from sinful reactions because they always chant the Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra.

ŚB 6.4.14

य: समुत्पतितं देह आकाशान्मन्युमुल्बणम् ।

आत्मजिज्ञासया यच्छेत्स गुणानतिवर्तते ॥ १४ ॥

yaḥ samutpatitaṁ deha

ākāśān manyum ulbaṇam

ātma-jijñāsayā yacchet

sa guṇān ativartate

Synonyms

yaḥ — anyone who; samutpatitam — suddenly awakened; dehe — in the body; ākāśāt — from the sky; manyum — anger; ulbaṇam — powerful; ātma-jijñāsayā — by inquiry into spiritual realization or self-realization; yacchet — subdues; saḥ — that person; guṇān — the modes of material nature; ativartate — transcends.

Translation

One who inquires into self-realization and thus subdues his powerful anger — which awakens suddenly in the body as if falling from the sky — transcends the influence of the modes of material nature.

ŚB 6.9.8

तुर्यं छेदविरोहेण वरेण जगृहुर्द्रुमा: ।

तेषां निर्यासरूपेण ब्रह्महत्या प्रद‍ृश्यते ॥ ८ ॥

turyaṁ cheda-viroheṇa

vareṇa jagṛhur drumāḥ

teṣāṁ niryāsa-rūpeṇa

brahma-hatyā pradṛśyate

Synonyms

turyam — one fourth; cheda — although being cut; viroheṇa — of growing again; vareṇa — because of the benediction; jagṛhuḥ — accepted; drumāḥ — the trees; teṣām — of them; niryāsa-rūpeṇa — by the liquid oozing from the trees; brahma-hatyā — the reaction for killing a brāhmaṇa; pradṛśyate — is visible.

Translation

In return for Indra’s benediction that their branches and twigs would grow back when trimmed, the trees accepted one fourth of the reactions for killing a brāhmaṇa. These reactions are visible in the flowing of sap from trees. [Therefore one is forbidden to drink this sap.]

ŚB 6.9.10

द्रव्यभूयोवरेणापस्तुरीयं जगृहुर्मलम् ।

तासु बुद्बुदफेनाभ्यां द‍ृष्टं तद्धरति क्षिपन् ॥ १० ॥

dravya-bhūyo-vareṇāpas

turīyaṁ jagṛhur malam

tāsu budbuda-phenābhyāṁ

dṛṣṭaṁ tad dharati kṣipan

Synonyms

dravya — other things; bhūyaḥ — of increasing; vareṇa — by the benediction; āpaḥ — water; turīyam — one fourth; jagṛhuḥ — accepted; malam — the sinful reaction; tāsu — in the water; budbuda-phenābhyām — by bubbles and foam; dṛṣṭam — visible; tat — that; harati — one collects; kṣipan — throwing away.

Translation

And in return for King Indra’s benediction that water would increase the volume of other substances with which it was mixed, water accepted one fourth of the sinful reactions. Therefore there are bubbles and foam in water. When one collects water, these should be avoided.

ŚB 6.9.38

स एव हि पुन: सर्ववस्तुनि वस्तुस्वरूप: सर्वेश्वर: सकलजगत्कारणकारणभूत: सर्व प्रत्यगात्मत्वात् सर्वगुणाभासोपलक्षित एक एव पर्यवशेषित: ॥ ३८ ॥

sa eva hi punaḥ sarva-vastuni vastu-svarūpaḥ sarveśvaraḥ sakala-jagat-kāraṇa-kāraṇa-bhūtaḥ sarva-pratyag-ātmatvāt sarva-guṇābhāsopalakṣita eka eva paryavaśeṣitaḥ

Synonymssaḥ — He (the Supreme Personality of Godhead); eva — indeed; hi — certainly; punaḥ — again; sarva-vastuni — in everything, material and spiritual; vastu-svarūpaḥ — the substance; sarva-īśvaraḥ — the controller of everything; sakala-jagat — of the whole universe; kāraṇa — of the causes; kāraṇa-bhūtaḥ — existing as the cause; sarva-pratyak-ātmatvāt — because of being the Supersoul of every living being, or being present in everything, even the atom; sarva-guṇa — of all the effects of the material modes of nature (such as intelligence and the senses); ābhāsa — by the manifestations; upalakṣitaḥ — perceived; ekaḥ — alone; eva — indeed; paryavaśeṣitaḥ — left remaining.

Translation

With deliberation, one will see that the Supreme Soul, although manifested in different ways, is actually the basic principle of everything. The total material energy is the cause of the material manifestation, but the material energy is caused by Him. Therefore He is the cause of all causes, the manifester of intelligence and the senses. He is perceived as the Supersoul of everything. Without Him, everything would be dead. You, as that Supersoul, the supreme controller, are the only one remaining.

ŚB 6.9.43

अत एव स्वयं तदुपकल्पयास्माकं भगवत: परमगुरोस्तव चरणशतपलाशच्छायां विविधवृजिन संसारपरिश्रमोपशमनीमुपसृतानां वयं यत्कामेनोपसादिता: ॥ ४३ ॥

ata eva svayaṁ tad upakalpayāsmākaṁ bhagavataḥ parama-guros tava caraṇa-śata-palāśac-chāyāṁ vividha-vṛjina-saṁsāra-pariśramopaśamanīm upasṛtānāṁ vayaṁ yat-kāmenopasāditāḥ

Synonymata eva — therefore; svayam — Yourself; tat — that; upakalpaya — please arrange; asmākam — of us; bhagavataḥ — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; parama-guroḥ — the supreme spiritual master; tava — of You; caraṇa — of the feet; śata-palāśat — like lotus flowers with hundreds of petals; chāyām — the shade; vividha — various; vṛjina — with dangerous positions; saṁsāra — of this conditioned life; pariśrama — the pain; upaśamanīm — relieving; upasṛtānām — the devotees who have taken shelter at Your lotus feet; vayam — we; yat — for which; kāmena — by the desires; upasāditāḥ — caused to come near (the shelter of Your lotus feet).

Translation

Dear Lord, You are omniscient, and therefore You know very well why we have taken shelter at Your lotus feet, which provide shade that gives relief from all material disturbances. Since You are the supreme spiritual master and You know everything, we have sought shelter of Your lotus feet for instruction. Please give us relief by counteracting our present distress. Your lotus feet are the only shelter for a fully surrendered devotee and are the only means for subduing all the tribulations of this material world.

ŚB 6.9.45

हंसाय दह्रनिलयाय निरीक्षकाय

कृष्णाय मृष्टयशसे निरुपक्रमाय ।

सत्सङ्ग्रहाय भवपान्थनिजाश्रमाप्ता-

वन्ते परीष्टगतये हरये नमस्ते ॥ ४५ ॥

haṁsāya dahra-nilayāya nirīkṣakāya

kṛṣṇāya mṛṣṭa-yaśase nirupakramāya

sat-saṅgrahāya bhava-pāntha-nijāśramāptāv

ante parīṣṭa-gataye haraye namas te

Synonyms

haṁsāya — unto the most exalted and pure (pavitraṁ paramam, the supreme pure); dahra — in the core of the heart; nilayāya — whose abode; nirīkṣakāya — supervising the activities of the individual soul; kṛṣṇāya — unto the Supersoul, who is a partial manifestation of Kṛṣṇa; mṛṣṭa-yaśase — whose reputation is very bright; nirupakramāya — who has no beginning; sat-saṅgrahāya — understood only by pure devotees; bhava-pāntha-nija-āśrama-āptau — being obtainment of the shelter of Kṛṣṇa for persons within this material world; ante — at the ultimate end; parīṣṭa-gataye — unto Him who is the ultimate goal, the highest success of life; haraye — unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead; namaḥ — respectful obeisances; te — unto You.

Translation

O Lord, O supreme pure, You live within the core of everyone’s heart and observe all the desires and activities of the conditioned souls. O Supreme Personality of Godhead known as Lord Kṛṣṇa, Your reputation is bright and illuminating. You have no beginning, for You are the beginning of everything. This is understood by pure devotees because You are easily accessible to the pure and truthful. When the conditioned souls are liberated and sheltered at Your lotus feet after roving throughout the material world for many millions of years, they attain the highest success of life. Therefore, O Lord, O Supreme Personality of Godhead, we offer our respectful obeisances at Your lotus feet.

ŚB 6.9.48

किं दुरापं मयि प्रीते तथापि विबुधर्षभा: ।

मय्येकान्तमतिर्नान्यन्मत्तो वाञ्छति तत्त्ववित् ॥ ४८ ॥

kiṁ durāpaṁ mayi prīte

tathāpi vibudharṣabhāḥ

mayy ekānta-matir nānyan

matto vāñchati tattva-vit

Synonyms

kim — what; durāpam — difficult to obtain; mayi — when I; prīte — satisfied; tathāpi — still; vibudha-ṛṣabhāḥ — O best of the intelligent demigods; mayi — in Me; ekānta — exclusively fixed; matiḥ — whose attention; na anyat — not anything other; mattaḥ — than Me; vāñchati — desires; tattva-vit — one who knows the truth.

Translation

O best of the intelligent demigods, although it is true that nothing is difficult for one to obtain when I am pleased with him, a pure devotee, whose mind is exclusively fixed upon Me, does not ask Me for anything but the opportunity to engage in devotional service.

ŚB 6.11.24

अहं हरे तव पादैकमूल- दासानुदासो भवितास्मि भूय: ।

मन: स्मरेतासुपतेर्गुणांस्ते गृणीत वाक् कर्म करोतु काय: ॥ २४ ॥

ahaṁ hare tava pādaika-mūla-

dāsānudāso bhavitāsmi bhūyaḥ

manaḥ smaretāsu-pater guṇāṁs te

gṛṇīta vāk karma karotu kāyaḥ

Synonyms

aham — I; hare — O my Lord; tava — of Your Lordship; pāda-eka-mūla — whose only shelter is the lotus feet; dāsa-anudāsaḥ — the servant of Your servant; bhavitāsmi — shall I become; bhūyaḥ — again; manaḥ — my mind; smareta — may remember; asu-pateḥ — of the Lord of my life; guṇān — the attributes; te — of Your Lordship; gṛṇīta — may chant; vāk — my words; karma — activities of service to You; karotu — may perform; kāyaḥ — my body.

Translation

O my Lord, O Supreme Personality of Godhead, will I again be able to be a servant of Your eternal servants who find shelter only at Your lotus feet? O Lord of my life, may I again become their servant so that my mind may always think of Your transcendental attributes, my words always glorify those attributes, and my body always engage in the loving service of Your Lordship?

Purport

This verse gives the sum and substance of devotional life. […]

ŚB 6.11.25

न नाकपृष्ठं न च पारमेष्ठ्यं न सार्वभौमं न रसाधिपत्यम् ।

न योगसिद्धीरपुनर्भवं वा समञ्जस त्वा विरहय्य काङ्‌क्षे ॥ २५ ॥

na nāka-pṛṣṭhaṁ na ca pārameṣṭhyaṁ

na sārva-bhaumaṁ na rasādhipatyam

na yoga-siddhīr apunar-bhavaṁ vā

samañjasa tvā virahayya kāṅkṣe

Synonyms

na — not; nāka-pṛṣṭham — the heavenly planets or Dhruvaloka; na — nor; ca — also; pārameṣṭhyam — the planet on which Lord Brahmā resides; na — nor; sārva-bhaumam — sovereignty of the whole earthly planetary system; na — nor; rasā-ādhipatyam — sovereignty of the lower planetary systems; na — nor; yoga-siddhīḥ — eight kinds of mystic yogic power (aṇimā, laghimā, mahimā, etc.); apunaḥ-bhavam — liberation from rebirth in a material body; vā — or; samañjasa — O source of all opportunities; tvā — You; virahayya — being separated from; kāṅkṣe — I desire.

Translation

O my Lord, source of all opportunities, I do not desire to enjoy in Dhruvaloka, the heavenly planets or the planet where Lord Brahmā resides, nor do I want to be the supreme ruler of all the earthly planets or the lower planetary systems. I do not desire to be master of the powers of mystic yoga, nor do I want liberation if I have to give up Your lotus feet.

ŚB 6.11.26

अजातपक्षा इव मातरं खगा: स्तन्यं यथा वत्सतरा: क्षुधार्ता: ।

प्रियं प्रियेव व्युषितं विषण्णा मनोऽरविन्दाक्ष दिद‍ृक्षते त्वाम् ॥ २६ ॥

ajāta-pakṣā iva mātaraṁ khagāḥ

stanyaṁ yathā vatsatarāḥ kṣudh-ārtāḥ

priyaṁ priyeva vyuṣitaṁ viṣaṇṇā

mano ’ravindākṣa didṛkṣate tvām

Synonyms

ajāta-pakṣāḥ — who have not yet grown wings; iva — like; mātaram — the mother; khagāḥ — small birds; stanyam — the milk from the udder; yathā — just as; vatsatarāḥ — the young calves; kṣudh-ārtāḥ — distressed by hunger; priyam — the beloved or husband; priyā — the wife or lover; iva — like; vyuṣitam — who is away from home; viṣaṇṇā — morose; manaḥ — my mind; aravinda-akṣa — O lotus-eyed one; didṛkṣate — wants to see; tvām — You.

Translation

O lotus-eyed Lord, as baby birds that have not yet developed their wings always look for their mother to return and feed them, as small calves tied with ropes await anxiously the time of milking, when they will be allowed to drink the milk of their mothers, or as a morose wife whose husband is away from home always longs for him to return and satisfy her in all respects, I always yearn for the opportunity to render direct service unto You.

ŚB 6.11.27

ममोत्तमश्लोकजनेषु सख्यं संसारचक्रे भ्रमत: स्वकर्मभि: ।

त्वन्माययात्मात्मजदारगेहे- ष्वासक्तचित्तस्य न नाथ भूयात् ॥ २७ ॥

mamottamaśloka-janeṣu sakhyaṁ

saṁsāra-cakre bhramataḥ sva-karmabhiḥ

tvan-māyayātmātmaja-dāra-geheṣv

āsakta-cittasya na nātha bhūyāt

Synonyms

mama — my; uttama-śloka-janeṣu — among devotees who are simply attached to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sakhyam — friendship; saṁsāra-cakre — in the cycle of birth and death; bhramataḥ — who am wandering; sva-karmabhiḥ — by the results of my own fruitive activities; tvat-māyayā — by Your external energy; ātma — to the body; ātma-ja — children; dāra — wife; geheṣu — and home; āsakta — attached; cittasya — whose mind; na — not; nātha — O my Lord; bhūyāt — may there be.

Translation

O my Lord, my master, I am wandering throughout this material world as a result of my fruitive activities. Therefore I simply seek friendship in the association of Your pious and enlightened devotees. My attachment to my body, wife, children and home is continuing by the spell of Your external energy, but I wish to be attached to them no longer. Let my mind, my consciousness and everything I have be attached only to You.

ŚB 6.14.5

मुक्तानामपि सिद्धानां नारायणपरायण: ।

सुदुर्लभ: प्रशान्तात्मा कोटिष्वपि महामुने ॥ ५ ॥

muktānām api siddhānāṁ

nārāyaṇa-parāyaṇaḥ

su-durlabhaḥ praśāntātmā

koṭiṣv api mahā-mune

Synonyms

muktānām — of those who are liberated during this life (who are unattached to the bodily comforts of society, friendship and love); api — even; siddhānām — who are perfect (because they understand the insignificance of bodily comforts); nārāyaṇa-parāyaṇaḥ — a person who has concluded that Nārāyaṇa is the Supreme; su-durlabhaḥ — very rarely found; praśānta — fully pacified; ātmā — whose mind; koṭiṣu* — out of millions and trillions; api — even; mahā-mune — O great sage.

Translation

O great sage, among many millions who are liberated and perfect in knowledge of liberation, one may be a devotee of Lord Nārāyaṇa, or Kṛṣṇa. Such devotees, who are fully peaceful, are extremely rare.

ŚB 6.17.28

नारायणपरा: सर्वे न कुतश्चन बिभ्यति ।

स्वर्गापवर्गनरकेष्वपि तुल्यार्थदर्शिन: ॥ २८ ॥

nārāyaṇa-parāḥ sarvena

kutaścana bibhyati

svargāpavarga-narakeṣv

api tulyārtha-darśinaḥ

Synonyms

nārāyaṇa-parāḥ — pure devotees, who are interested only in the service of Nārāyaṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sarve — all; na — not; kutaścana — anywhere; bibhyati — are afraid; svarga — in the higher planetary systems; apavarga — in liberation; narakeṣu — and in hell; api — even; tulya — equal; artha — value; darśinaḥ — who see.

Translation

Devotees solely engaged in the devotional service of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Nārāyaṇa, never fear any condition of life. For them the heavenly planets, liberation and the hellish planets are all the same, for such devotees are interested only in the service of the Lord.

ŚB 6.6.24-26

पुन: प्रसाद्य तं सोम: कला लेभे क्षये दिता: ।

श‍ृणु नामानि लोकानां मातृणां शङ्कराणि च ॥ २४ ॥

अथ कश्यपपत्नीनां यत्प्रसूतमिदं जगत् ।

अदितिर्दितिर्दनु: काष्ठा अरिष्टा सुरसा इला ॥ २५ ॥

मुनि: क्रोधवशा ताम्रा सुरभि: सरमा तिमि: ।

तिमेर्यादोगणा आसन् श्वापदा: सरमासुता: ॥ २६ ॥

punaḥ prasādya taṁ somaḥ

kalā lebhe kṣaye ditāḥ

śṛṇu nāmāni lokānāṁ

mātṝṇāṁ śaṅkarāṇi ca

atha kaśyapa-patnīnāṁ

yat-prasūtam idaṁ jagat

aditir ditir danuḥ kāṣṭhā

ariṣṭā surasā ilā

muniḥ krodhavaśā tāmrā

surabhiḥ saramā timiḥ

timer yādo-gaṇā āsan

śvāpadāḥ saramā-sutāḥ

Synonyms

punaḥ — again; prasādya — pacifying; tam — him (Prajāpati Dakṣa); somaḥ — the moon-god; kalāḥ — portions of light; lebhe — achieved; kṣaye — in gradual destruction (the dark fortnight); ditāḥ — removed; śṛṇu — please hear; nāmāni — all the names; lokānām — of the planets; mātṝṇām — of the mothers; śaṅkarāṇi — pleasing; ca — also; atha — now; kaśyapa-patnīnām — of the wives of Kaśyapa; yat-prasūtam — from whom was born; idam — this; jagat — whole universe; aditiḥ — Aditi; ditiḥ — Diti; danuḥ — Danu; kāṣṭhā — Kāṣṭhā; ariṣṭā — Ariṣṭā; surasā — Surasā; ilā — Ilā; muniḥ — Muni; krodhavaśā — Krodhavaśā; tāmrā — Tāmrā; surabhiḥ — Surabhi; saramā — Saramā; timiḥ — Timi; timeḥ — from Timi; yādaḥ-gaṇāḥ — the aquatics; āsan — appeared; śvāpadāḥ — the ferocious animals like the lions and tigers; saramā-sutāḥ — the children of Saramā.

Translation

Thereafter the King of the moon pacified Prajāpati Dakṣa with courteous words and thus regained the portions of light he had lost during his disease. Nevertheless he could not beget children. The moon loses his shining power during the dark fortnight, and in the bright fortnight it is manifest again. O King Parīkṣit, now please hear from me the names of Kaśyapa’s wives, from whose wombs the population of the entire universe has come. They are the mothers of almost all the population of the entire universe, and their names are very auspicious to hear. They are Aditi, Diti, Danu, Kāṣṭhā, Ariṣṭā, Surasā, Ilā, Muni, Krodhavaśā, Tāmrā, Surabhi, Saramā and Timi. From the womb of Timi all the aquatics took birth, and from the womb of Saramā the ferocious animals like the tigers and lions took birth.

ŚB 6.6.40

विवस्वत: श्राद्धदेवं संज्ञासूयत वै मनुम् ।

मिथुनं च महाभागा यमं देवं यमीं तथा ।

सैव भूत्वाथ वडवा नासत्यौ सुषुवे भुवि ॥ ४० ॥

vivasvataḥ śrāddhadevaṁ

saṁjñāsūyata vai manum

mithunaṁ ca mahā-bhāgā

yamaṁ devaṁ yamīṁ tathā

saiva bhūtvātha vaḍavā

nāsatyau suṣuve bhuvi

Synonyms

vivasvataḥ — of the sun-god; śrāddhadevam — named Śrāddhadeva; saṁjñā — Saṁjñā; asūyata — gave birth; vai — indeed; manum — to Manu; mithunam — twins; ca — and; mahā-bhāgā — the fortunate Saṁjñā; yamam — to Yamarāja; devam — the demigod; yamīm — to his sister named Yamī; tathā — as well as; sā — she; eva — also; bhūtvā — becoming; atha — then; vaḍavā — a mare; nāsatyau — to the Aśvinī-kumāras; suṣuve — gave birth; bhuvi — on this earth.

Translation

Saṁjñā, the wife of Vivasvān, the sun-god, gave birth to the Manu named Śrāddhadeva, and the same fortunate wife also gave birth to the twins Yamarāja and the river Yamunā. Then Yamī, while wandering on the earth in the form of a mare, gave birth to the Aśvinī-kumāras.

ŚB 6.6.42

अर्यम्णो मातृका पत्नी तयोश्चर्षणय: सुता: ।

यत्र वै मानुषी जातिर्ब्रह्मणा चोपकल्पिता ॥ ४२ ॥

aryamṇo mātṛkā patnī

tayoś carṣaṇayaḥ sutāḥ

yatra vai mānuṣī jātir

brahmaṇā copakalpitā

Synonyms

aryamṇaḥ — of Aryamā; mātṛkā — Mātṛkā; patnī — the wife; tayoḥ — by their union; carṣaṇayaḥ sutāḥ — many sons who were learned scholars; yatra — wherein; vai — indeed; mānuṣī — human; jātiḥ — species; brahmaṇā — by Lord Brahmā; ca — and; upakalpitā — was created.

Translation

From the womb of Mātṛkā, the wife of Aryamā, were born many learned scholars. Among them Lord Brahmā created the human species, which are endowed with an aptitude for self-examination.

ŚB 6.9.22

अविस्मितं तं परिपूर्णकामं

स्वेनैव लाभेन समं प्रशान्तम् ।

विनोपसर्पत्यपरं हि बालिश:

श्वलाङ्गुलेनातितितर्ति सिन्धुम् ॥ २२ ॥

avismitaṁ taṁ paripūrṇa-kāmaṁ

svenaiva lābhena samaṁ praśāntam

vinopasarpaty aparaṁ hi bāliśaḥ

śva-lāṅgulenātititarti sindhum

Synonyms

avismitam — who is never struck with wonder; tam — Him; paripūrṇa-kāmam — who is fully satisfied; svena — by His own; eva — indeed; lābhena — achievements; samam — equipoised; praśāntam — very steady; vinā — without; upasarpati — approaches; aparam — another; hi — indeed; bāliśaḥ — a fool; śva — of a dog; lāṅgulena — by the tail; atititarti — wants to cross; sindhum — the sea.

Translation

Free from all material conceptions of existence and never wonder-struck by anything, the Lord is always jubilant and fully satisfied by His own spiritual perfection. He has no material designations, and therefore He is steady and unattached. That Supreme Personality of Godhead is the only shelter of everyone. Anyone desiring to be protected by others is certainly a great fool who desires to cross the sea by holding the tail of a dog.

SB 7.5.5

śrī-prahlāda uvāca

tat sādhu manye ’sura-varya dehināṁ

sadā samudvigna-dhiyām asad-grahāt

hitvātma-pātaṁ gṛham andha-kūpaṁ

vanaṁ gato yad dharim āśrayeta

Synonyms

śrī-prahlādaḥ uvāca — Prahlāda Mahārāja replied; tat — that; sādhu — very good, or the best part of life; manye — I think; asura-varya — O King of the asuras; dehinām — of persons who have accepted the material body; sadā — always; samudvigna — full of anxieties; dhiyām — whose intelligence; asat-grahāt — because of accepting the temporary body or bodily relations as real (thinking “I am this body, and everything belonging to this body is mine”); hitvā — giving up; ātma-pātam — the place where spiritual culture or self-realization is stopped; gṛham — the bodily concept of life, or household life; andha-kūpam — which is nothing but a blind well (where there is no water but one nonetheless searches for water); vanam — to the forest; gataḥ — going; yat — which; harim — the Supreme Personality of Godhead; āśrayeta — may take shelter of.

Translation

Prahlāda Mahārāja replied: O best of the asuras, King of the demons, as far as I have learned from my spiritual master, any person who has accepted a temporary body and temporary household life is certainly embarrassed by anxiety because of having fallen in a dark well where there is no water but only suffering. One should give up this position and go to the forest [vana]. More clearly, one should go to Vṛndāvana, where only Kṛṣṇa consciousness is prevalent, and should thus take shelter of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

SB 7.5.23-24

śrī-prahrāda uvāca

śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ

smaraṇaṁ pāda-sevanam

arcanaṁ vandanaṁ dāsyaṁ

sakhyam ātma-nivedanam

iti puṁsārpitā viṣṇau

bhaktiś cen nava-lakṣaṇā

kriyeta bhagavaty addhātan

manye ’dhītam uttamam

Synonyms

śrī-prahrādaḥ uvāca — Prahlāda Mahārāja said; śravaṇam — hearing; kīrtanam — chanting; viṣṇoḥ — of Lord Viṣṇu (not anyone else); smaraṇam — remembering; pāda-sevanam — serving the feet; arcanam — offering worship (with ṣoḍaśopacāra, the sixteen kinds of paraphernalia); vandanam — offering prayers; dāsyam — becoming the servant; sakhyam — becoming the best friend; ātma-nivedanam — surrendering everything, whatever one has; iti — thus; puṁsā arpitā — offered by the devotee; viṣṇau — unto Lord Viṣṇu (not to anyone else); bhaktiḥ — devotional service; cet — if; nava-lakṣaṇā — possessing nine different processes; kriyeta — one should perform; bhagavati — unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead; addhā — directly or completely; tat — that; manye — I consider; adhītam — learning; uttamam — topmost.

Translation

Prahlāda Mahārāja said: Hearing and chanting about the transcendental holy name, form, qualities, paraphernalia and pastimes of Lord Viṣṇu, remembering them, serving the lotus feet of the Lord, offering the Lord respectful worship with sixteen types of paraphernalia, offering prayers to the Lord, becoming His servant, considering the Lord one’s best friend, and surrendering everything unto Him (in other words, serving Him with the body, mind and words) — these nine processes are accepted as pure devotional service. One who has dedicated his life to the service of Kṛṣṇa through these nine methods should be understood to be the most learned person, for he has acquired complete knowledge.

SB 7.5.32

नैषां मतिस्तावदुरुक्रमाङ्‌घ्रिंस्पृशत्यनर्थापगमो यदर्थ:

।महीयसां पादरजोऽभिषेकंनिष्किञ्चनानां न वृणीत यावत् ॥ ३२ ॥

naiṣāṁ matis tāvad urukramāṅghriṁ

spṛśaty anarthāpagamo yad-arthaḥ

mahīyasāṁ pāda-rajo-’bhiṣekaṁ

niṣkiñcanānāṁ na vṛṇīta yāvat

Synonyms

na — not; eṣām — of these; matiḥ — the consciousness; tāvat — that long; urukrama-aṅghrim — the lotus feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is famous for performing uncommon activities; spṛśati — does touch; anartha — of unwanted things; apagamaḥ — the disappearance; yat — of which; arthaḥ — the purpose; mahīyasām — of the great souls (the mahātmās, or devotees); pāda-rajaḥ — by the dust of the lotus feet; abhiṣekam — consecration; niṣkiñcanānām — of devotees who have nothing to do with this material world; na — not; vṛṇīta — may accept; yāvat — as long as.

Translation

Unless they smear upon their bodies the dust of the lotus feet of a Vaiṣṇava completely freed from material contamination, persons very much inclined toward materialistic life cannot be attached to the lotus feet of the Lord, who is glorified for His uncommon activities. Only by becoming Kṛṣṇa conscious and taking shelter at the lotus feet of the Lord in this way can one be freed from material contamination.

ŚB 7.6.1

श्रीप्रह्राद उवाचकौमार आचरेत्प्राज्ञो धर्मान्भागवतानिह ।

दुर्लभं मानुषं जन्म तदप्यध्रुवमर्थदम् ॥ १ ॥

śrī-prahrāda uvāca

kaumāra ācaret prājño

dharmān bhāgavatān iha

durlabhaṁ mānuṣaṁ janma

tad apy adhruvam arthadam

Synonyms

śrī-prahrādaḥ uvāca — Prahlāda Mahārāja said; kaumāraḥ — in the tender age of childhood; ācaret — should practice; prājñaḥ — one who is intelligent; dharmān — occupational duties; bhāgavatān — which are devotional service to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; iha — in this life; durlabham — very rarely obtained; mānuṣam — human; janma — birth; tat — that; api — even; adhruvam — impermanent, temporary; artha-dam — full of meaning.

Translation

Prahlāda Mahārāja said: One who is sufficiently intelligent should use the human form of body from the very beginning of life — in other words, from the tender age of childhood — to practice the activities of devotional service, giving up all other engagements. The human body is most rarely achieved, and although temporary like other bodies, it is meaningful because in human life one can perform devotional service. Even a slight amount of sincere devotional service can give one complete perfection.

ŚB 7.6.10

को न्वर्थतृष्णां विसृजेत्प्राणेभ्योऽपि य ईप्सित: ।

यं क्रीणात्यसुभि: प्रेष्ठैस्तस्कर: सेवको वणिक् ॥ १० ॥

ko nv artha-tṛṣṇāṁ visṛjet

prāṇebhyo ’pi ya īpsitaḥ

yaṁ krīṇāty asubhiḥ preṣṭhais

taskaraḥ sevako vaṇik

Synonyms

kaḥ — who; nu — indeed; artha-tṛṣṇām — a strong desire to acquire money; visṛjet — can give up; prāṇebhyaḥ — than life; api — indeed; yaḥ — which; īpsitaḥ — more desired; yam — which; krīṇāti — tries to acquire; asubhiḥ — with his own life; preṣṭhaiḥ — very dear; taskaraḥ — a thief; sevakaḥ — a professional servant; vaṇik — a merchant.

Translation

Money is so dear that one conceives of money as being sweeter than honey. Therefore, who can give up the desire to accumulate money, especially in household life? Thieves, professional servants [soldiers] and merchants try to acquire money even by risking their very dear lives.

ŚB 7.7.51-52

नालं द्विजत्वं देवत्वमृषित्वं वासुरात्मजा: ।

प्रीणनाय मुकुन्दस्य न वृत्तं न बहुज्ञता ॥ ५१ ॥

न दानं न तपो नेज्या न शौचं न व्रतानि च ।

प्रीयतेऽमलया भक्त्या हरिरन्यद् विडम्बनम् ॥ ५२ ॥

nālaṁ dvijatvaṁ devatvam

ṛṣitvaṁ vāsurātmajāḥ

prīṇanāya mukundasya

na vṛttaṁ na bahu-jñatā

na dānaṁ na tapo nejyā

na śaucaṁ na vratāni ca

prīyate ’malayā bhaktyā

harir anyad viḍambanam

Synonyms

na — not; alam — sufficient; dvijatvam — being a perfect, highly qualified brāhmaṇa; devatvam — being a demigod; ṛṣitvam — being a saintly person; vā — or; asura-ātma-jāḥ — O descendants of asuras; prīṇanāya — for pleasing; mukundasya — of Mukunda, the Supreme Personality of Godhead; na vṛttam — not good conduct; na — not; bahu-jñatā — vast learning; na — neither; dānam — charity; na tapaḥ — no austerity; na — nor; ijyā — worship; na — nor; śaucam — cleanliness; na vratāni — nor execution of great vows; ca — also; prīyate — is satisfied; amalayā — by spotless; bhaktyā — devotional service; hariḥ — the Supreme Lord; anyat — other things; viḍambanam — only show.

Translation

My dear friends, O sons of the demons, you cannot please the Supreme Personality of Godhead by becoming perfect brāhmaṇas, demigods or great saints or by becoming perfectly good in etiquette or vast learning. None of these qualifications can awaken the pleasure of the Lord. Nor by charity, austerity, sacrifice, cleanliness or vows can one satisfy the Lord. The Lord is pleased only if one has unflinching, unalloyed devotion to Him. Without sincere devotional service, everything is simply a show.

ŚB 7.9.10

विप्राद् द्विषड्‌गुणयुतादरविन्दनाभ-

पादारविन्दविमुखात् श्वपचं वरिष्ठम् ।

मन्ये तदर्पितमनोवचनेहितार्थ-

प्राणं पुनाति स कुलं न तु भूरिमान: ॥ १० ॥

viprād dvi-ṣaḍ-guṇa-yutād aravinda-nābha-

pādāravinda-vimukhāt śvapacaṁ variṣṭham

manye tad-arpita-mano-vacanehitārtha-

prāṇaṁ punāti sa kulaṁ na tu bhūrimānaḥ

Synonyms

viprāt — than a brāhmaṇa; dvi-ṣaṭ-guṇa-yutāt — qualified with twelve brahminical qualities*; </a> aravinda-nābha — Lord Viṣṇu, who has a lotus growing from His navel; pāda-aravinda — to the lotus feet of the Lord; vimukhāt — not interested in devotional service; śva-pacam — one born in a low family, or a dog-eater; variṣṭham — more glorious; manye — I consider; tat-arpita — surrendered unto the lotus feet of the Lord; manaḥ — his mind; vacana — words; īhita — every endeavor; artha — wealth; prāṇam — and life; punāti — purifies; saḥ — he (the devotee); kulam — his family; na — not; tu — but; bhūrimānaḥ — one who falsely thinks himself to be in a prestigious position.

Translation

If a brāhmaṇa has all twelve of the brahminical qualifications [as they are stated in the book called Sanat-sujāta] but is not a devotee and is averse to the lotus feet of the Lord, he is certainly lower than a devotee who is a dog-eater but who has dedicated everything — mind, words, activities, wealth and life — to the Supreme Lord. Such a devotee is better than such a brāhmaṇa because the devotee can purify his whole family, whereas the so-called brāhmaṇa in a position of false prestige cannot purify even himself.

Purport by MGDAS

See also CC Ādi 7.93

ŚB 11.2.42

भक्ति: परेशानुभवो विरक्ति-रन्यत्र चैष त्रिक एककाल: ।

प्रपद्यमानस्य यथाश्न‍त: स्यु-स्तुष्टि: पुष्टि: क्षुदपायोऽनुघासम् ॥ ४२ ॥

bhaktiḥ pareśānubhavo viraktir

anyatra caiṣa trika eka-kālaḥ

prapadyamānasya yathāśnataḥ syus

tuṣṭiḥ puṣṭiḥ kṣud-apāyo ’nu-ghāsam

Synonyms

bhaktiḥ — devotion; para-īśa — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; anubhavaḥ — direct perception; viraktiḥ — detachment; anyatra — from everything else; ca — and; eṣaḥ — this; trikaḥ — group of three; eka-kālaḥ — simultaneously; prapadyamānasya — for one in the process of taking shelter of the Supreme Lord; yathā — in the same way as; aśnataḥ — for one engaged in eating; syuḥ — they occur; tuṣṭiḥ — satisfaction; puṣṭiḥ — nourishment; kṣut-apāyaḥ — eradication of hunger; anu-ghāsam — increasingly with each morsel.

Translation

Devotion, direct experience of the Supreme Lord, and detachment from other things — these three occur simultaneously for one who has taken shelter of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, in the same way that pleasure, nourishment and relief from hunger come simultaneously and increasingly, with each bite, for a person engaged in eating.

ŚB 11.3.21

तस्माद् गुरुं प्रपद्येत जिज्ञासु: श्रेय उत्तमम् ।

शाब्दे परे च निष्णातं ब्रह्मण्युपशमाश्रयम् ॥ २१ ॥

tasmād guruṁ prapadyeta

jijñāsuḥ śreya uttamam

śābde pare ca niṣṇātaṁ

brahmaṇy upaśamāśrayam

Synonyms

tasmāt — therefore; gurum — a spiritual master; prapadyeta — one should take shelter of; jijñāsuḥ — being inquisitive; śreyaḥ uttamam — about the highest good; śābde — in the Vedas; pare — in the Supreme; ca — and; niṣṇātam — perfectly knowledgeable; brahmaṇi — (in these two aspects) of the Absolute Truth; upaśama-āśrayam — fixed in detachment from material affairs.

Translation

Therefore any person who seriously desires real happiness must seek a bona fide spiritual master and take shelter of him by initiation. The qualification of the bona fide guru is that he has realized the conclusions of the scriptures by deliberation and is able to convince others of these conclusions. Such great personalities, who have taken shelter of the Supreme Godhead, leaving aside all material considerations, should be understood to be bona fide spiritual masters.

ŚB 11.3.30

परस्परानुकथनं पावनं भगवद्यश: ।

मिथो रतिर्मिथस्तुष्टिर्निवृत्तिर्मिथ आत्मन: ॥ ३० ॥

parasparānukathanaṁ

pāvanaṁ bhagavad-yaśaḥ

mitho ratir mithas tuṣṭir

nivṛttir mitha ātmanaḥ

Synonyms

paraspara — mutual; anukathanam — discussion; pāvanam — purifying; bhagavat — of the Supreme Lord; yaśaḥ — glories; mithaḥ — mutual; ratiḥ — loving attraction; mithaḥ — mutual; tuṣṭiḥ — satisfaction; nivṛttiḥ — cessation of material miseries; mithaḥ — mutual; ātmanaḥ — of the soul.

Translation

One should learn how to associate with the devotees of the Lord by gathering with them to chant the glories of the Lord. This process is most purifying. As devotees thus develop their loving friendship, they feel mutual happiness and satisfaction. And by thus encouraging one another they are able to give up material sense gratification, which is the cause of all suffering.

ŚB 11.3.31

स्मरन्त: स्मारयन्तश्च मिथोऽघौघहरं हरिम् ।

भक्त्या सञ्जातया भक्त्या बिभ्रत्युत्पुलकां तनुम् ॥ ३१ ॥

smarantaḥ smārayantaś ca

mitho ’ghaugha-haraṁ harim

bhaktyā sañjātayā bhaktyā

bibhraty utpulakāṁ tanum

Synonyms

smarantaḥ — remembering; smārayantaḥ ca — and reminding; mithaḥ — one another; agha-mitho ’ghaugha-haraṁ harim bhaktyā sañjātayā bhaktyā bibhraty utpulakāṁ tanum

Synonyms

smarantaḥ — remembering; smārayantaḥ ca — and reminding; mithaḥ — one another; agha-ogha-haram — who takes away everything inauspicious from the devotee; harim — the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhaktyā — by devotion; sañjātayā — awakened; bhaktyā — by devotion; bibhrati — possess; utpulakām — agitated by ecstasy; tanum — body.

Translation

Th-haram — who takes away everything inauspicious from the devotee; harim — the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhaktyā — by devotion; sañjātayā — awakened; bhaktyā — by devotion; bibhrati — possess; utpulakām — agitated by ecstasy; tanum — body.

Translation

The devotees of the Lord constantly discuss the glories of the Personality of Godhead among themselves. Thus they constantly remember the Lord and remind one another of His qualities and pastimes. In this way, by their devotion to the principles of bhakti-yoga, the devotees please the Personality of Godhead, who takes away from them everything inauspicious. Being purified of all impediments, the devotees awaken to pure love of Godhead, and thus, even within this world, their spiritualized bodies exhibit symptoms of transcendental ecstasy, such as standing of the bodily hairs on end.

ŚB 11.3.32

क्व‍‍चिद् रुदन्त्यच्युतचिन्तया क्व‍‍चि-

द्धसन्ति नन्दन्ति वदन्त्यलौकिका: ।

नृत्यन्ति गायन्त्यनुशीलयन्त्यजं

भवन्ति तूष्णीं परमेत्य निवृता: ॥ ३२ ॥

kvacid rudanty acyuta-cintayā kvacid

dhasanti nandanti vadanty alaukikāḥ

nṛtyanti gāyanty anuśīlayanty ajaṁ

bhavanti tūṣṇīṁ param etya nirvṛtāḥ

Synonyms

kvacit — sometimes; rudanti — they cry; acyuta — of the infallible Supreme Lord; cintayā — by the thought; kvacit — sometimes; hasanti — they laugh; nandanti — take great pleasure; vadanti — speak; alaukikāḥ — acting amazingly; nṛtyanti — they dance; gāyanti — sing; anuśīlayanti — and imitate; ajam — the unborn; bhavanti — they become; tūṣṇīm — silent; param — the Supreme; etya — obtaining; nirvṛtāḥ — freed from distress.

Translation

Having achieved love of Godhead, the devotees sometimes weep loudly, absorbed in thought of the infallible Lord. Sometimes they laugh, feel great pleasure, speak out loud to the Lord, dance or sing. Such devotees, having transcended material, conditioned life, sometimes imitate the unborn Supreme by acting out His pastimes. And sometimes, achieving His personal audience, they remain peaceful and silent.

ŚB 11.5.11

लोके व्यवायामिषमद्यसेवा

नित्या हि जन्तोर्न हि तत्र चोदना ।

व्यवस्थितिस्तेषु विवाहयज्ञ-

सुराग्रहैरासु निवृत्तिरिष्टा ॥ ११ ॥

loke vyavāyāmiṣa-madya-sevā

nityā hi jantor na hi tatra codanā

vyavasthitis teṣu vivāha-yajña

surā-grahair āsu nivṛttir iṣṭā

Synonyms

loke — in the material world; vyavāya — sex indulgence; āmiṣa — of meat; madya — and liquor; sevāḥ — the taking; nityāḥ — always found; hi — indeed; jantoḥ — in the conditioned living being; na — not; hi — indeed; tatra — in regard to them; codanā — any command of scripture; vyavasthitiḥ — the prescribed arrangement; teṣu — in these; vivāha — by sacred marriage; yajña — the offering of sacrifice; surā-grahaiḥ — and the acceptance of ritual cups of wine; āsu — of these; nivṛttiḥ — cessation; iṣṭā — is the desired end.

Translation

In this material world the conditioned soul is always inclined to sex, meat-eating and intoxication. Therefore religious scriptures never actually encourage such activities. Although the scriptural injunctions provide for sex through sacred marriage, for meat-eating through sacrificial offerings and for intoxication through the acceptance of ritual cups of wine, such ceremonies are meant for the ultimate purpose of renunciation.

Purport by MGD

See also Srimad Bhagavatam lecture on September 10th 1976, in Vṛndāvana, India: Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam 1.7.11

ŚB 11.5.41

देवर्षिभूताप्तनृणां पितृणां

न किङ्करो नायमृणी च राजन् ।

सर्वात्मना य: शरणं शरण्यं

गतो मुकुन्दं परिहृत्य कर्तम् ॥ ४१ ॥

devarṣi-bhūtāpta-nṛṇāṁ pitṝṇāṁ

na kiṅkaro nāyam ṛṇī ca rājan

sarvātmanā yaḥ śaraṇaṁ śaraṇyaṁ

gato mukundaṁ parihṛtya kartam

Synonyms

deva — of the demigods; ṛṣi — of the sages; bhūta — of ordinary living entities; āpta — of friends and relatives; nṛṇām — of ordinary men; pitṝṇām — of the forefathers; na — not; kiṅkaraḥ — the servant; na — nor; ayam — this one; ṛṇī — debtor; ca — also; rājan — O King; sarva-ātmanā — with his whole being; yaḥ — a person who; śaraṇam — shelter; śaraṇyam — the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who affords shelter to all; gataḥ — approached; mukundam — Mukunda; parihṛtya — giving up; kartam — duties.

Translation

O King, one who has given up all material duties and has taken full shelter of the lotus feet of Mukunda, who offers shelter to all, is not indebted to the demigods, great sages, ordinary living beings, relatives, friends, mankind or even one’s forefathers who have passed away. Since all such classes of living entities are part and parcel of the Supreme Lord, one who has surrendered to the Lord’s service has no need to serve such persons separately.

Purport by MGDas

This verse is also quoted in CC Madhya 22.144. And in the purport of the Bhagavad-Gita As It Is, second chapter, text 38, Srila Prabhupada gives another translation:

“Anyone who has completely surrendered unto Kṛṣṇa, Mukunda, giving up all other duties, is no longer a debtor, nor is he obliged to anyone – not the demigods, nor the sages, nor the people in general, nor kinsmen, nor humanity, nor forefathers.” See also Vaniquotes.

ŚB 11.5.42

स्वपादमूलं भजत: प्रियस्यत्यक्तान्यभावस्य हरि: परेश: ।

विकर्म यच्चोत्पतितं कथञ्चिद्धुनोति सर्वं हृदि सन्निविष्ट: ॥ ४२ ॥

sva-pāda-mūlam bhajataḥ priyasya

tyaktānya-bhāvasya hariḥ pareśaḥ

vikarma yac cotpatitaṁ kathañcid

dhunoti sarvaṁ hṛdi sanniviṣṭaḥ

Synonyms

sva-pāda-mūlam — the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa, the shelter of the devotees; bhajataḥ — who is engaged in worshiping; priyasya — who is very dear to Kṛṣṇa; tyakta — given up; anya — for others; bhāvasya — of one whose disposition or inclination; hariḥ — the Supreme Personality of Godhead; para-īśaḥ — the Supreme Lord; vikarma — sinful activities; yat — whatever; ca — and; utpatitam — occurred; kathañcit — somehow; dhunoti — removes; sarvam — all; hṛdi — in the heart; sanniviṣṭaḥ — entered.

Translation

One who has thus given up all other engagements and has taken full shelter at the lotus feet of Hari, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is very dear to the Lord. Indeed, if such a surrendered soul accidentally commits some sinful activity, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is seated within everyone’s heart, immediately takes away the reaction to such sin.

ŚB 11.8.10

अणुभ्यश्च महद्भ्यश्च शास्त्रेभ्य: कुशलो नर: ।

सर्वत: सारमादद्यात् पुष्पेभ्य इव षट्पद: ॥ १० ॥

aṇubhyaś ca mahadbhyaś ca

śāstrebhyaḥ kuśalo naraḥ

sarvataḥ sāram ādadyāt

puṣpebhya iva ṣaṭpadaḥ

Synonyms

aṇubhyaḥ — from the smallest; ca — and; mahadbhyaḥ — from the greatest; ca — also; śāstrebhyaḥ — from religious scriptures; kuśalaḥ — intelligent; naraḥ — a man; sarvataḥ — from all; sāram — the essence; ādadyāt — should take; puṣpebhyaḥ — from the flowers; iva — like; ṣaṭpadaḥ — the honeybee.

Translation

Just as the honeybee takes nectar from all flowers, big and small, an intelligent human being should take the essence from all religious scriptures.

SB 11.14.23

kathaṁ vinā roma-harṣaṁ

dravatā cetasā vinā

vinānandāśru-kalayā

śudhyed bhaktyā vināśayaḥ

SYNONYMS

katham — how; vinā — without; roma-harṣam — standing of the hairs on end; dravatā — melted; cetasā — heart; vinā — without; vinā — without; ānanda — of bliss; aśru-kalayā — the flowing of tears; śudhyet — can be purified; bhaktyā — loving service; vinā — without; āśayaḥ — the consciousness.

TRANSLATION

If one’s hairs do not stand on end, how can the heart melt? And if the heart does not melt, how can tears of love flow from the eyes? If one does not cry in spiritual happiness, how can one render loving service to the Lord? And without such service, how can the consciousness be purified?

PURPORT

Loving service to the Lord is the only process that can completely purify one’s consciousness; such service produces waves of ecstatic love that completely cleanse the soul. As mentioned earlier by Lord Kṛṣṇa to Śrī Uddhava, other processes such as self-control, pious activities, mystic yoga, penances, etc., certainly purify the mind, as stated in many authorized literatures. Such processes, however, do not completely remove the desire to perform forbidden activities. But pure devotional service rendered in love of Godhead is so powerful that it burns to ashes any obstacle encountered on the path of progress. The Lord has stated in this chapter that loving service to Him is a blazing fire that burns to ashes all impediments. In contrast, the small fires of mental speculation or mystic yoga can be extinguished by sinful desires at any moment. Thus, by hearing Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam one should ignite the blazing fire of loving service to the Lord and burn to ashes the network of material illusion.

ŚB 11.17.27

आचार्यं मां विजानीयान्नावमन्येत कर्हिचित् ।

न मर्त्यबुद्ध्यासूयेत सर्वदेवमयो गुरु: ॥ २७ ॥

ācāryaṁ māṁ vijānīyān

navamanyeta karhicit

na martya-buddhyāsūyeta

sarva-deva-mayo guruḥ

Synonyms

ācāryam — the spiritual master; mām — Myself; vijānīyāt — one should know; na avamanyeta — one should never disrespect; karhicit — at any time; na — never; martya-buddhyā — with the idea of his being an ordinary man; asūyeta — one should be envious; sarva-deva — of all demigods; mayaḥ — representative; guruḥ — the spiritual master.

Translation

One should know the ācārya as Myself and never disrespect him in any way. One should not envy him, thinking him an ordinary man, for he is the representative of all the demigods.

ŚB 11.19.21

mad-bhakta-pūjābhyadhikā

Synonyms

mat — My; bhakta — of the devotees; pūjā — worship; abhyadhikā — preeminent;

Translation

[O sinless Uddhava, one can achieve loving service unto Me by] performing first-class worship of My devotees.

ŚB 11.20.9

तावत् कर्माणि कुर्वीत न निर्विद्येत यावता ।

मत्कथाश्रवणादौ वा श्रद्धा यावन्न जायते ॥ ९ ॥

tāvat karmāṇi kurvītana

nirvidyeta yāvatā

mat-kathā-śravaṇādau vā

śraddhā yāvan na jāyate

Synonyms

tāvat — up to that time; karmāṇi — fruitive activities; kurvīta — one should execute; na nirvidyeta — is not satiated; yāvatā — as long as; mat-kathā — of discourses about Me; śravaṇa-ādau — in the matter of śravaṇam, kīrtanam and so on; vā — or; śraddhā — faith; yāvat — as long as; na — not; jāyate — is awakened.

Translation

As long as one is not satiated by fruitive activity and has not awakened his taste for devotional service by śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ, one has to act according to the regulative principles of the Vedic injunctions.

ŚB 11.21.36

शब्दब्रह्म सुदुर्बोधं प्राणेन्द्रियमनोमयम् ।

अनन्तपारं गम्भीरं दुर्विगाह्यं समुद्रवत् ॥ ३६ ॥

śabda-brahma su-durbodhaṁ

prāṇendriya-mano-mayam

ananta-pāraṁ gambhīraṁ

durvigāhyaṁ samudra-vat

Synonyms

śabda-brahma — the transcendental sound of the Vedas; su-durbodham — extremely difficult to comprehend; prāṇa — of the vital air; indriya — senses; manaḥ — and mind; mayam — manifesting on the different levels; ananta-pāram — without limit; gambhīram — deep; durvigāhyam — unfathomable; samudra-vat — like the ocean.

Translation

The transcendental sound of the Vedas is very difficult to comprehend and manifests on different levels within the prāṇa, senses and mind. This Vedic sound is unlimited, very deep and unfathomable, just like the ocean.

Purport

[...] The prāṇa phase of Vedic sound, known as parā, is situated in the ādhāra-cakra; the mental phase, known as paśyantī, is situated in the area of the navel, on the maṇipūraka-cakra; the intellectual phase, known as madhyamā, is situated in the heart area, in the anāhata-cakra. Finally, the manifest sensory phase of Vedic sound is called vaikharī. [...]

ŚB 11.21.41

गायत्र्युष्णिगनुष्टुप् च बृहती पङ्‌क्तिरेव च ।

त्रिष्टुब्जगत्यतिच्छन्दो ह्यत्यष्‍ट्यतिजगद् विराट् ॥ ४१ ॥

gāyatry uṣṇig anuṣṭup ca

bṛhatī paṅktir eva ca

triṣṭub jagaty aticchando

hy atyaṣṭy-atijagad-virāṭ

Synonyms

gāyatrī uṣṇik anuṣṭup ca — known as Gāyatrī, Uṣṇik and Anuṣṭup; bṛhatī paṅktiḥ — Bṛhatī and Paṅkti; eva ca — also; triṣṭup jagatī aticchandaḥ — Triṣṭup, Jagatī and Aticchanda; hi — indeed; atyaṣṭi-atijagat-virāṭ — Atyaṣṭi, Atijagatī and Ativirāṭ.

Translation

The Vedic meters are Gāyatrī, Uṣṇik, Anuṣṭup, Bṛhatī, Paṅkti, Triṣṭup, Jagatī, Aticchanda, Atyaṣṭi, Atijagatī and Ativirāṭ.

ŚB 11.25.2-5

शमो दमस्तितिक्षेक्षा तप: सत्यं दया स्मृति: ।

तुष्टिस्त्यागोऽस्पृहा श्रद्धा ह्रीर्दयादि: स्वनिर्वृति: ॥ २ ॥

काम ईहा मदस्तृष्णा स्तम्भ आशीर्भिदा सुखम् ।

मदोत्साहो यश:प्रीतिर्हास्यं वीर्यं बलोद्यम: ॥ ३ ॥

क्रोधो लोभोऽनृतं हिंसा याच्ञा दम्भ: क्लम: कलि: ।

शोकमोहौ विषादार्ती निद्राशा भीरनुद्यम: ॥ ४ ॥

सत्त्वस्य रजसश्चैतास्तमसश्चानुपूर्वश: ।

वृत्तयो वर्णितप्राया: सन्निपातमथो श‍ृणु ॥ ५ ॥

śamo damas titikṣekṣā

tapaḥ satyaṁ dayā smṛtiḥ

tuṣṭis tyāgo ’spṛhā śraddhā

hrīr dayādiḥ sva-nirvṛtiḥ

kāma īhā madas tṛṣṇā

stambha āśīr bhidā sukham

madotsāho yaśaḥ-prītir

hāsyaṁ vīryaṁ balodyamaḥ

krodho lobho ’nṛtaṁ hiṁsā

yācñā dambhaḥ klamaḥ kaliḥ

śoka-mohau viṣādārtī

nidrāśā bhīr anudyamaḥ

sattvasya rajasaś caitās

tamasaś cānupūrvaśaḥ

vṛttayo varṇita-prāyāḥ

sannipātam atho śṛṇu

Synonyms

śamaḥ — mind control; damaḥ — sense control; titikṣā — tolerance; īkṣā — discrimination; tapaḥ — strictly following one’s prescribed duty; satyam — truthfulness; dayā — mercy; smṛtiḥ — observation of the past and future; tuṣṭiḥ — satisfaction; tyāgaḥ — generosity; aspṛhā — detachment from sense gratification; śraddhā — faith (in the guru and other bona fide authorities); hrīḥ — shame (due to improper activities); dayā-ādiḥ — charity, simplicity, humility and so on; sva-nirvṛtiḥ — taking one’s pleasure from within; kāmaḥ — material desire; īhā — endeavor; madaḥ — audacity; tṛṣṇā — dissatisfaction even in gain; stambhaḥ — false pride; āśīḥ — praying to the demigods and other deities with desire for material gain; bhidā — separatist mentality; sukham — sense gratification; mada-utsāhaḥ — courage based on intoxication; yaśaḥ-prītiḥ — being fond of praise; hāsyam — indulging in ridicule; vīryam — advertising one’s power; bala-udyamaḥ — acting on the sanction of one’s own strength; krodhaḥ — intolerant anger; lobhaḥ — stinginess; anṛtam — false speech (speaking what is not stated in scripture as if it were evidence); hiṁsā — enmity; yācñā — begging; dambhaḥ — hypocrisy; klamaḥ — fatigue; kaliḥ — quarrel; śoka-mohau — lamentation and delusion; viṣāda-ārtī — unhappiness and false humility; nidrā — sloth; āśā — false expectations; bhīḥ — fear; anudyamaḥ — lack of endeavor; sattvasya — of the mode of goodness; rajasaḥ — of the mode of passion; ca — and; etāḥ — these; tamasaḥ — of the mode of ignorance; ca — and; ānupūrvaśaḥ — one after another; vṛttayaḥ — the functions; varṇita — have been described; prāyāḥ — for the most part; sannipātam — the combination of these; atho — now; śṛṇu — please hear.

Translation

Mind and sense control, tolerance, discrimination, sticking to one’s prescribed duty, truthfulness, mercy, careful study of the past and future, satisfaction in any condition, generosity, renunciation of sense gratification, faith in the spiritual master, being embarrassed at improper action, charity, simplicity, humbleness and satisfaction within oneself are qualities of the mode of goodness. Material desire, great endeavor, audacity, dissatisfaction even in gain, false pride, praying for material advancement, considering oneself different and better than others, sense gratification, rash eagerness to fight, a fondness for hearing oneself praised, the tendency to ridicule others, advertising one’s own prowess and justifying one’s actions by one’s strength are qualities of the mode of passion. Intolerant anger, stinginess, speaking without scriptural authority, violent hatred, living as a parasite, hypocrisy, chronic fatigue, quarrel, lamentation, delusion, unhappiness, depression, sleeping too much, false expectations, fear and laziness constitute the major qualities of the mode of ignorance. Now please hear about the combination of these three modes.

ŚB 11.27.21

तदद्भ‍िर्देवयजनं द्रव्याण्यात्मानमेव च ।

प्रोक्ष्य पात्राणि त्रीण्यद्भ‍िस्तैस्तैर्द्रव्यैश्च साधयेत् ॥ २१ ॥

tad-adbhir deva-yajanaṁ

dravyāṇy ātmānam eva ca

prokṣya pātrāṇi trīṇy adbhis

tais tair dravyaiś ca sādhayet

Synonyms

tat — of the vessel for sprinkling; adbhiḥ — with the water; deva-yajanam — the place where the Deity is worshiped; dravyāṇi — the paraphernalia; ātmānam — one’s own body; eva — indeed; ca — also; prokṣya — sprinkling; pātrāṇi — the vessels; trīṇi — three; adbhiḥ — with water; taiḥ taiḥ — with those available; dravyaiḥ — auspicious items; ca — and; sādhayet — he should arrange.

Translation

Then, with the water of that prokṣaṇīya vessel he should sprinkle the area where the Deity is being worshiped, the offerings that are going to be presented, and his own body. Next he should decorate with various auspicious substances three vessels filled with water.

Purport

Śrīla Śrīdhara Svāmī gives references from Vedic literature stating that the water meant for bathing the feet should be combined with millet seeds, dūrvā grass mixed in water, viṣṇukrānta flowers and other items. The water used for arghya should include the following eight items: fragrant oil, flowers, unbroken barleycorns, husked barleycorns, the tips of kuśa grass, sesame seeds, mustard seeds and dūrvā grass. The water for sipping [acamana] should include jasmine flowers, ground cloves and kakkola berries.

ŚB 11.28.2

परस्वभावकर्माणि य: प्रशंसति निन्दति ।

स आशु भ्रश्यते स्वार्थादसत्यभिनिवेशत: ॥ २ ॥

para-svabhāva-karmāṇi

yaḥ praśaṁsati nindati

sa āśu bhraśyate svārthād

asaty abhiniveśataḥ

Synonyms

para — another’s; svabhāva — personality; karmāṇi — and work; yaḥ — who; praśaṁsati — praises; nindati — criticizes; saḥ — he; āśu — quickly; bhraśyate — falls down; sva-arthāt — from his own interest; asati — in unreality; abhiniveśataḥ — because of becoming entangled.

Translation

Whoever indulges in praising or criticizing the qualities and behavior of others will quickly become deviated from his own best interest by his entanglement in illusory dualities.

ŚB 11.29.30

नैतत्त्वया दाम्भिकाय नास्तिकाय शठाय च ।

अशुश्रूषोरभक्ताय दुर्विनीताय दीयताम् ॥ ३० ॥

naitat tvayā dāmbhikāya

nāstikāya śaṭhāya ca

aśuśrūṣor abhaktāya

durvinītāya dīyatām

Synonyms

na — not; etat — this; tvayā — by you; dāmbhikāya — to a hypocrite; nāstikāya — to an atheist; śaṭhāya — to a cheat; ca — and; aśuśrūṣoḥ — to one who does not listen with faith; abhaktāya — to a nondevotee; durvinītāya — to one who is not humbly submissive; dīyatām — should be given.

Translation

You should not share this instruction with anyone who is hypocritical, atheistic or dishonest, or with anyone who will not listen faithfully, who is not a devotee, or who is simply not humble.

ŚB 11.29.31

एतैर्दोषैर्विहीनाय ब्रह्मण्याय प्रियाय च ।

साधवे शुचये ब्रूयाद् भक्ति: स्याच्छूद्रयोषिताम् ॥ ३१ ॥

etair doṣair vihīnāya

brahmaṇyāya priyāya ca

sādhave śucaye brūyād

bhaktiḥ syāc chūdra-yoṣitām

Synonyms

etaiḥ — of these; doṣaiḥ — faulty qualities; vihīnāya — to the person who is devoid; brahmaṇyāya — to one dedicated to the welfare of the brāhmaṇas; priyāya — kindly disposed; ca — and; sādhave — saintly; śucaye — pure; brūyāt — one should speak; bhaktiḥ — devotion; syāt — if it is present; śūdra — of the common workers; yoṣitām — and women.

Translation

This knowledge should be taught to one who is free from these bad qualities, who is dedicated to the welfare of the brāhmaṇas, and who is kindly disposed, saintly and pure. And if common workers and women are found to have devotion for the Supreme Lord, they are also to be accepted as qualified hearers.

ŚB 12.3.30

यदा मायानृतं तन्द्रा निद्रा हिंसा विषादनम् ।

शोकमोहौ भयं दैन्यं स कलिस्तामस: स्मृत: ॥ ३० ॥

yadā māyānṛtaṁ tandrā

nidrā hiṁsā viṣādanam

śoka-mohau bhayaṁ dainyaṁ

sa kalis tāmasaḥ smṛtaḥ

Synonyms

yadā — when; māyā — deceit; anṛtam — false speech; tandrā — sloth; nidrā — sleep and intoxication; hiṁsā — violence; viṣādanam — depression; śoka — lamentation; mohau — and delusion; bhayam — fear; dainyam — poverty; saḥ — that; kaliḥ — the Age of Kali; tāmasaḥ — in the mode of ignorance; smṛtaḥ — is considered.

Translation

When there is a predominance of cheating, lying, sloth, sleepiness, violence, depression, lamentation, bewilderment, fear and poverty, that age is Kali, the age of the mode of ignorance.

ŚB 12.3.51

kaler doṣa-nidhe rājan

asti hy eko mahān guṇaḥ

kīrtanād eva kṛṣṇasya

mukta-saṅgaḥ paraṁ vrajet

Synonyms

kaleḥ — of the Age of Kali; doṣa-nidheḥ — in the ocean of faults; rājan — O King; asti — there is; hi — certainly; ekaḥ — one; mahān — very great; guṇaḥ — good quality; kīrtanāt — by chanting; eva — certainly; kṛṣṇasya — of the holy name of Kṛṣṇa; mukta-saṅgaḥ — liberated from material bondage; param — to the transcendental spiritual kingdom; vrajet — one can go.

Translation

My dear King, although Kali-yuga is an ocean of faults, there is still one good quality about this age: Simply by chanting the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra, one can become free from material bondage and be promoted to the transcendental kingdom.

ŚB 12.3.52

कृते यद्ध्यायतो विष्णुं त्रेतायां यजतो मखै: ।

द्वापरे परिचर्यायां कलौ तद्धरिकीर्तनात् ॥ ५२ ॥

kṛte yad dhyāyato viṣṇuṁ

tretāyāṁ yajato makhaiḥ

dvāpare paricaryāyāṁ

kalau tad dhari-kīrtanāt

Synonyms

kṛte — in the Satya-yuga; yat — which; dhyāyataḥ — from meditation; viṣṇum — on Lord Viṣṇu; tretāyām — in the Tretā-yuga; yajataḥ — from worshiping; makhaiḥ — by performing sacrifices; dvāpare — in the age of Dvāpara; paricaryāyām — by worshiping the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa; kalau — in the Age of Kali; tat — that same result (can be achieved); hari-kīrtanāt — simply by chanting the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra.

Translation

Whatever result was obtained in Satya-yuga by meditating on Viṣṇu, in Tretā-yuga by performing sacrifices, and in Dvāpara-yuga by serving the Lord’s lotus feet can be obtained in Kali-yuga simply by chanting the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra.

ŚB 12.13.15

सर्ववेदान्तसारं हि श्रीभागवतमिष्यते ।

तद्रसामृततृप्तस्य नान्यत्र स्याद्रति: क्‍वचित् ॥ १५ ॥

sarva-vedānta-sāraṁ hi

śrī-bhāgavatam iṣyate

tad-rasāmṛta-tṛptasya

nānyatra syād ratiḥ kvacit

Synonyms

sarva-vedānta — of all Vedānta philosophy; sāram — the essence; hi — indeed; śrī-bhāgavatam — Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam; iṣyate — is said to be; tat — of it; rasa-amṛta — by the nectarean taste; tṛptasya — for one who is satisfied; na — not; anyatra — elsewhere; syāt — there is; ratiḥ — attraction; kvacit — ever.

Translation

Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam is declared to be the essence of all Vedānta philosophy. One who has felt satisfaction from its nectarean mellow will never be attracted to any other literature.

ŚB 12.13.16

nimna-gānāṁ yatha gaṅgā

devānām acyuto yathā

vaiṣṇavānāṁ yathā śambhuḥ

purāṇānām idam tathā

Synonyms

nimna-gānām — of rivers flowing down to the sea; yathā — as; gaṅgā — the Ganges; devānām — of all deities; acyutaḥ — the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead; yathā — as; vaiṣṇavānām — of devotees of Lord Viṣṇu; yathā — as; śambhuḥ — Śiva; purāṇānām — of Purāṇas; idam — this; tathā — similarly.

Translation

Just as the Gaṅgā is the greatest of all rivers, Lord Acyuta the supreme among deities and Lord Śambhu [Śiva] the greatest of Vaiṣṇavas, so Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam is the greatest of all Purāṇas.

ŚB 12.13.18

श्रीमद्भ‍ागवतं पुराणममलं यद्वैष्णवानां प्रियं

यस्मिन् पारमहंस्यमेकममलं ज्ञानं परं गीयते ।

तत्र ज्ञानविरागभक्तिसहितं नैष्कर्म्यमाविष्कृतं

तच्छृण्वन् सुपठन् विचारणपरो भक्त्या विमुच्येन्नर: ॥ १८ ॥

śrīmad-bhāgavataṁ purāṇam amalaṁ yad vaiṣṇavānāṁ priyaṁ

yasmin pāramahaṁsyam ekam amalaṁ jñānaṁ paraṁ gīyate

tatra jñāna-virāga-bhakti-sahitaṁ naiṣkarmyam āviskṛtaṁ

tac chṛṇvan su-paṭhan vicāraṇa-paro bhaktyā vimucyen naraḥ

Synonyms

śrīmat-bhāgavatam — Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam; purāṇam — the Purāṇa; amalam — perfectly pure; yat — which; vaiṣṇavānām — to the Vaiṣṇavas; priyam — most dear; yasmin — in which; pāramahaṁsyam — attainable by the topmost devotees; ekam — exclusive; amalam — perfectly pure; jñānam — knowledge; param — supreme; gīyate — is sung; tatra — there; jñāna-virāga-bhakti-sahitam — together with knowledge, renunciation and devotion; naiṣkarmyam — freedom from all material work; āviṣkṛtam — is revealed; tat — that; śṛṇvan — hearing; su-paṭhan — properly chanting; vicāraṇa-paraḥ — who is serious about understanding; bhaktyā — with devotion; vimucyet — becomes totally liberated; naraḥ — a person.

Translation

Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam is the spotless Purāṇa. It is most dear to the Vaiṣṇavas because it describes the pure and supreme knowledge of the paramahaṁsas. This Bhāgavatam reveals the means for becoming free from all material work, together with the processes of transcendental knowledge, renunciation and devotion. Anyone who seriously tries to understand Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, who properly hears and chants it with devotion, becomes completely liberated.

ŚB 12.13.19

कस्मै येन विभासितोऽयमतुलो ज्ञानप्रदीप: पुरा

तद्रूपेण च नारदाय मुनये कृष्णाय तद्रूपिणा ।

योगीन्द्राय तदात्मनाथ भगवद्राताय कारुण्यत-

स्तच्छुद्धं विमलं विशोकममृतं सत्यं परं धीमहि ॥ १९ ॥

kasmai yena vibhāsito ’yam atulo jñāna-pradīpaḥ purā

tad-rūpeṇa ca nāradāya munaye kṛṣṇāya tad-rūpiṇā

yogīndrāya tad-ātmanātha bhagavad-rātāya kāruṇyatas

tac chuddhaṁ vimalaṁ viśokam amṛtaṁ satyaṁ paraṁ dhīmahi

Synonyms

kasmai — unto Brahmā; yena — by whom; vibhāsitaḥ — thoroughly revealed; ayam — this; atulaḥ — incomparable; jñāna — of transcendental knowledge; pradīpaḥ — the torchlight; purā — long ago; tat-rūpeṇa — in the form of Brahmā; ca — and; nāradāya — to Nārada; munaye — the great sage; kṛṣṇāya — to Kṛṣṇa-dvaipāyana Vyāsa; tat-rūpiṇā — in the form of Nārada; yogi-indrāya — to the best of yogīs, Śukadeva; tat-ātmanā — as Nārada; atha — then; bhagavat-rātāya — to Parīkṣit Mahārāja; kāruṇyataḥ — out of mercy; tat — that; śuddham — pure; vimalam — uncontaminated; viśokam — free from misery; amṛtam — immortal; satyam — upon the truth; param — supreme; dhīmahi — I meditate.

Translation

I meditate upon that pure and spotless Supreme Absolute Truth, who is free from suffering and death and who in the beginning personally revealed this incomparable torchlight of knowledge to Brahmā. Brahmā then spoke it to the sage Nārada, who narrated it to Kṛṣṇa-dvaipāyana Vyāsa. Śrīla Vyāsa revealed this Bhāgavatam to the greatest of sages, Śukadeva Gosvāmī, and Śukadeva mercifully spoke it to Mahārāja Parīkṣit.

CC Adi 1.2

vande śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya-

nityānandau sahoditau

gauḍodaye puṣpavantau

citrau śan-dau tamo-nudau

SYNONYMS

vande—I offer respectful obeisances; śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya—to Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya; nityānandau—and to Lord Nityānanda; saha-uditau—simultaneously arisen; gauḍa-udaye—on the eastern horizon of Gauḍa; puṣpavantau—the sun and moon together; citrau—wonderful; śam-dau—bestowing benediction; tamaḥ-nudau—dissipating darkness.

TRANSLATION

I offer my respectful obeisances unto Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya and Lord Nityānanda, who are like the sun and moon. They have arisen simultaneously on the horizon of Gauḍa to dissipate the darkness of ignorance and thus wonderfully bestow benediction upon all.

This is considered the paribhava sutra of the Sri Caitanya Caritamrta

CC Ādi 1.4

অনর্পিতচরীং চিরাৎ করুণয়াবতীর্ণঃ কলৌ

সমর্পয়িতুমুন্নতোজ্জ্বলরসাং স্বভক্তিশ্রিয়ম্‌ ।

হরিঃ পুরটসুন্দরদ্যুতিকদম্বসন্দীপিতঃ

সদা হৃদয়কন্দরে স্ফুরতু বঃ শচীনন্দনঃ ॥ ৪ ॥

anarpita-carīṁ cirāt karuṇayāvatīrṇaḥ kalau

samarpayitum unnatojjvala-rasāṁ sva-bhakti-śriyam

hariḥ puraṭa-sundara-dyuti-kadamba-sandīpitaḥ

sadā hṛdaya-kandare sphuratu vaḥ śacī-nandanaḥ

Synonyms

anarpita — not bestowed; carīm — having been formerly; cirāt — for a long time; karuṇayā — by causeless mercy; avatīrṇaḥ — descended; kalau — in the Age of Kali; samarpayitum — to bestow; unnata — elevated; ujjvala-rasām — the conjugal mellow; sva-bhakti — of His own service; śriyam — the treasure; hariḥ — the Supreme Lord; puraṭa — than gold; sundara — more beautiful; dyuti — of splendor; kadamba — with a multitude; sandīpitaḥ — lighted up; sadā — always; hṛdaya-kandare — in the cavity of the heart; sphuratu — let Him be manifest; vaḥ — your; śacī-nandanaḥ — the son of mother Śacī.

Translation

May the Supreme Lord who is known as the son of Śrīmatī Śacī-devī be transcendentally situated in the innermost chambers of your heart. Resplendent with the radiance of molten gold, He has appeared in the Age of Kali by His causeless mercy to bestow what no incarnation has ever offered before: the most sublime and radiant mellow of devotional service, the mellow of conjugal love.

CC Ādi 1.45

গুরু কৃষ্ণরূপ হন শাস্ত্রের প্রমাণে ।

গুরুরূপে কৃষ্ণ কৃপা করেন ভক্তগণে ॥ ৪৫ ॥

guru kṛṣṇa-rūpa hana śāstrera pramāṇe

guru-rūpe kṛṣṇa kṛpā karena bhakta-gaṇe

Synonyms

guru — the spiritual master; kṛṣṇa-rūpa — as good as Kṛṣṇa; hana — is; śāstrera — of revealed scriptures; pramāṇe — by the evidence; guru-rūpe — in the form of the spiritual master; kṛṣṇa — Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa; kṛpā — mercy; karena — distributes; bhakta-gaṇe — unto His devotees.

Translation

According to the deliberate opinion of all revealed scriptures, the spiritual master is nondifferent from Kṛṣṇa. Lord Kṛṣṇa in the form of the spiritual master delivers His devotees.

CC Ādi 1.62

সাধবো হৃদয়ং মহ্যং সাধূনাং হৃদয়ন্ত্বহম্‌ ।

মদন্যত্তে ন জানন্তি নাহং তেভ্যো মনাগপি ॥ ৬২ ॥

sādhavo hṛdayaṁ mahyaṁ

sādhūnāṁ hṛdayaṁ tv aham

mad-anyat te na jānanti

nāhaṁ tebhyo manāg api

Synonyms

sādhavaḥ — the saints; hṛdayam — heart; mahyam — My; sādhūnām — of the saints; hṛdayam — the heart; tu — indeed; aham — I; mat — than Me; anyat — other; te — they; na — not; jānanti — know; na — nor; aham — I; tebhyaḥ — than them; manāk — slightly; api — even.

Translation

“Saints are My heart, and only I am their hearts. They do not know anyone but Me, and therefore I do not recognize anyone besides them as Mine.”

Purport

This verse appears in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (9.4.68) in connection with a misunderstanding between Durvāsā Muni and Mahārāja Ambarīṣa. [...]

CC Ādi 1.106

“মিতঞ্চ সারঞ্চ বচো হি বাগ্মিতা” ইতি ॥ ১০৬ ॥

“mitaṁ ca sāraṁ ca vaco hi vāgmitā” iti

Synonyms

mitam — concise; ca — and; sāram — essential; ca — and; vacaḥ — speech; hi — certainly; vāgmitā — eloquence; iti — thus.

Translation

“Essential truth spoken concisely is true eloquence.”

CC Ādi 2.11

বদন্তি তত্তত্ত্ববিদস্তত্ত্বং যজ্‌জ্ঞানমদ্বয়ম্‌ ।

ব্রহ্মেতি পরমাত্মেতি ভগবানিতি শব্দ্যতে ॥ ১১ ॥

vadanti tat tattva-vidas

tattvaṁ yaj jñānam advayam

brahmeti paramātmeti

bhagavān iti śabdyate

Synonyms

vadanti — they say; tat — that; tattva-vidaḥ — learned souls; tattvam — the Absolute Truth; yat — which; jñānam — knowledge; advayam — nondual; brahma — Brahman; iti — thus; paramātmā — Paramātmā; iti — thus; bhagavān — Bhagavān; iti — thus; śabdyate — is known.

Translation

“Learned transcendentalists who know the Absolute Truth say that it is nondual knowledge and is called impersonal Brahman, the localized Paramātmā and the Personality of Godhead.”

CC Ādi 2.59

এই শ্লোক তত্ত্ব–লক্ষণ ভাগবত–সার ।

পরিভাষা–রূপে ইহার সর্বত্রাধিকার ॥ ৫৯ ॥

ei śloka tattva-lakṣaṇa bhāgavata-sāra

paribhāṣā-rūpe ihāra sarvatrādhikāra

Synonyms

ei — this; śloka — verse; tattva — the truth; lakṣaṇa — indicating; bhāgavata — of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam; sāra — the essence; paribhāṣā — of synonyms; rūpe — in the form; ihāra — of this (Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam); sarvatra — everywhere; adhikāra — jurisdiction.

Translation

The truth indicated in this verse [text 30] is the essence of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. This conclusion, through synonyms, applies everywhere.

CC Ādi 2.86

ভ্রম, প্রমাদ, বিপ্রলিপ্সা, করণাপাটব ।

আর্য–বিজ্ঞবাক্যে নাহি দোষ এই সব ॥ ৮৬ ॥

bhrama, pramāda, vipralipsā, karaṇāpāṭava

ārṣa-vijña-vākye nāhi doṣa ei saba

Synonyms

bhrama — mistakes; pramāda — illusion; vipralipsā — cheating; karaṇa-apāṭava — imperfectness of the senses; ārṣa — of the authoritative sages; vijña-vākye — in the wise speech; nāhi — not; doṣa — faults; ei — these; saba — all.

Translation

“Mistakes, illusions, cheating and defective perception do not occur in the sayings of the authoritative sages.

CC Ādi 2.91-92

অত্র সর্গো বিসর্গশ্চ স্থানং পোষণমূতয়ঃ ।

মন্বন্তরেশানুকথা নিরোধো মুক্তিরাশ্রয়ঃ ॥ ৯১ ॥

দশমস্য বিশুদ্ধ্যর্থং নবানামিহ লক্ষণম্‌ ।

বর্ণয়ন্তি মহাত্মানঃ শ্রুতোনার্থেন চাঞ্জসা ॥ ৯২ ॥

atra sargo visargaś ca

sthānaṁ poṣaṇam ūtayaḥ

manvantareśānukathā

nirodho muktir āśrayaḥ

daśamasya viśuddhy-arthaṁ

navānām iha lakṣaṇam

varṇayanti mahātmānaḥ

śrutenārthena cāñjasā

Synonyms

atra — in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam; sargaḥ — the creation of the ingredients of the universe; visargaḥ — the creations of Brahmā; ca — and; sthānam — the maintenance of the creation; poṣaṇam — the favoring of the Lord’s devotees; ūtayaḥ — impetuses for activity; manu-antara — prescribed duties given by the Manus; īśa-anukathāḥ — a description of the incarnations of the Lord; nirodhaḥ — the winding up of creation; muktiḥ — liberation; āśrayaḥ — the ultimate shelter, the Supreme Personality of Godhead; daśamasya — of the tenth (the āśraya); viśuddhi-artham — for the purpose of perfect knowledge; navānām — of the nine; iha — here; lakṣaṇam — the nature; varṇayanti — describe; mahā-ātmānaḥ — the great souls; śrutena — by prayer; arthena — by explanation; ca — and; añjasā — direct.

Translation

“ ‘Here [in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam] ten subjects are described: (1) the creation of the ingredients of the cosmos, (2) the creations of Brahmā, (3) the maintenance of the creation, (4) special favor given to the faithful, (5) impetuses for activity, (6) prescribed duties for law-abiding men, (7) a description of the incarnations of the Lord, (8) the winding up of the creation, (9) liberation from gross and subtle material existence, and (10) the ultimate shelter, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The tenth item is the shelter of all the others. To distinguish this ultimate shelter from the other nine subjects, the mahājanas have described these nine, directly or indirectly, through prayers or direct explanations.’

Purport by MGD

CC Ādi 2.117

সিদ্ধান্ত বলিয়া চিত্তে না কর অলস ।

ইহা হইতে কৃষ্ণে লাগে সুদৃঢ় মানস ॥ ১১৭ ॥

siddhānta baliyā citte nā kara alasa

ihā ha-ite kṛṣṇe lāge sudṛḍha mānasa

Synonyms

siddhānta — conclusion; baliyā — considering; citte — in the mind; nā kara — do not be; alasa — lazy; ihā — this; ha-ite — from; kṛṣṇe — in Lord Kṛṣṇa; lāge — becomes fixed; su-dṛḍha — very firm; mānasa — the mind.

Translation

A sincere student should not neglect the discussion of such conclusions, considering them controversial, for such discussions strengthen the mind. Thus one’s mind becomes attached to Śrī Kṛṣṇa.

CC Ādi 3.89

উল্লংঘিতত্রিবিধসীমসমাতিশায়ি–

সম্ভাবনং তব পরিব্রঢ়িমস্বভাবম্‌ ।

মায়াবলেন ভবতাপি নিগুহ্যমানং

পশ্যন্তি কেচিদনিশং ত্বদনন্যভাবাঃ ॥ ৮৯ ॥

ullaṅghita-trividha-sīma-samātiśāyi-

sambhāvanaṁ tava parivraḍhima-svabhāvam

māyā-balena bhavatāpi niguhyamānaṁ

paśyanti kecid aniśaṁ tvad-ananya-bhāvāḥ

Synonyms

ullaṅghita — passed over; tri-vidha — three kinds; sīma — the limitations; sama — of equal; atiśāyi — and of excelling; sambhāvanam — by which the adequacy; tava — Your; parivraḍhima — of supremacy; svabhāvam — the real nature; māyā-balena — by the strength of the illusory energy; bhavatā — Your; api — although; niguhyamānam — being hidden; paśyanti — they see; kecit — some; aniśam — always; tvat — to You; ananya-bhāvāḥ — those who are exclusively devoted.

Translation

“O my Lord, everything within material nature is limited by time, space and thought. Your characteristics, however, being unequaled and unsurpassed, are always transcendental to such limitations. You sometimes cover such characteristics by Your own energy, but nevertheless Your unalloyed devotees are always able to see You under all circumstances.”

Purport

This verse is also quoted from the Stotra-ratna (13) of Yāmunācārya. [...]Our imperfect senses, [...] cannot think of the greatness of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, nor can we bring Him within the limitations of time or our thinking power. His position is accordingly described by the word ullaṅghita. He is transcendental to space, time and thought; although He appears within them, He exists transcendentally. [...]

CC Ādi 4.162

গোপীগণের প্রেমের ‘রূঢ়ভাব’ নাম ।

বিশুদ্ধ নির্মল প্রেম, কভু নহে কাম ॥ ১৬২ ॥

gopī-gaṇera premera ‘rūḍha-bhāva’ nāma

viśuddha nirmala prema, kabhu nahe kāma

Synonyms

gopī-gaṇera — of the gopīs; premera — of the love; rūḍha-bhāva — rūḍha-bhāva; nāma — named; viśuddha — pure; nirmala — spotless; prema — love; kabhu — at anytime; nahe — is not; kāma — lust.

Translation

The love of the gopīs is called rūḍha-bhāva. It is pure and spotless. It is not at any time lust.

CC Ādi 4.163

‘প্রেমৈব গোপরামাণাং কাম ইত্যগমৎ প্রথাম্‌ ।

’ইত্যুদ্ধবাদয়োঽপ্যেতং বাঞ্ছন্তি ভগবৎপ্রিয়াঃ ॥ ১৬৩ ॥

premaiva gopa-rāmānāṁ

kāma ity agamat prathām

ity uddhavādayo ’py etaṁ

vāñchanti bhagavat-priyāḥ

Synonyms

prema — love; eva — only; gopa-rāmānām — of the women of Vraja; kāmaḥ — lust; iti — as; agamat — went to; prathām — fame; iti — thus; uddhava-ādayaḥ — headed by Śrī Uddhava; api — even; etam — this; vāñchanti — desire; bhagavat-priyāḥ — dear devotees of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Translation

“The pure love of the gopīs has become celebrated by the name ‘lust.’ The dear devotees of the Lord, headed by Śrī Uddhava, desire to taste that love.”

Purport

This is a verse from the Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu (1.2.285).

CC Ādi 4.164

কাম, প্রেম,—দোঁহাকার বিভিন্ন লক্ষণ ।

লৌহ আর হেম যৈছে স্বরূপে বিলক্ষণ ॥ ১৬৪ ॥

kāma, prema, — doṅhākāra vibhinna lakṣaṇa

lauha āra hema yaiche svarūpe vilakṣaṇa

Synonyms

kāma — lust; prema — love; doṅhākāra — of the two; vibhinna — separate; lakṣaṇa — symptoms; lauha — iron; āra — and; hema — gold; yaiche — just as; svarūpe — in nature; vilakṣaṇa — different.

Translation

Lust and love have different characteristics, just as iron and gold have different natures.

CC Ādi 4.165

আত্মেন্দ্রিয়প্রীতি–বাঞ্ছা—তারে বলি, ‘কাম’ ।

কৃষ্ণেন্দ্রিয়প্রীতি–ইচ্ছা ধরে ‘প্রেম’ নাম ॥ ১৬৫ ॥

ātmendriya-prīti-vāñchā — tāre bali ‘kāma’

kṛṣṇendriya-prīti-icchā dhare ‘prema’ nāma

Synonyms

ātma-indriya-prīti — for the pleasure of one’s own senses; vāñchā — desires; tāre — to that; bali — I say; kāma — lust; kṛṣṇa-indriya-prīti — for the pleasure of Lord Kṛṣṇa’s senses; icchā — desire; dhare — holds; prema — love; nāma — the name.

Translation

The desire to gratify one’s own senses is kāma [lust], but the desire to please the senses of Lord Kṛṣṇa is prema [love].

CC Adi 7.6

pañca-tattvātmakaṁ kṛṣṇaṁ
bhakta-rūpa-svarūpakam
bhaktāvatāraṁ bhaktākhyaṁ
namāmi bhakta-śaktikam

SYNONYMS
pañca-tattva-ātmakam—comprehending the five transcendental subject matters; kṛṣṇam—unto Lord Kṛṣṇa; bhakta-rūpa—in the form of a devotee; svarūpakam—in the expansion of a devotee; bhakta-avatāram—in the incarnation of a devotee; bhakta-ākhyam—known as a devotee; namāmi—I offer my obeisances; bhakta-śaktikam—the energy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

TRANSLATION
Let me offer my obeisances unto Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa, who has manifested Himself in five as a devotee, expansion of a devotee, incarnation of a devotee, pure devotee and devotional energy.

PURPORT
Śrī Nityānanda Prabhu is the immediate expansion of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu as His brother. He is the personified spiritual bliss of sac-cid-ānanda-vigraha (BS 5.1). His body is transcendental and full of ecstasy in devotional service. Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu is therefore called bhakta-rūpa (the form of a devotee), and Śrī Nityānanda Prabhu is called bhakta-svarūpa (the expansion of a devotee). Śrī Advaita Prabhu, the incarnation of a devotee, is viṣṇu-tattva and belongs to the same category. There are also different types of bhaktas, or devotees, on the platforms of neutrality, servitude, friendship, parenthood and conjugal love. Devotees like Śrī Dāmodara, Śrī Gadādhara and Śrī Rāmānanda are different energies. This confirms the Vedic sūtra parāsya śaktir vividhaiva śrūyate (CC Madhya 13.65, purport). All these bhakta subjects taken together constitute Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, who is Kṛṣṇa Himself.

COMMENT BY MGD:
The Panca-Tatva - The Supreme Truth in its Five Manifestations

pañca-tattvātmakaṁ kṛṣṇaṁ
bhakta-rūpa-svarūpakam
bhaktāvatāraṁ bhaktākhyaṁ
namāmi bhakta-śaktikam

1. bhakta-rūpa—in the form of a devotee = Sri Krsna Caitanya; the Supreme Personality of Godhead, known as Lord Sri Krsna;

2. svarūpakam—in the expansion of a devotee = Lord Nityananda; Lord Balarama;

3. bhakta-avatāram—in the incarnation of a devotee = Advaita Acarya; Lord Visnu (and Lord Maha-Siva)

5. bhakta-ākhyam—known as a devotee = Srivas Thakura; Narada Muni;

4. bhakta-śaktikam—the energy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead = Gadadhara Pandita; Radharani.

CC Ādi 7.71

প্রভু কহে—শুন, শ্রীপাদ, ইহার কারণ ।

গুরু মোরে মূর্খ দেখি’ করিল শাসন ॥ ৭১ ॥

prabhu kahe — śuna, śrīpāda, ihāra kāraṇa

guru more mūrkha dekhi’ karila śāsana

Synonyms

prabhu kahe — the Lord replied; śuna — kindly hear; śrīpāda — Your Holiness; ihāra — of this; kāraṇa — reason; guru — My spiritual master; more — Me; mūrkha — fool; dekhi’ — understanding; karila — he did; śāsana — chastisement.

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu replied to Prakāśānanda Sarasvatī, “My dear sir, kindly hear the reason. My spiritual master considered Me a fool, and therefore he chastised Me.

CC Ādi 7.72

মূর্খ তুমি, তোমার নাহিক বেদান্তাধিকার ।

‘কৃষ্ণমন্ত্র’ ‘জপ’ সদা,—এই মন্ত্রসার ॥ ৭২ ॥

mūrkha tumi, tomāra nāhika vedāntādhikāra

‘kṛṣṇa-mantra’ japa sadā, — ei mantra-sāra

Synonyms

mūrkha tumi — You are a fool; tomāra — Your; nāhika — there is not; vedānta — Vedānta philosophy; adhikāra — qualification to study; kṛṣṇa-mantra — the hymn of Kṛṣṇa (Hare Kṛṣṇa); japa — chant; sadā — always; ei — this; mantra — hymn; sāra — essence of all Vedic knowledge.

Translation

“ ‘You are a fool,’ he said. ‘You are not qualified to study Vedānta philosophy, and therefore You must always chant the holy name of Kṛṣṇa. This is the essence of all mantras, or Vedic hymns.

CC Ādi 7.76

হরের্নাম হরের্নাম হরের্নামৈব কেবলম্‌ ।

কলৌ নাস্ত্যেব নাস্ত্যেব নাস্ত্যেব গতিরন্যথা ॥ ৭৬ ॥

harer nāma harer nāma

harer nāmaiva kevalam

kalau nāsty eva nāsty eva

nāsty eva gatir anyathā

Synonyms

hareḥ nāma — the holy name of the Lord; hareḥ nāma — the holy name of the Lord; hareḥ nāma — the holy name of the Lord; eva — certainly; kevalam — only; kalau — in this Age of Kali; na asti — there is none; eva — certainly; na asti — there is none; eva — certainly; na asti — there is none; eva — certainly; gatiḥ — progress; anyathā — otherwise.

Translation

“ ‘For spiritual progress in this Age of Kali, there is no alternative, there is no alternative, there is no alternative to the holy name, the holy name, the holy name of the Lord.’

CC Ādi 7.108

উপনিষৎ– সহিত সূত্র কহে যেই তত্ত্ব ।

মুখ্যবৃত্ত্যে সেই অর্থ পরম মহত্ত্ব ॥ ১০৮ ॥

upaniṣat-sahita sūtra kahe yei tattva

mukhya-vṛttye sei artha parama mahattva

Synonyms

upaniṣat — the authorized Vedic version; sahita — along with; sūtra — the Vedānta-sūtra; kahe — it is said; yei — the subject matter; tattva — in truth; mukhya-vṛttye — by direct understanding; sei — that truth; artha — meaning; parama — ultimate; mahattva — glory.

Translation

“The Absolute Truth is described in the Upaniṣads and Brahma-sūtra, but one must understand the verses as they are. That is the supreme glory in understanding.

Purport by MGDas

This purport list all the names of the 108 Upanisads.

CC Ādi 7.110

তাঁহার নাহিক দোষ, ঈশ্বর–আজ্ঞা পাঞা ।

গৌণার্থ করিল মুখ্য অর্থ আচ্ছাদিয়া ॥ ১১০ ॥

tāṅhāra nāhika doṣa, īśvara-ājñā pāñā

gauṇārtha karila mukhya artha ācchādiyā

Synonyms

tāṅhāra — of Śrī Śaṅkarācārya; nāhika — there is none; doṣa — fault; īśvara — the Supreme Lord; ājñā — order; pāñā — receiving; gauṇa-artha — indirect meaning; karila — make; mukhya — direct; artha — meaning; ācchādiyā — covering.

Translation

“Śaṅkarācārya is not at fault, for it is under the order of the Supreme Personality of Godhead that he has covered the real purport of the Vedas.

CC Ādi 8.12

হেন কৃপাময় চৈতন্য না ভজে যেই জন ।

সর্বোত্তম হইলেও তারে অসুরে গণন ॥ ১২ ॥

hena kṛpāmaya caitanya nā bhaje yei jana

sarvottama ha-ileo tāre asure gaṇana

Synonyms

hena — such; kṛpāmaya — merciful; caitanya — Lord Śrī Caitanya; nā — does not; bhaje — worship; yei — one; jana — person; sarvottama — supreme; ha-ileo — in spite of his being; tāre — unto him; asure — among the demons; gaṇana — the calculation.

Translation

One who does not show respect unto this merciful Lord, Caitanya Mahāprabhu, or does not worship Him should be considered a demon, even if he is very much exalted in human society.

CC Ādi 8.15

শ্রীকৃষ্ণচৈতন্য–দয়া করহ বিচার ।

বিচার করিলে চিত্তে পাবে চমৎকার ॥ ১৫ ॥

śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya-dayā karaha vicāra

vicāra karite citte pābe camatkāra

Synonyms

śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu; dayā — His mercy; karaha — just put into; vicāra — consideration; vicāra — when such consideration; karile — will be done by you; citte — in your heart; pābe — you will get; camatkāra — striking wonder.

Translation

If you are indeed interested in logic and argument, kindly apply it to the mercy of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. If you do so, you will find it to be strikingly wonderful.

CC Ādi 8.21

স্বতন্ত্র ঈশ্বর প্রেম–নিগূঢ়ভাণ্ডার ।

বিলাইল যারে তারে, না কৈল বিচার ॥ ২১ ॥

svatantra īśvara prema-nigūḍha-bhāṇdāra

bilāila yāre tāre, nā kaila vicāra

Synonyms

svatantra — fully independent; īśvara — the Supreme Personality of Godhead; prema — love of God; nigūḍha — very confidential; bhāṇḍāra — stock; bilāila — distributed; yāre — to anyone; tāre — to everyone; nā — not; kaila — did; vicāra — consideration.

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, as the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself, is fully independent. Therefore, although it is the most confidentially stored benediction, He can distribute love of Godhead to anyone and everyone without consideration.

CC Ādi 8.62

বৈষ্ণবের গুণগ্রাহী, না দেখয়ে দোষ ।

কায়মনোবাক্যে করে বৈষ্ণব–সন্তোষ ॥ ৬২ ॥

vaiṣṇavera guṇa-grāhī, nā dekhaye doṣa

kāya-mano-vākye kare vaiṣṇava-santoṣa

Synonyms

vaiṣṇavera — of devotees; guṇa-grāhī — accepting good qualities; nā — never; dekhaye — sees; doṣa — any fault; kāya-manaḥ-vākye — with heart and soul; kare — does; vaiṣṇava — devotee; santoṣa — pacification.

Translation

He always accepted the good qualities of Vaiṣṇavas and never found fault in them. He engaged his heart and soul only to satisfy the Vaiṣṇavas.

Purport

It is a qualification of a Vaiṣṇava that he is adoṣa-darśī: he never sees others’ faults. […]

CC Adi 9.6

mālākāraḥ svayaṁ kṛṣṇa-

premāmara-taruḥ svayam

dātā bhoktā tat-phalānāṁ

yas taṁ caitanyam āśraye

Synonyms

mālā-kāraḥ — gardener; svayam — Himself; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa; prema — love; amara — transcendental; taruḥ — tree; svayam — Himself; dātā — giver; bhoktā — enjoyer; tat-phalānām — of all the fruits of that tree; yaḥ — one who; tam — unto Him; caitanyam — Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu; āśraye — I take shelter.

Translation

I take shelter of the Supreme Personality of Godhead Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, who Himself is the tree of transcendental love of Kṛṣṇa, its gardener and also the bestower and enjoyer of its fruits.

CC Ādi 9.41

ভারত–ভূমিতে হৈল মনুষ্য–জন্ম যার ।

জন্ম সার্থক করি’ কর পর–উপকার ॥ ৪১ ॥

bhārata-bhūmite haila manuṣya janma yāra

janma sārthaka kari’ kara para-upakāra

Synonyms

bhārata — of India; bhūmite — in the land; haila — has become; manuṣya — human being; janma — birth; yāra — anyone; janma — such a birth; sārthaka — fulfillment; kari’ — doing so; kara — do; para — others; upakāra — benefit.

Translation

“One who has taken his birth as a human being in the land of India [Bhārata-varṣa] should make his life successful and work for the benefit of all other people.

CC Ādi 14.1

কথঞ্চন স্মৃতে যস্মিন্ দুষ্করং সুকরং ভবেৎ ।

বিস্মৃতে বিপরীতং স্যাৎ শ্রীচৈতন্যং নমামি তম্ ॥ ১ ॥

kathañcana smṛte yasmin

duṣkaraṁ sukaraṁ bhavet

vismṛte viparītaṁ syāt

śrī-caitanyaṁ namāmi tam

Synonyms

kathañcana — somehow or other; smṛte — by remembering; yasmin — whom; duṣkaram — difficult things; sukaram — easy; bhavet — become; vismṛte — by forgetting Him; viparītam — just the opposite; syāt — become; śrī-caitanyam — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu; namāmi — I offer my respectful obeisances; tam — unto Him.

Translation

Things that are very difficult to do become easy to execute if one somehow or other simply remembers Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu. But if one does not remember Him, even easy things become very difficult. To this Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu I offer my respectful obeisances.

CC Ādi 17.75

জ্ঞান–কর্ম–যোগ–ধর্মে নহে কৃষ্ণ বশ ।

কৃষ্ণবশ–হেতু এক—প্রেমভক্তি–রস ॥ ৭৫ ॥

jñāna-karma-yoga-dharme nahe kṛṣṇa vaśa

kṛṣṇa-vaśa-hetu eka — prema-bhakti-rasa

Synonyms

jñāna — the path of speculative knowledge; karma — fruitive activities; yoga — the process of controlling the senses; dharme — in the activities, in such an occupation; nahe — is not; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa; vaśa — pleased; kṛṣṇa — of Lord Kṛṣṇa; vaśa — for the pleasure; hetu — reason; eka — one; prema — love; bhakti — devotional service; rasa — such a mellow.

Translation

“By following the paths of speculative philosophical knowledge, fruitive activity or mystic yoga to control the senses, one cannot satisfy Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Lord. Unalloyed devotional love for Kṛṣṇa is the only cause for the Lord’s satisfaction.

CC Madhya 1.188

জয় জয় শ্রীকৃষ্ণচৈতন্য দয়াময় ।

পতিতপাবন জয়, জয় মহাশয় ॥ ১৮৮ ॥

jaya jaya śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya dayā-maya

patita-pāvana jaya, jaya mahāśaya

Synonyms

jaya jaya — all glories; śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya — unto Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu; dayā-maya — the most merciful; patita-pāvana — the savior of the fallen souls; jaya — glories; jaya — glories; mahāśaya — to the great personality.

Translation

“All glories to Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya Mahāprabhu, the most merciful savior of the fallen souls! All glories to the Supreme Personality!

CC Madhya 1.218

দুই জনে প্ৰভুর কৃপা দেখি’ ভক্তগণে ।

‘হরি’ ‘হরি’ বলে সবে আনন্দিত-মনে ॥ ২১৮ ॥

dui jane prabhura kṛpā dekhi’ bhakta-gaṇe

‘hari’ ‘hari’ bale sabe ānandita-mane

Synonyms

dui jane — unto the two persons; prabhura — of the Lord; kṛpā — the mercy; dekhi’ — seeing; bhakta-gaṇe — all the devotees; hari hari — the holy name of the Lord; bale — chant; sabe — all; ānandita — cheerful; mane — in the mind.

Translation

When all of the devotees saw the mercy of the Lord upon the two brothers, they were very much gladdened, and they began to chant the holy name of the Lord, “Hari! Hari!”

CC Madhya 6.154

বিষ্ণুশক্তিঃ পরা প্রোক্তা ক্ষেত্রজ্ঞাখ্যা তথাপরা ।

অবিদ্যাকর্মসংজ্ঞান্যা তৃতীয়া শক্তিরিষ্যতে ॥ ১৫৪ ॥

viṣṇu-śaktiḥ parā proktā

kṣetra-jñākhyā tathā parā

avidyā-karma-saṁjñānyā

tṛtīyā śaktir iṣyate

Synonyms

viṣṇu-śaktiḥ — the internal potency of Lord Viṣṇu, the Supreme Personality of Godhead; parā — spiritual; proktā — said; kṣetra-jña — the living entities; ākhyā — known as; tathā — also; parā — spiritual; avidyā — nescience, or godlessness; karma — and fruitive activities; saṁjñā — known as; anyā — another; tṛtīyā — third; śaktiḥ — potency; iṣyate — is accepted as.

Translation

“ ‘The internal potency of the Supreme Lord, Viṣṇu, is spiritual, as verified by the śāstras. There is another spiritual potency, known as kṣetra-jña, or the living entity. The third potency, which is known as nescience, makes the living entity godless and fills him with fruitive activity.

Purport MGDas

Quoted by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu from Viṣṇu Purāṇa 6.7.61. Quoted by Srila Prabhupada in New york, 1973, April 13 on the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam 1.8.21, Prayers by Queen Kunti.

CC Madhya 6.254

vairāgya-vidyā-nija-bhakti-yoga-

śikṣārtham ekaḥ puruṣaḥ purāṇaḥ

śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya-śarīra-dhārī

kṛpāmbudhir yas tam ahaṁ prapadye

Synonyms

vairāgya — detachment from everything that does not help develop Kṛṣṇa consciousness; vidyā — knowledge; nija — own; bhakti-yoga — devotional service; śikṣā-artham — just to instruct; ekaḥ — the single person; puruṣaḥ — the Supreme Person; purāṇaḥ — very old, or eternal; śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya — of Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya Mahāprabhu; śarīra-dhārī — accepting the body; kṛpā-ambudhiḥ — the ocean of transcendental mercy; yaḥ — who; tam — unto Him; aham — I; prapadye — surrender.

Translation

“Let me take shelter of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Śrī Kṛṣṇa, who has descended in the form of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu to teach us real knowledge, His devotional service and detachment from whatever does not foster Kṛṣṇa consciousness. He has descended because He is an ocean of transcendental mercy. Let me surrender unto His lotus feet.

CC Madhya 7.96

কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! হে ।কৃষ্ণ!

কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! হে ॥

কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! রক্ষ মাম্ ।

কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! কৃষ্ণ! পাহি মাম্ ॥

রাম! রাঘব! রাম! রাঘব! রাম! রাঘব! রক্ষ মাম্ ।

কৃষ্ণ! কেশব! কৃষ্ণ! কেশব! কৃষ্ণ! কেশব! পাহি মাম্ ॥ ৯৬ ॥

kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! he

kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! rakṣa mām

kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! kṛṣṇa! pāhi mām

rāma! rāghava! rāma! rāghava! rāma! rāghava! rakṣa mām

kṛṣṇa! keśava! kṛṣṇa! keśava! kṛṣṇa! keśava! pāhi mām

Synonyms

kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa; he — O; rakṣa — please protect; mām — Me; pāhi — please maintain; rāma — Lord Rāma; rāghava — descendant of King Raghu; keśava — killer of the Keśī demon.

Translation

The Lord chanted:

Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! he

Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! rakṣa mām

Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa! pāhi mām

That is, “O Lord Kṛṣṇa, please protect Me and maintain Me.” He also chanted:

Rāma! Rāghava! Rāma! Rāghava! Rāma! Rāghava! rakṣa mām

Kṛṣṇa! Keśava! Kṛṣṇa! Keśava! Kṛṣṇa! Keśava! pāhi mām

That is, “O Lord Rāma, descendant of King Raghu, please protect Me. O Kṛṣṇa, O Keśava, killer of the Keśī demon, please maintain Me.”

CC Madhya 7.128

yāre dekha, tāre kaha ‘kṛṣṇa’-upadeśa

āmāra ājñāya guru hañā tāra’ ei deśa

Synonyms

yāre — whomever; dekha — you meet; tāre — him; kaha — tell; kṛṣṇa-upadeśa — the instruction of the Bhagavad-gītā as it is spoken by the Lord or of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, which advises one to worship Śrī Kṛṣṇa; āmāra ājñāya — under My order; guru hañā — becoming a spiritual master; tāra’ — deliver; ei deśa — this country.

Translation

“Instruct everyone to follow the orders of Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa as they are given in the Bhagavad-gītā and Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. In this way become a spiritual master and try to liberate everyone in this land.”

CC Madhya 8.70

কৃষ্ণভক্তিরসভাবিতা মতিঃ

ক্রীয়তাং যদি কুতোঽপি লভ্যতে ।

তত্র লৌল্যমপি মূল্যমেকলং

জন্মকোটিসুকৃতৈর্ন লভ্যতে ॥ ৭০ ॥

kṛṣṇa-bhakti-rasa-bhāvitā matiḥ

krīyatāṁ yadi kuto ’pi labhyate

tatra laulyam api mūlyam ekalaṁ

janma-koṭi-sukṛtair na labhyate

Synonyms

kṛṣṇa-bhakti-rasa-bhāvitā — absorbed in the mellows of executing devotional service to Kṛṣṇa; matiḥ — intelligence; krīyatām — let it be purchased; yadi — if; kutaḥ api — somewhere; labhyate — is available; tatra — there; laulyam — greed; api — indeed; mūlyam — price; ekalam — only; janma-koṭi — of millions of births; sukṛtaiḥ — by pious activities; na — not; labhyate — is obtained.

Translation

“ ‘Pure devotional service in Kṛṣṇa consciousness cannot be had even by pious activity in hundreds and thousands of lives. It can be attained only by paying one price — that is, intense greed to obtain it. If it is available somewhere, one must purchase it without delay.’ ”

Purport by MGDAS

Important line to memorize: tatra laulyam api mūlyam ekalaṁ - Pure devotional service in Kṛṣṇa consciousness [...] can be attained only by paying one price — that is, intense greed to obtain it. See also: Priceless Moments with a Pure Devotee by Trivikrama Swami - Chapter 5 - Life-long lessons (1975-1976) - Appreciating the contribution (page 104).

CC Madhya 8.128

kibā vipra, kibā nyāsī, śūdra kene naya

yei kṛṣṇa-tattva-vettā, sei ‘guru’ haya

Synonyms

kibā — whether; vipra — a brāhmaṇa; kibā — whether; nyāsī — a sannyāsī; śūdra — a śūdra; kene — why; naya — not; yei — anyone who; kṛṣṇa-tattva-vettā — a knower of the science of Kṛṣṇa; sei — that person; guru — the spiritual master; haya — is.

Translation

“Whether one is a brāhmaṇa, a sannyāsī or a śūdra — regardless of what he is — he can become a spiritual master if he knows the science of Kṛṣṇa.”

CC Madhya 8.142

অখিলরসামৃতমূর্তিঃ

প্রসৃমর-রুচিরুদ্ধ-তারকা-পালিঃ ।

কলিত-শ্যামা-ললিতো

রাধাপ্রেয়ান্ বিধুর্জয়তি ॥ ১৪২ ॥

akhila-rasāmṛta-mūrtiḥ prasṛmara-ruci-ruddha-tārakā-pāliḥ

kalita-śyāmā-lalito rādhā-preyān vidhur jayati

Synonyms

akhila-rasa-amṛta-mūrtiḥ — the reservoir of all pleasure, in which exist all the mellows of devotional service, namely śānta, dāsya, sakhya, vātsalya and mādhurya; prasṛmara — spreading forth; ruci — by His bodily luster; ruddha — who has subjugated; tārakā — the gopī named Tārakā; pāliḥ — the gopī named Pāli; kalita — who has absorbed the minds of; śyāmā — the gopī named Śyāmā; lalitaḥ — and the gopī named Lalitā; rādhā-preyān — dearmost to Śrīmatī Rādhārāṇī; vidhuḥ — Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead; jayati — all glories to.

Translation

“ ‘Let Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, be glorified! By virtue of His expanding attractive features, He subjugated the gopīs named Tārakā and Pāli and absorbed the minds of Śyāmā and Lalitā. He is the most attractive lover of Śrīmatī Rādhārāṇī and is the reservoir of pleasure for devotees in all transcendental mellows.’

Purport

Everyone has a particular transcendental mellow by which he loves and serves Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa is the most attractive feature for every kind of devotee. He is therefore called akhila-rasāmṛta-mūrti, the transcendental form of attraction for all kinds of devotees, whether the devotee be in the śānta-rasa, dāsya-rasa, sakhya-rasa, vātsalya-rasa or mādhurya-rasa.

This is the opening verse of the Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu, by Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī.

CC Madhya 8.167

কারুণ্যামৃত-ধারায় স্নান প্রথম ।

তারুণ্যামৃত-ধারায় স্নান মধ্যম ॥ ১৬৭ ॥

kāruṇyāmṛta-dhārāya snāna prathama

tāruṇyāmṛta-dhārāya snāna madhyama

Synonyms

kāruṇya-amṛta — of the nectar of mercy; dhārāya — in the shower; snāna — bath; prathama — first; tāruṇya-amṛta — of the nectar of youth; dhārāya — in the shower; snāna — bath; madhyama — in the middle.

Translation

“Śrīmatī Rādhārāṇī takes Her first bath in the shower of the nectar of compassion, and She takes Her second bath in the nectar of youth.

CC Madhya 8.282

tabe hāsi’ tāṅre prabhu dekhāila svarūpa

‘rasa-rāja’, ‘mahābhāva’ — dui eka rūpa

Synonyms

tabe — therefore; hāsi’ — smiling; tāṅre — unto him (Rāmānanda Rāya); prabhu — the Lord; dekhāila — showed; svarūpa — His personal form; rasa-rāja — the king of all transcendental humors; mahā-bhāva — the condition of ecstatic love; dui — two; eka — one; rūpa — form.

Translation

Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa is the reservoir of all pleasure, and Śrīmatī Rādhārāṇī is the personification of ecstatic love of Godhead. These two forms had combined as one in Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. This being the case, Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu revealed His real form to Rāmānanda Rāya.

This is the paribhava sutra of Mandali dasi

CC Madhya 11.28

যে মে ভক্তজনাঃ পার্থ ন মে ভক্তাশ্চ তে জনাঃ ।

মদ্ভক্তানাঞ্চ যে ভক্তাস্তে মে ভক্ততমা মতাঃ ॥ ২৮ ॥

ye me bhakta-janāḥ pārtha

na me bhaktāś ca te janāḥ

mad-bhaktānāṁ ca ye bhaktās

te me bhakta-tamā matāḥ

Synonyms

ye — those who; me — My; bhakta-janāḥ — devotees; pārtha — O Pārtha; na — not; me — My; bhaktāḥ — devotees; ca — and; te — those; janāḥ — persons; mat-bhaktānām — of My devotees; ca — certainly; ye — those who; bhaktāḥ — devotees; te — such persons; me — My; bhakta-tamāḥ — most advanced devotees; matāḥ — that is My opinion.

Translation

“[Lord Kṛṣṇa told Arjuna:] ‘Those who are My direct devotees are actually not My devotees, but those who are the devotees of My servant are factually My devotees.’PurportŚrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu quotes this verse from the Ādi Purāṇa. The verse is also included in the Laghu-bhāgavatāmṛta (2.6).

and also

CC Ādi 17.31

তৃণাদপি সুনীচেন তরোরিব সহিষ্ণুনা ।

অমানিনা মানদেন কীর্তনীয়ঃ সদা হরিঃ ॥ ৩১ ॥

tṛṇād api su-nīcena

taror iva sahiṣṇunā

amāninā māna-dena

kīrtanīyaḥ sadā hariḥ

Synonyms

tṛṇāt api — than downtrodden grass; su-nīcena — being lower; taroḥ — than a tree; iva — like; sahiṣṇunā — with tolerance; amāninā — without being puffed up by false pride; māna-dena — giving respect to all; kīrtanīyaḥ — to be chanted; sadā — always; hariḥ — the holy name of the Lord.

Translation

“One who thinks himself lower than the grass, who is more tolerant than a tree, and who does not expect personal honor yet is always prepared to give all respect to others can very easily always chant the holy name of the Lord.”

CC Madhya 13.80

nāhaṁ vipro na ca nara-patir nāpi vaiśyo na śūdro

nāhaṁ varṇī na ca gṛha-patir no vanastho yatir vā

kintu prodyan-nikhila-paramānanda-pūrnāmṛtābdher

gopī-bhartuḥ pada-kamalayor dāsa-dāsānudāsaḥ

Synonyms

na — not; aham — I; vipraḥ — a brāhmaṇa; na — not; ca — also; nara-patiḥ — a king or kṣatriya; na — not; api — also; vaiśyaḥ — belonging to the mercantile class; na — not; śūdraḥ — belonging to the worker class; na — not; aham — I; varṇī — belonging to any caste, or brahmacārī (A brahmacārī may belong to any caste. Anyone can become a brahmacārī, or lead a life of celibacy.); na — not; ca — also; gṛha-patiḥ — householder; no — not; vana-sthaḥ — vānaprastha, one who, after retirement from family life, goes to the forest to learn how to be detached from family life; yatiḥ — mendicant or renunciant; vā — either; kintu — but; prodyan — brilliant; nikhila — universal; parama-ānanda — with transcendental bliss; pūrṇa — complete; amṛta-abdheḥ — who is the ocean of nectar; gopī-bhartuḥ — of the Supreme Person, who is the maintainer of the gopīs; pada-kamalayoḥ — of the two lotus feet; dāsa — of the servant; dāsa-anudāsaḥ — the servant of the servant.

Translation

“ ‘I am not a brāhmaṇa, I am not a kṣatriya, I am not a vaiśya or a śūdra. Nor am I a brahmacārī, a householder, a vānaprastha or a sannyāsī. I identify Myself only as the servant of the servant of the servant of the lotus feet of Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa, the maintainer of the gopīs. He is like an ocean of nectar, and He is the cause of universal transcendental bliss. He is always existing with brilliance.’ ”

Purport

This is verse 74 from the Padyāvalī, an anthology of verses compiled by Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī.

CC Madhya 15.106

prabhu kahe, — “yāṅra mukhe śuni eka-bāra

kṛṣṇa-nāma, sei pūjya, — śreṣṭha sabākāra”

Synonyms

prabhu kahe — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu replied; yāṅra mukhe — in whose mouth; śuni — I hear; eka-bāra — once; kṛṣṇa-nāma — the holy name of Lord Kṛṣṇa; sei pūjya — he is worshipable; śreṣṭha sabākāra — the best of all human beings.

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu replied, “Whoever chants the holy name of Kṛṣṇa just once is worshipable and is the topmost human being.

Purport

(Cc. Madhya 22.64, 69, 71)

CC Ādi 17.22

কলিকালে নামরূপে কৃষ্ণ–অবতার ।

নাম হৈতে হয় সর্বজগৎ–নিস্তার ॥ ২২ ॥

kali-kāle nāma-rūpe kṛṣṇa-avatāra

nāma haite haya sarva-jagat-nistāra

Synonyms

kali-kāle — in this Age of Kali; nāma-rūpe — in the form of the holy name; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa; avatāra — incarnation; nāma — holy name; haite — from; haya — becomes; sarva — all; jagat — of the world; nistāra — deliverance.

Translation

“In this Age of Kali, the holy name of the Lord, the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra, is the incarnation of Lord Kṛṣṇa. Simply by chanting the holy name, one associates with the Lord directly. Anyone who does this is certainly delivered.

CC Madhya 17.75

কৃপার সমুদ্র, দীন-হীনে দয়াময় ।

কৃষ্ণকৃপা বিনা কোন ‘সুখ’ নাহি হয় ॥” ৭৫ ॥

kṛpāra samudra, dīna-hīne dayāmaya

kṛṣṇa-kṛpā vinā kona ‘sukha’ nāhi haya”

Synonyms

kṛpāra samudra — ocean of mercy; dīna-hīne — unto the poor and fallen; dayā-maya — very merciful; kṛṣṇa-kṛpā — the mercy of Kṛṣṇa; vinā — without; kona — any; sukha — happiness; nāhi haya — there is not.

Translation

“Kṛṣṇa is an ocean of mercy. He is especially merciful to the poor and fallen. Without His mercy, there is no possibility of happiness.”

CC Madhya 17.129

prabhu kahe, — “māyāvādī kṛṣṇe aparādhī

‘brahma’, ‘ātmā’ ‘caitanya’ kahe niravadhi

Synonyms

prabhu kahe — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu said; māyāvādī — the impersonalists; kṛṣṇe — unto Kṛṣṇa; aparādhī — great offenders; brahma — brahma; ātmā — ātmā; caitanya — caitanya; kahe — say; niravadhi — without stopping.

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu replied, “The Māyāvādī impersonalists are great offenders unto Lord Kṛṣṇa; therefore they simply utter the words ‘Brahman,’ ‘ātmā’ and ‘caitanya.’

CC Madhya 17.133

nāma cintāmaṇiḥ kṛṣṇaś

caitanya-rasa-vigrahaḥ

pūrṇaḥ śuddho nitya-mukto

’bhinnatvān nāma-nāminoḥ

Synonyms

nāmaḥ — the holy name; cintāmaṇiḥ — transcendentally blissful giver of all spiritual benedictions; kṛṣṇaḥ — not different from Kṛṣṇa; caitanya-rasa-vigrahaḥ — the form of all transcendental mellows; pūrṇaḥ — complete; śuddhaḥ — pure, without material contamination; nitya — eternal; muktaḥ — liberated; abhinnatvāt — due to not being different; nāma — of the holy name; nāminoḥ — and of the person who has the name.

Translation

“ ‘The holy name of Kṛṣṇa is transcendentally blissful. It bestows all spiritual benedictions, for it is Kṛṣṇa Himself, the reservoir of all pleasure. Kṛṣṇa’s name is complete, and it is the form of all transcendental mellows. It is not a material name under any condition, and it is no less powerful than Kṛṣṇa Himself. Since Kṛṣṇa’s name is not contaminated by the material qualities, there is no question of its being involved with māyā. Kṛṣṇa’s name is always liberated and spiritual; it is never conditioned by the laws of material nature. This is because the name of Kṛṣṇa and Kṛṣṇa Himself are identical.’

CC Madhya 17.136

ataḥ śrī-kṛṣṇa-nāmādi

na bhaved grāhyam indriyaiḥ

sevonmukhe hi jihvādau

svayam eva sphuraty adaḥ

Synonyms

Translation

Purport

This verse is recorded in the Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu (1.2.234).

CC Madhya 17.186

tarko ‘pratiṣṭhaḥ śrutayo vibhinnā

nāsāv ṛṣir yasya mataṁ na bhinnam

dharmasya tattvaṁ nihitaṁ guhāyāṁ

mahājano yena gataḥ sa panthāḥ

SYNONYMS

tarkaḥ—dry argument; apratiṣṭhaḥ—not fixed; śrutayaḥ—Vedas; vibhinnāḥ—possessing different departments; na—not; asau—that; ṛṣiḥ—great sage; yasya—whose; matam—opinion; na—not; bhinnam—separate; dharmasya—of religious principles; tattvam—truth; nihitam—placed; guhāyām—in the heart of a realized person; mahā-janaḥ—self-realized predecessors; yena—by which way; gataḥ—acted; saḥ—that; panthāḥ—the pure unadulterated path.

TRANSLATION

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu continued, “‘Dry arguments are inconclusive. A great personality whose opinion does not differ from others is not considered a great sage. Simply by studying the Vedas, which are variegated, one cannot come to the right path by which religious principles are understood. The solid truth of religious principles is hidden in the heart of an unadulterated, self-realized person. Consequently, as the śāstras confirm, one should accept whatever progressive path the mahājanas advocate.’”

CC Madhya 19.53

namo mahā-vadānyāya

kṛṣṇa-prema-pradāya te

kṛṣṇāya kṛṣṇa-caitanya-

nāmne gaura-tviṣe namaḥ

Synonyms

namaḥ — obeisances; mahā-vadānyāya — who is most munificent and charitably disposed; kṛṣṇa-prema — love of Kṛṣṇa; pradāya — who can give; te — unto You; kṛṣṇāya — the original Personality of Godhead; kṛṣṇa-caitanya-nāmne — under the name Kṛṣṇa Caitanya; gaura-tviṣe — whose complexion is the golden complexion of Śrīmatī Rādhārāṇī; namaḥ — obeisances.

Translation

“O most munificent incarnation! You are Kṛṣṇa Himself appearing as Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya Mahāprabhu. You have assumed the golden color of Śrīmatī Rādhārāṇī, and You are widely distributing pure love of Kṛṣṇa. We offer our respectful obeisances unto You.

CC Madhya 19.75

ভগবদ্ভক্তিহীনস্য জাতিঃ শাস্ত্রং জপস্তপঃ ।

অপ্রাণস্যেব দেহস্য মণ্ডনং লোকরঞ্জনম্‌ ॥ ৭৫ ॥

bhagavad-bhakti-hīnasya

jātiḥ śāstraṁ japas tapaḥ

aprāṇasyeva dehasya

maṇḍanaṁ loka-rañjanam

Synonyms

bhagavat-bhakti-hīnasya — of a person devoid of devotional service to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; jātiḥ — birth in a high caste; śāstram — knowledge in the revealed scriptures; japaḥ — pronunciation of mantras; tapaḥ — austerities and penances; aprāṇasya — which is dead; iva — like; dehasya — of a body; maṇḍanam — decoration; loka — to the whims of people in general; rañjanam — simply pleasing.

Translation

“ ‘For a person devoid of devotional service, birth in a great family or nation, knowledge of the revealed scriptures, performance of austerities and penance, and chanting of Vedic mantras are all like ornaments on a dead body. Such ornaments simply serve the concocted pleasures of the general populace.’ ”

Purport by MGDAS

This verse and the previous (CC Madhya 19.74) are quoted from the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya (3.11, 12), a transcendental literature extracted from the Purāṇas.

CC Madhya 19.151

brahmāṇḍa bhramite kona bhāgyavān jīva

guru-kṛṣṇa-prasāde pāya bhakti-latā-bīja

Synonyms

brahmāṇḍa bhramite — wandering in this universe; kona — some; bhāgyavān — most fortunate; jīva — living being; guru — of the spiritual master; kṛṣṇa — of Kṛṣṇa; prasāde — by the mercy; pāya — gets; bhakti-latā — of the creeper of devotional service; bīja — the seed.

Translation

“According to their karma, all living entities are wandering throughout the entire universe. Some of them are being elevated to the upper planetary systems, and some are going down into the lower planetary systems. Out of many millions of wandering living entities, one who is very fortunate gets an opportunity to associate with a bona fide spiritual master by the grace of Kṛṣṇa. By the mercy of both Kṛṣṇa and the spiritual master, such a person receives the seed of the creeper of devotional service.

CC Madhya 19.152

mālī hañā kare sei bīja āropaṇa

śravaṇa-kīrtana-jale karaye secana

Synonyms

mālī hañā — becoming a gardener; kare — does; sei — that; bīja — seed of devotional service; āropaṇa — sowing; śravaṇa — of hearing; kīrtana — of chanting; jale — with the water; karaye — does; secana — sprinkling.

Translation

“When a person receives the seed of devotional service, he should take care of it by becoming a gardener and sowing the seed in his heart. If he waters the seed gradually by the process of śravaṇa and kīrtana [hearing and chanting], the seed will begin to sprout.

CC Madhya 19.160

সেকজল পাঞা উপশাখা বাড়ি’ যায় ।

স্তব্ধ হঞা মূলশাখা বাড়িতে না পায় ॥ ১৬০ ॥

seka-jala pāñā upaśākhā bāḍi’ yāya

stabdha hañā mūla-śākhā bāḍite nā pāya

Synonyms

seka-jala — sprinkling water; pāñā — getting; upaśākhā — the unwanted creepers; bāḍi’ yāya — grow luxuriantly; stabdha hañā — becoming stopped; mūla-śākhā — the chief creeper; bāḍite — to increase; nā pāya — is not able.

Translation

“If one does not distinguish between the bhakti creeper and the other creepers, the sprinkling of water is misused because the other creepers are nourished while the bhakti creeper is curtailed.

CC Madhya 19.167

anyābhilāṣitā-śūnyaṁ

jñāna-karmādy-anāvṛtam

ānukūlyena kṛṣṇānu-

śīlanaṁ bhaktir uttamā

Synonyms

anya-abhilāṣitā-śūnyam — without desires other than those for the service of Lord Kṛṣṇa, or without material desires (such as those for meat-eating, illicit sex, gambling and addiction to intoxicants); jñāna — by the knowledge of the philosophy of the monist Māyāvādīs*; karma — by fruitive activities; ādi — by artificially practicing detachment, by the mechanical practice of yoga, by studying the Sāṅkhya philosophy, and so on; anāvṛtam — not covered; ānukūlyena — favorable; kṛṣṇa-anuśīlanam — cultivation of service in relationship to Kṛṣṇa; bhaktiḥ uttamā — first-class devotional service.

Translation

CC Madhya 19.170

sarvopadhi-vinirmuktam

tat-paratvena nirmalam

hrsikena hrsikesa-

sevanam bhaktir ucyate

SYNONYMS

sarva-upadhi-vinirmuktam — free from all kinds of material designations, or free from all desires except the desire to render service to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tat-paratvena — by the sole purpose of serving the Supreme Personality of Godhead; nirmalam — uncontaminated by the effects of speculative philosophical research or fruitive activity; hrsikena — by purified senses freed from all designations; hrsika-isa — of the master of the senses; sevanam — the service to satisfy the senses; bhaktih — devotional service; ucyate —is called.

TRANSLATION

"'Bhakti, or devotional service, means engaging all our senses in the service of the Lord, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of all the senses. When the spirit soul renders service unto the Supreme, there are two side effects. One is freed from all material designations, and one's senses are purified simply by being employed in the service of the Lord.'

CC Madhya 20.59

বিপ্রাদ্‌দ্বিষড়্ গুণযুতাদরবিন্দনাভ-

পাদারবিন্দবিমুখাৎ শ্বপচং বরিষ্ঠম্‌ ।

মন্যে তদর্পিত-মনোবচনেহিতার্থ-

প্রাণং পুনাতি স কুলং ন তু ভূরিমানঃ ॥ ৫৯ ॥

viprād dvi-ṣaḍ-guṇa-yutād aravinda-nābha-

pādāravinda-vimukhāt śva-pacaṁ variṣṭham

manye tad-arpita-mano-vacanehitārtha-

prāṇaṁ punāti sa kulaṁ na tu bhūri-mānaḥ

Synonyms

viprāt — than a brāhmaṇa; dvi-ṣaṭ-guṇa-yutāt — who is qualified with twelve brahminical qualifications; aravinda-nābha — of Lord Viṣṇu, who has a lotuslike navel; pāda-aravinda — unto the lotus feet; vimukhāt — than a person bereft of devotion; śva-pacam — a caṇḍāla, or a person accustomed to eating dogs; variṣṭham — more glorified; manye — I think; tat-arpita — dedicated unto Him; manaḥ — mind; vacana — words; īhita — activities; artha — wealth; prāṇam — life; punāti — purifies; saḥ — he; kulam — his family; na tu — but not; bhūri-mānaḥ — a brāhmaṇa proud of possessing such qualities.

Translation

“ ‘One may be born in a brāhmaṇa family and have all twelve brahminical qualities, but if he is not devoted to the lotus feet of Lord Kṛṣṇa, who has a navel shaped like a lotus, he is not as good as a caṇḍāla who has dedicated his mind, words, activities, wealth and life to the service of the Lord. Simply to take birth in a brāhmaṇa family or to have brahminical qualities is not sufficient. One must become a pure devotee of the Lord. If a śva-paca or caṇḍāla is a devotee, he delivers not only himself but his whole family, whereas a brāhmaṇa who is not a devotee but simply has brahminical qualifications cannot even purify himself, what to speak of his family.’ ”

CC Madhya 20.108-109

jīvera ‘svarūpa’ haya — kṛṣṇera ‘nitya-dāsa’

kṛṣṇera ‘taṭasthā-śakti’ ‘bhedābheda-prakāśa’

sūryāṁśa-kiraṇa, yaiche agni-jvālā-caya

svābhāvika kṛṣṇera tina-prakāra ‘śakti’ haya

Synonyms

jīvera — of the living entity; svarūpa — the constitutional position; haya — is; kṛṣṇera — of Lord Kṛṣṇa; nitya-dāsa — eternal servant; kṛṣṇera — of Lord Kṛṣṇa; taṭasthā — marginal; śakti — potency; bheda-abheda — one and different; prakāśa — manifestation; sūrya-aṁśa — part and parcel of the sun; kiraṇa — a ray of sunshine; yaiche — as; agni-jvālā-caya — molecular particle of fire; svābhāvika — naturally; kṛṣṇera — of Lord Kṛṣṇa; tina-prakāra — three varieties; śakti — energies; haya — there are.

Translation

“It is the living entity’s constitutional position to be an eternal servant of Kṛṣṇa because he is the marginal energy of Kṛṣṇa and a manifestation simultaneously one with and different from the Lord, like a molecular particle of sunshine or fire. Kṛṣṇa has three varieties of energy.

CC Madhya 20.110

eka-deśa-sthitasyāgner

jyotsnā vistāriṇī yathā

parasya brahmaṇaḥ śaktis

tathedam akhilaṁ jagat

Synonyms

eka-deśa — in one place; sthitasya — being situated; agneḥ — of fire; jyotsnā — the illumination; vistāriṇī — expanded everywhere; yathā — just as; parasya — of the Supreme; brahmaṇaḥ — of the Absolute Truth; śaktiḥ — the energy; tathā — similarly; idam — this; akhilam — entire; jagat — universe.

Translation

“ ‘Just as the illumination of a fire, which is situated in one place, is spread all over, the energies of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Parabrahman, are spread all over this universe.’

Purport

This is a quotation from the Viṣṇu Purāṇa (1.22.53).

CC Madhya 20.158

vadanti tat tattva-vidas

tattvaṁ yaj jñānam advayam

brahmeti paramātmeti

bhagavān iti śabdyate

Synonyms

Translation

“ ‘Learned transcendentalists who know the Absolute Truth call this nondual substance Brahman, Paramātmā or Bhagavān.’

Purport

This is a quotation from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (1.2.11). [...] For a further explanation, see Ādi-līlā, chapter two, verse 11. CC Ādi 2.11

CC Madhya 22.49

sādhu-saṅge kṛṣṇa-bhaktye śraddhā yadi haya

bhakti-phala ‘prema’ haya, saṁsāra yāya kṣaya

Synonyms

sādhu-saṅge — by the association of devotees; kṛṣṇa-bhaktye — in discharging devotional service to Kṛṣṇa; śraddhā — faith; yadi — if; haya — there is; bhakti-phala — the result of devotional service to Kṛṣṇa; prema — love of Godhead; haya — awakens; saṁsāra — the conditioned life in material existence; yāya kṣaya — becomes vanquished.

Translation

“By associating with a devotee, one awakens his faith in devotional service to Kṛṣṇa. Because of devotional service, one’s dormant love for Kṛṣṇa awakens, and thus one’s material, conditioned existence comes to an end.

CC Madhya 22.51

মহৎ-কৃপা বিনা কোন কর্মে ‘ভক্তি’ নয় ।

কৃষ্ণভক্তি দূরে রহু, সংসার নহে ক্ষয় ॥ ৫১ ॥

mahat-kṛpā vinā kona karme ‘bhakti’ naya

kṛṣṇa-bhakti dūre rahu, saṁsāra nahe kṣaya

Synonyms

mahat-kṛpā — the mercy of great devotees; vinā — without; kona karme — by some other activity; bhakti naya — there is not devotional service; kṛṣṇa-bhakti — love of Kṛṣṇa or devotional service to Kṛṣṇa; dūre rahu — leaving aside; saṁsāra — the bondage of material existence; nahe — there is not; kṣaya — destruction.

Translation

“Unless one is favored by a pure devotee, one cannot attain the platform of devotional service. To say nothing of kṛṣṇa-bhakti, one cannot even be relieved from the bondage of material existence.

CC Madhya 22.54

‘sādhu-saṅga’, ‘sādhu-saṅga’ — sarva-śāstre kaya

lava-mātra sādhu-saṅge sarva-siddhi haya

Synonyms

sādhu-saṅga sādhu-saṅga — association with pure devotees; sarva-śāstre — all the revealed scriptures; kaya — say; lava-mātra — even for a moment; sādhu-saṅge — by association with a devotee; sarva-siddhi — all success; haya — there is.

Translation

“The verdict of all revealed scriptures is that by even a moment’s association with a pure devotee, one can attain all success.

CC Madhya 22.55

tulayāma lavenāpi

na svargaṁ nāpunar-bhavam

bhagavat-saṅgi-saṅgasya

martyānāṁ kim utāśiṣaḥ

Synonyms

tulayāma — we make equal; lavena — with one instant; api — even; na — not; svargam — heavenly planets; na — nor; apunaḥ-bhavam — merging into the existence of the Supreme; bhagavat-saṅgi-saṅgasya — of the association of devotees who are always associated with the Supreme Personality of Godhead; martyānām — of persons destined to die; kim uta — what to speak of; āśiṣaḥ — the blessings.

Translation

“ ‘The value of a moment’s association with a devotee of the Lord cannot be compared even to the attainment of the heavenly planets or liberation from matter, and what to speak of worldly benedictions in the form of material prosperity, which is for those who are meant for death.’

Purport

This is a quotation from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (1.18.13), as well as ŚB 4.30.34

CC Madhya 22.62

‘śraddhā’-śabde — viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya

kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile sarva-karma kṛta haya

Synonyms

śraddhā-śabde — by the word śraddhā; viśvāsa — faith; kahe — is said; sudṛḍha — firm; niścaya — certain; kṛṣṇe — unto Lord Kṛṣṇa; bhakti — devotional service; kaile — by executing; sarva-karma — all activities; kṛta — completed; haya — are.

Translation

“Śraddhā is confident, firm faith that by rendering transcendental loving service to Kṛṣṇa one automatically performs all subsidiary activities. Such faith is favorable to the discharge of devotional service.

CC Madhya 22.74
arcāyām eva haraye
pūjāṁ yaḥ śraddhayehate
na tad-bhakteṣu cānyeṣu
sa bhaktaḥ prākṛtaḥ smṛtaḥ

Synonyms
arcāyām — in the temple worship; eva — certainly; haraye — for the pleasure of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; pūjām — worship; yaḥ — anyone who; śraddhayā — with faith and love; īhate — executes; na — not; tat-bhakteṣu — to the devotees of the Lord; ca anyeṣu — and to others; saḥ — he; bhaktaḥ — a devotee; prākṛtaḥ — materialistic; smṛtaḥ — is considered.

Translation
“ ‘A prākṛta-bhakta, or materialistic devotee, does not purposefully study the śāstra and try to understand the actual standard of pure devotional service. Consequently he does not show proper respect to advanced devotees. He may, however, follow the regulative principles learned from his spiritual master or from his family who worships the Deity. He is to be considered on the material platform, although he is trying to advance in devotional service. Such a person is a bhakta-prāya [neophyte devotee], or bhaktābhāsa, for he is a little enlightened by Vaiṣṇava philosophy.’

CC Madhya 22.83

kṛṣṇa-bhakti-janma-mūla haya ‘sādhu-saṅga’

kṛṣṇa-prema janme, teṅho punaḥ mukhya aṅga

Synonyms

kṛṣṇa-bhakti — of devotional service to Kṛṣṇa; janma-mūla — the root cause; haya — is; sādhu-saṅga — association with advanced devotees; kṛṣṇa-prema — love of Kṛṣṇa; janme — awakens; teṅho — that same association with devotees; punaḥ — again; mukhya aṅga — the chief principle.

Translation

“The root cause of devotional service to Lord Kṛṣṇa is association with advanced devotees. Even when one’s dormant love for Kṛṣṇa awakens, association with devotees is still most essential.

CC Madhya 22.87

asat-sanga-tyaga, -- ei vaisnava-acara

'stri-sangi' -- eka asadhu, 'krsnabhakta' ara

SYNONYMS

asat-saṅga-tyāga — rejection of the association of nondevotees; ei — this; vaiṣṇava-ācāra — the behavior of a Vaiṣṇava; strī-saṅgī — who associates with women for sense gratification; eka — one; asādhu — unsaintly person; kṛṣṇa-abhakta — one who is not a devotee of Lord Kṛṣṇa; āra — another.

TRANSLATION

"For a Vaisnava, the standard behavior is to avoid the assocation of ordinary people not interested in krsna-bhakti. Such common people are, first, those who are too materially attached, especially to women, and, second, people who are not at all devotees of Lord Krsna. Vaisnavas should avoid the company of these two kinds of people.

CC Madhya 22.100

আনুকূল্যস্য সঙ্কল্পঃ প্রাতিকূল্যস্য বর্জনম্‌ ।

রক্ষিষ্যতীতি বিশ্বাসো গোপ্তৃত্বে বরণং তথা ।

আত্মনিক্ষেপ-কার্পণ্যে ষড়্‌বিধা শরণাগতিঃ ॥ ১০০ ॥

ānukūlyasya saṅkalpaḥ

prātikūlyasya varjanam

rakṣiṣyatīti viśvāso

goptṛtve varaṇaṁ tathā

ātma-nikṣepa-kārpaṇye

ṣaḍ-vidhā śaraṇāgatiḥ

Synonyms

ānukūlyasya — of anything that assists devotional service to the Lord; saṅkalpaḥ — acceptance; prātikūlyasya — of anything that hinders devotional service; varjanam — complete rejection; rakṣiṣyati — He will protect; iti — thus; viśvāsaḥ — strong conviction; goptṛtve — in being the guardian, like the father or husband, master or maintainer; varaṇam — acceptance; tathā — as well as; ātma-nikṣepa — full self-surrender; kārpaṇye — and humility; ṣaṭ-vidhā — sixfold; śaraṇa-āgatiḥ — process of surrender.

Translation

“ ‘The six divisions of surrender are the acceptance of those things favorable to devotional service, the rejection of unfavorable things, the conviction that Kṛṣṇa will give protection, the acceptance of the Lord as one’s guardian or master, full self-surrender, and humility.

CC Madhya 22.107

nitya-siddha kṛṣṇa-prema ‘sādhya’ kabhu naya

śravaṇādi-śuddha-citte karaye udaya

Synonyms

nitya-siddha — eternally established; kṛṣṇa-prema — love of Kṛṣṇa; sādhya — to be gained; kabhu — at any time; naya — not; śravaṇa-ādi — by hearing, etc.; śuddha — purified; citte — in the heart; karaye udaya — awakens.

Translation

“Pure love for Kṛṣṇa is eternally established in the hearts of the living entities. It is not something to be gained from another source. When the heart is purified by hearing and chanting, this love naturally awakens.

Alternate Translation

Dormant devotional service to Kṛṣṇa is within everyone. Simply by associating with devotees, hearing their good instructions and chanting the Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra, dormant love for Kṛṣṇa is awakened. In this way one acquires the seed of devotional service. Guru-kṛṣṇa-prasāde pāya bhakti-latā-bīja.

CC Madhya 22.113

smartavyaḥ satataṁ viṣṇur

vismartavyo na jātucit

sarve vidhi-niṣedhāḥ syur

etayor eva kiṅkarāḥ

Synonyms

smartavyaḥ — to be remembered; satatam — always; viṣṇuḥ — Lord Viṣṇu; vismartavyaḥ — to be forgotten; na — not; jātucit — at any time; sarve — all; vidhi-niṣedhāḥ — rules and prohibitions mentioned in the revealed scripture or given by the spiritual master; syuḥ — should be; etayoḥ — of these two principles (always to remember Kṛṣṇa or Viṣṇu and never to forget Him); eva — certainly; kiṅkarāḥ — the servants.

Translation

CC Madhya 20.123

‘শাস্ত্র-গুরু-আত্ম’-রূপে আপনারে জানান ।

‘কৃষ্ণ মোর প্রভু, ত্রাতা’ — জীবের হয় জ্ঞান ॥ ১২৩ ॥

‘śāstra-guru-ātma’-rūpe āpanāre jānāna

‘kṛṣṇa mora prabhu, trātā’ — jīvera haya jñāna

Synonyms

śāstra-guru-ātma-rūpe — in the form of the Vedic literature, the spiritual master and the Supersoul; āpanāre jānāna — informs about Himself; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa; mora — my; prabhu — Lord; trātā — deliverer; jīvera — of the conditioned soul; haya — there is; jñāna — knowledge.

Translation

“The forgetful conditioned soul is educated by Kṛṣṇa through the Vedic literatures, the realized spiritual master and the Supersoul. Through these, he can understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead as He is, and he can understand that Lord Kṛṣṇa is his eternal master and deliverer from the clutches of māyā. In this way one can acquire real knowledge of his conditioned life and can come to understand how to attain liberation.

CC Madhya 22.121
śravaṇa, kīrtana, smaraṇa, pūjana, vandana
paricaryā, dāsya, sakhya, ātma-nivedana

Synonyms
śravaṇa — hearing; kīrtana — chanting; smaraṇa — remembering; pūjana — worshiping; vandana — praying; paricaryā — serving; dāsya — accepting servitorship; sakhya — friendship; ātma-nivedana — surrendering fully.

Translation
“After one is established in devotional service, the positive actions are (1) hearing, (2) chanting, (3) remembering, (4) worshiping, (5) praying, (6) serving, (7) accepting servitorship, (8) becoming a friend and (9) surrendering fully.

CC Madhya 22.128
sādhu-saṅga, nāma-kīrtana, bhāgavata-śravaṇa
mathurā-vāsa, śrī-mūrtira śraddhāya sevana

Synonyms
sādhu-saṅga — association with devotees; nāma-kīrtana — chanting the holy name; bhāgavata-śravaṇa — hearing Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam; mathurā-vāsa — living at Mathurā; śrī-mūrtira śraddhāya sevana — worshiping the Deity with faith and veneration.

Translation
“One should associate with devotees, chant the holy name of the Lord, hear Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, reside at Mathurā and worship the Deity with faith and veneration.

CC Madhya 22.129

সকলসাধন-শ্রেষ্ঠ এই পঞ্চ অঙ্গ ।

কৃষ্ণপ্রেম জন্মায় এই পাঁচের অল্প সঙ্গ ॥ ১২৯ ॥

sakala-sādhana-śreṣṭha ei pañca aṅga

kṛṣṇa-prema janmāya ei pāṅcera alpa saṅga

Synonyms

sakala-sādhana — of all items for executing devotional service; śreṣṭha — the best; ei pañca aṅga — these five limbs; kṛṣṇa-prema — love of Kṛṣṇa; janmāya — awakens; ei — these; pāṅcera — of the five; alpa saṅga — slight association with or performance.

Translation

“These five limbs of devotional service are the best of all. Even a slight performance of these five awakens love for Kṛṣṇa.

CC Madhya 22.130

শ্রদ্ধা বিশেষতঃ প্রীতিঃ শ্রীমূর্তেরঙ্ঘ্রিসেবনে ॥ ১৩০ ॥

śraddhā viśeṣataḥ prītiḥ

śrī-mūrter aṅghri-sevane

Synonyms

śraddhā — faith; viśeṣataḥ — particularly; prītiḥ — love; śrī-mūrteḥ — of the Deity form of the Lord; aṅghri-sevane — in service of the lotus feet. Translation “ ‘With love and full faith one should worship the lotus feet of the Deity.

Purport

This verse and the following two verses are found in the Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu (1.2.90-92).

CC Madhya 22.131

শ্রীমদ্ভাগবতার্থানামাস্বাদো রসিকৈঃ সহ ।

সজাতীয়াশয়ে স্নিগ্ধে সাধৌ সঙ্গঃ স্বতো বরে ॥ ১৩১ ॥

śrīmad-bhāgavatārthānām

āsvādo rasikaiḥ saha

sajātīyāśaye snigdhe

sādhau saṅgaḥ svato vare

Synonyms

śrīmad-bhāgavata — of the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam; arthānām — of the meanings; āsvādaḥ — enjoying the taste; rasikaiḥ saha — with the devotees; sa-jātīya — similar; āśaye — endowed with a desire; snigdhe — advanced in devotional affection; sādhau — with a devotee; saṅgaḥ — association; svataḥ — for one’s self; vare — better.

Translation

“ ‘One should taste the meaning of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam in the association of pure devotees, and one should associate with the devotees who are more advanced than oneself and who are endowed with a similar type of affection for the Lord.

CC Madhya 22.132

নামসংকীর্তনং শ্রীমন্মথুরামণ্ডলে স্থিতিঃ ॥ ১৩২ ॥

nāma-saṅkīrtanaṁ śrīman-

mathurā-maṇḍale sthitiḥ

Synonyms

nāma-saṅkīrtanam — chanting the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra; śrīman-mathurā-maṇḍale — in Mathurā, where Kṛṣṇa specifically performs His pastimes; sthitiḥ — residence.

Translation

“ ‘One should congregationally chant the holy name of the Lord and reside in Vṛndāvana.’

CC Madhya 22.136
śrī-viṣṇoḥ śravaṇe parīkṣid abhavad vaiyāsakiḥ kīrtane
prahlādaḥ smaraṇe tad-aṅghri-bhajane lakṣmīḥ pṛthuḥ pūjane
akrūras tv abhivandane kapi-patir dāsye ’tha sakhye ’rjunaḥ
sarva-svātma-nivedane balir abhūt kṛṣṇāptir eṣāṁ parā

Synonyms
śrī-viṣṇoḥ — of Lord Śrī Viṣṇu; śravaṇe — in hearing; parīkṣit — King Parīkṣit, known also as Viṣṇurāta, or one who is protected by Lord Viṣṇu; abhavat — was; vaiyāsakiḥ — Śukadeva Gosvāmī; kīrtane — in reciting Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam; prahlādaḥ — Mahārāja Prahlāda; smaraṇe — in remembering; tat-aṅghri — of Lord Viṣṇu’s lotus feet; bhajane — in serving; lakṣmīḥ — the goddess of fortune; pṛthuḥ — Mahārāja Pṛthu; pūjane — in worshiping the Deity of the Lord; akrūraḥ — Akrūra; tu — but; abhivandane — in offering prayers; kapi-patiḥ — Hanumānjī, or Vajrāṅgajī; dāsye — in servitude to Lord Rāmacandra; atha — moreover; sakhye — in friendship; arjunaḥ — Arjuna; sarva-sva-ātma-nivedane — in fully dedicating oneself; baliḥ — Mahārāja Bali; abhūt — was; kṛṣṇa-āptiḥ — the achievement of the lotus feet of Lord Kṛṣṇa; eṣām — of all of them; parā — transcendental.

Translation
“ ‘Mahārāja Parīkṣit attained the highest perfection, shelter at Lord Kṛṣṇa’s lotus feet, simply by hearing about Lord Viṣṇu. Śukadeva Gosvāmī attained perfection simply by reciting Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. Prahlāda Mahārāja attained perfection by remembering the Lord. The goddess of fortune attained perfection by massaging the transcendental legs of Mahā-Viṣṇu. Mahārāja Pṛthu attained perfection by worshiping the Deity, and Akrūra attained perfection by offering prayers unto the Lord. Vajrāṅgajī [Hanumān] attained perfection by rendering service to Lord Rāmacandra, and Arjuna attained perfection simply by being Kṛṣṇa’s friend. Bali Mahārāja attained perfection by dedicating everything to the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa.’

CC Madhya 22.137-139
sa vai manaḥ kṛṣṇa-padāravindayor
vacāṁsi vaikuṇṭha-guṇānuvarṇane
karau harer mandira-mārjanādiṣu
śrutiṁ cakārācyuta-sat-kathodaye

mukunda-liṅgālaya-darśane dṛśau
tad-bhṛtya-gātra-sparaśe ’ṅga-saṅgamam
ghrāṇaṁ ca tat-pāda-saroja-saurabhe
śrīmat-tulasyā rasanāṁ tad-arpite

pādau hareḥ kṣetra-padānusarpaṇe
śiro hṛṣīkeśa-padābhivandane
kāmaṁ ca dāsye na tu kāma-kāmyayā
yathottamaḥśloka-janāśrayā ratiḥ

Synonyms
saḥ — he (Mahārāja Ambarīṣa); vai — certainly; manaḥ — the mind; kṛṣṇa-pada-aravindayoḥ — on the two lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa; vacāṁsi — words; vaikuṇṭha-guṇa-anuvarṇane — in describing the transcendental character of Kṛṣṇa; karau — the two hands; hareḥ — of Lord Kṛṣṇa or Viṣṇu; mandira-mārjana-ādiṣu — in cleansing the temple of Hari and similar other duties; śrutim — the ears; cakāra — engaged; acyuta — of the Lord; sat-kathā-udaye — in the arising of transcendental topics; mukunda-liṅga — of the Deities of the Lord; ālaya — temples; darśane — in visiting; dṛśau — the two eyes; tat-bhṛtya — of the servants of the Lord; gātra — the bodies; sparaśe — in touching; aṅga-saṅgamam — bodily contact such as touching the lotus feet or embracing; ghrāṇam — the sensation of smell; ca — and; tat-pāda-saroja — of the Lord’s lotus feet; saurabhe — in the fragrance; śrīmat — most auspicious; tulasyāḥ — of tulasī leaves; rasanām — the tongue; tat-arpite — in food offered to the Lord; pādau — the two feet; hareḥ — of the Lord; kṣetra — the place of pilgrimage; pada-anusarpaṇe — in walking to; śiraḥ — the head; hṛṣīkeśa — of the Lord of the senses, the Personality of Godhead; pada-abhivandane — in offering prayers at the lotus feet; kāmam — all desires; ca — and; dāsye — in serving the Lord; na — not; tu — but; kāma-kāmyayā — with a desire for sense gratification; yathā — as much as; uttamaḥ-śloka — of the Lord, who is worshiped by selected poems; jana — in the devotee; āśrayā — having shelter; ratiḥ — attachment.

Translation
“ ‘Mahārāja Ambarīṣa always engaged his mind at the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa, his words in describing the spiritual world and the Supreme Personality of Godhead, his hands in cleansing and washing the Lord’s temple, his ears in hearing topics about the Supreme Lord, his eyes in seeing the Deity of Lord Kṛṣṇa in the temple, his body in embracing Vaiṣṇavas or touching their lotus feet, his nostrils in smelling the aroma of the tulasī leaves offered to Kṛṣṇa’s lotus feet, his tongue in tasting food offered to Kṛṣṇa, his legs in going to places of pilgrimage like Vṛndāvana and Mathurā or to the Lord’s temple, his head in touching the lotus feet of the Lord and offering Him obeisances, and his desires in serving the Lord faithfully. In this way Mahārāja Ambarīṣa engaged his senses in the transcendental loving service of the Lord. As a result, he awakened his dormant loving propensity for the Lord’s service.’

Purport
This is a quotation from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (9.4.18-20).

CC Madhya 23.39

yāṅra citte kṛṣṇa-premā karaye udaya

tāṅra vākya, kriyā, mudrā vijñeha nā bujhaya

Synonyms

yāṅra citte — in whose heart; kṛṣṇa-premā — love of Kṛṣṇa; karaye udaya — awakens; tāṅra — his; vākya — words; kriyā — activities; mudrā — symptoms; vijñeha — even a learned scholar; nā bujhaya — does not understand.

Translation

“Even the most learned man cannot understand the words, activities and symptoms of a person situated in love of Godhead.

Comment by MGDas: This verse is many times quoted as: vaisnevera kriyā, mudrā vijñeha nā bujhaya

CC Madhya 23.66
vrajendra-nandana kṛṣṇa — nāyaka-śiromaṇi
nāyikāra śiromaṇi — rādhā-ṭhākurāṇī

Synonyms
vrajendra-nandana kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa, the son of Mahārāja Nanda; nāyaka-śiromaṇi — best of all heroes; nāyikāra śiromaṇi — the best of all heroines; rādhā-ṭhākurāṇī — Śrīmatī Rādhārāṇī.

Translation
“Lord Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who appeared as the son of Nanda Mahārāja, is the supreme hero in all dealings. Similarly, Śrīmatī Rādhārāṇī is the topmost heroine in all dealings.

CC Madhya 24.5

ātmārāmāś ca munayo

nirgranthā apy urukrame

kurvanty ahaitukīṁ bhaktim

ittham-bhūta-guṇo hariḥ

Synonyms

ātma-ārāmāḥ — persons who take pleasure in being transcendentally situated in the service of the Lord; ca — also; munayaḥ — great saintly persons who have completely rejected material aspirations, fruitive activities and so forth; nirgranthāḥ — without interest in any material desire; api — certainly; urukrame — unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kṛṣṇa, whose activities are wonderful; kurvanti — do; ahaitukīm — causeless, or without material desires; bhaktim — devotional service; ittham-bhūta — so wonderful as to attract the attention of the self-satisfied; guṇaḥ — who has transcendental qualities; hariḥ — the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Translation

“ ‘Those who are self-satisfied and unattracted by external material desires are also attracted to the loving service of Śrī Kṛṣṇa, whose qualities are transcendental and whose activities are wonderful. Hari, the Personality of Godhead, is called Kṛṣṇa because He has such transcendentally attractive features.’

Purport

This is the famous ātmārāma verse from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (1.7.10).

CC Madhya 24.22

vibhu-rūpe vyāpe, śaktye dhāraṇa-poṣaṇa

mādhurya-śaktye goloka, aiśvarye paravyoma

Synonyms

vibhu-rūpe — in His all-pervasive feature; vyāpe — expands; śaktye — by His potency; dhāraṇa-poṣaṇa — maintaining and nourishing; mādhurya-śaktye — by His potency of conjugal love; goloka — the planetary system Goloka Vṛndāvana; aiśvarye — and by opulence; para-vyoma — the spiritual world.

Translation

“Through His all-pervasive feature, the Supreme Personality of Godhead has expanded the entire creation. He is holding and maintaining this creation by His extraordinary potency. By His conjugal potency, He maintains the planetary system known as Goloka Vṛndāvana. Through His six opulences, He maintains many Vaikuṇṭha planets.

Purport

In His gigantic form, Lord Kṛṣṇa has covered the creation. He holds all the planetary systems and maintains them by His inconceivable potencies. Similarly, He is maintaining His personal abode, Goloka Vṛndāvana, through His conjugal love, and He is maintaining the spiritual world containing the Vaikuṇṭha planets by His opulences.

CC Madhya 24.29
ei yāṅhā nāhi, tāhā bhakti — ‘ahaitukī’
yāhā haite vaśa haya śrī-kṛṣṇa kautukī

Synonyms
ei — these; yāṅhā — where; nāhi — not existing; tāhā — that; bhakti — the platform of devotional service; ahaitukī — unmotivated; yāhā haite — by which; vaśa haya — comes under control; śrī-kṛṣṇa — Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa; kautukī — the most funny.

Translation
“Causeless devotional service is unmotivated by sense enjoyment, perfection or liberation. When one is freed from all these contaminations, he can bring Lord Kṛṣṇa, who is very funny, under control.

CC Madhya 24.39

bhukti-mukti-siddhi-sukha chāḍaya yāra gandhe

alaukika śakti-guṇe kṛṣṇa-kṛpāya bāndhe

Synonyms

bhukti — material enjoyment; mukti — liberation from material suffering; siddhi — the perfection of mystic yoga; sukha — the happiness derived from these things; chāḍaya — one gives up; yāra — of which; gandhe — simply by the slight fragrance; alaukika — uncommon, transcendental; śakti-guṇe — by the power and quality; kṛṣṇa-kṛpāya — by the mercy of Lord Kṛṣṇa; bāndhe — one becomes bound.

Translation

“Pure devotional service is so sublime that one can very easily forget the happiness derived from material enjoyment, material liberation and mystic or yogic perfection. Thus the devotee is bound by Kṛṣṇa’s mercy and His uncommon power and qualities.

CC Madhya 24.40

śāstra-yukti nāhi ihāṅ siddhānta-vicāra

ei svabhāva-guṇe, yāte mādhuryera sāra

Synonyms

śāstra-yukti — logic on the basis of revealed scripture; nāhi — there is not; ihāṅ — here; siddhānta-vicāra — consideration of logical conclusions; ei — this; svabhāva-guṇe — a natural quality; yāte — in which; mādhuryera sāra — the essence of all transcendental bliss.

Translation

“When one is attracted to Kṛṣṇa on the transcendental platform, there is no longer any logical argument on the basis of revealed scripture, nor are there considerations of such conclusions. This is His transcendental quality that is the essence of all transcendental sweetness.

CC Madhya 24.318

কৃষ্ণ-তুল্য ভাগবত — বিভু, সর্বাশ্রয় ।

প্ৰতি-শ্লোকে প্ৰতি-অক্ষরে নানা অর্থ কয় ॥ ৩১৮ ॥

kṛṣṇa-tulya bhāgavata — vibhu, sarvāśraya

prati-śloke prati-akṣare nānā artha kaya

Synonyms

kṛṣṇa-tulya bhāgavata — Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam is identical with Kṛṣṇa; vibhu — the supreme; sarva-āśraya — the origin of everything, or that which controls everything; prati-śloke — in every verse; prati-akṣare — in every syllable; nānā artha kaya — there are varieties of imports.

Translation

“Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam is as great as Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Lord and shelter of everything. In each and every verse of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam and in each and every syllable, there are various meanings.

Purport by MGD

Krsna tulya means identical to Krsna.

CC Madhya 25.24

śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya haya ‘sākṣāt nārāyaṇa’

‘vyāsa-sūtrera’ artha karena ati-manorama

Synonyms

śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya — Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya Mahāprabhu; haya — is; sākṣāt nārāyaṇa — directly the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Nārāyaṇa; vyāsa-sūtrera — the aphorisms of Vyāsadeva (Vedānta-sūtra); artha karena — He explains; ati-manorama — very nicely.

Translation

He said, “Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Nārāyaṇa Himself. When He explains the Vedānta-sūtra, He does so very nicely.

CC Madhya 25.27

ācārya-kalpita artha ye paṇḍita śune

mukhe ‘haya’ ‘haya’ kare, hṛdaya nā māne

Synonyms

ācārya-kalpita — imagined by Śaṅkarācārya; artha — meaning; ye paṇḍita śune — any learned person who hears; mukhe — only in the mouth; haya haya — yes it is, yes it is; kare — does; hṛdaya — his heart; nā māne — does not accept.

Translation

“All the interpretations of Śaṅkarācārya are imaginary. Such imaginary interpretations are verbally accepted by learned scholars, but they do not appeal to the heart.

CC Madhya 25.30

bhakti vinā mukti nahe, bhāgavate kaya

kali-kāle nāmābhāse sukhe mukti haya

Synonyms

bhakti vinā — without devotional service; mukti nahe — there is no question of liberation; bhāgavate kaya — it is said in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam; kali-kāle — in this Age of Kali; nāma-ābhāse — even by a slight appreciation of the Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra; sukhe — without difficulty; mukti haya — one can get liberation.

Translation

“In this Age of Kali, one cannot attain liberation without taking to the devotional service of the Lord. In this age, even if one chants the holy name of Kṛṣṇa imperfectly, he still attains liberation very easily.

CC Madhya 25.31

শ্রেয়ঃসৃতিং ভক্তিমুদস্য তে বিভো

ক্লিশ্যন্তি যে কেবলবোধলব্ধয়ে ।

তেষামসৌ ক্লেশল এব শিষ্যতে

নান্যদ্‌যথা স্থূলতুষাবঘাতিনাম্ ॥ ৩১ ॥

śreyaḥ-sṛtiṁ bhaktim udasya te vibho

kliśyanti ye kevala-bodha-labdhaye

teṣām asau kleśala eva śiṣyate

nānyad yathā sthūla-tuṣāvaghātinām

Synonyms

śreyaḥ-sṛtim — the auspicious path of liberation; bhaktim — devotional service; udasya — giving up; te — of You; vibho — O my Lord; kliśyanti — accept increased difficulties; ye — all those persons who; kevala — only; bodha-labdhaye — for obtaining knowledge; teṣām — for them; asau — that; kleśalaḥ — trouble; eva — only; śiṣyate — remains; na — not; anyat — anything else; yathā — as much as; sthūla — bulky; tuṣa — husks of rice; avaghātinām — of those beating.

Translation

“ ‘My dear Lord, devotional service unto You is the only auspicious path. If one gives it up simply for speculative knowledge or the understanding that these living beings are spirit souls and the material world is false, he undergoes a great deal of trouble. He only gains troublesome and inauspicious activities. His actions are like beating a husk that is already devoid of rice. His labor becomes fruitless.’

Purport

This is a quotation from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (10.14.4).

CC Madhya 25.32

যেঽন্যেঽরবিন্দাক্ষ বিমুক্তমানিন-

স্ত্বয্যস্তভাবাদবিশুদ্ধবুদ্ধয়ঃ ।

আরুহ্য কৃচ্ছ্রেণ পরং পদং ততঃ

পতন্ত্যধোঽনাদৃতযুষ্মদঙ্ঘ্রয়ঃ ॥ ৩২ ॥

ye ’nye ’ravindākṣa vimukta-māninas

tvayy asta-bhāvād aviśuddha-buddhayaḥ

āruhya kṛcchreṇa paraṁ padaṁ tataḥ

patanty adho ’nādṛta-yuṣmad-aṅghrayaḥ

Synonyms

ye — all those who; anye — others (nondevotees); aravinda-akṣa — O lotus-eyed one; vimukta-māninaḥ — who consider themselves liberated; tvayi — unto You; asta-bhāvāt — without devotion; aviśuddha-buddhayaḥ — whose intelligence is not purified; āruhya — having ascended; kṛcchreṇa — by severe austerities and penances; param padam — to the supreme position; tataḥ — from there; patanti — fall; adhaḥ — down; anādṛta — without respecting; yuṣmat — Your; aṅghrayaḥ — lotus feet.

Translation

“ ‘O lotus-eyed one, those who think they are liberated in this life but who are devoid of devotional service to You are of impure intelligence. Although they accept severe austerities and penances and rise to the spiritual position, to impersonal Brahman realization, they fall down again because they neglect to worship Your lotus feet.’

Purport

This is a verse from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (10.2.32).

CC Madhya 25.41

সূত্রের পরিণাম-বাদ, তাহা না মানিয়া ।

‘বিবর্তবাদ’ স্থাপে, ‘ব্যাস ভ্রান্ত’ বলিয়া ॥

sūtrera pariṇāma-vāda, tāhā nā māniyā

‘vivarta-vāda’ sthāpe, ‘vyāsa bhrānta’ baliyā

Synonyms

sūtrera — of the aphorisms of the Vedānta-sūtra; pariṇāma-vāda — the transformation of energy; tāhā nā māniyā — not accepting this fact; vivarta-vāda — the theory of illusion; sthāpe — establishes; vyāsa bhrānta baliyā — accusing Vyāsadeva of being mistaken.

Translation

“Not accepting the transformation of energy, Śrīpāda Śaṅkarācārya has tried to establish the theory of illusion under the plea that Vyāsadeva has made a mistake.

Purport

For an explanation of this verse, one may refer to Ādi-līlā, chapter seven, verses 121-126.

CC Madhya 25.85

naiṣāṁ matis tāvad urukramāṅghriṁ

spṛśaty anarthāpagamo yad-arthaḥ

mahīyasāṁ pāda-rajo-’bhiṣekaṁ

niṣkiñcanānāṁ na vṛṇīta yāvat

Synonyms

na — not; eṣām — of those who are attached to household life; matiḥ — the interest; tāvat — that long; urukrama-aṅghrim — the lotus feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is credited with uncommon activities; spṛśati — touches; anartha — of unwanted things; apagamaḥ — vanquishing; yat — of which; arthaḥ — results; mahīyasām — of the great personalities, devotees; pāda-rajaḥ — of the dust of the lotus feet; abhiṣekam — sprinkling on the head; niṣkiñcanānām — who are completely detached from material possessions; na vṛṇīta — does not do; yāvat — as long as.

Translation

“ ‘Unless human society accepts the dust of the lotus feet of great mahātmās — devotees who have nothing to do with material possessions — mankind cannot turn its attention to the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa. Those lotus feet vanquish all the unwanted, miserable conditions of material life.’

Purport

This verse appears in the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (7.5.32). For an explanation, see Madhya-līlā 22.53.

CC Madhya 25.91

prabhu kahe, — “āmi ‘jīva’, ati tuccha-jñāna!

vyāsa-sūtrera gambhīra artha, vyāsa — bhagavān

Synonyms

prabhu kahe — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu replied; āmi jīva — I am an insignificant living being; ati tuccha-jñāna — My knowledge is very meager; vyāsa-sūtrera — of the Vedānta-sūtra, written by Vyāsadeva; gambhīra artha — very grave meaning; vyāsa — Vyāsadeva; bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu replied, “I am an ordinary living being, and therefore My knowledge is very insignificant. However, the meaning of the Brahma-sūtra is very grave because its author, Vyāsadeva, is the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself.

CC Madhya 25.102

bhāgavatera sambandha, abhidheya, prayojana

catuḥ-ślokīte prakaṭa tāra kariyāche lakṣaṇa

Synonyms

bhāgavatera — of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam; sambandha — a personal relationship with God; abhidheya — activities in that relationship; prayojana — the ultimate goal of life; catuḥ-ślokīte — in the four famous verses of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam; prakaṭa — manifesting; tāra — of them; kariyāche — has done; lakṣaṇa — the symptoms.

Translation

“The essence of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam — our relationship with the Supreme Lord, our activities in that connection and the goal of life — is manifest in the four verses of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam known as the catuḥ-ślokī. Everything is explained in those verses.

CC Madhya 25.120

‘abhidheya’ sādhana-bhaktira śunaha vicāra

sarva-jana-deśa-kāla-daśāte vyāpti yāra

Synonyms

abhidheya — the means to obtain an end; sādhana-bhaktira — of the process of executing devotional service; śunaha vicāra — please hear the procedure; sarva — all; jana — people; deśa — countries; kāla — times; daśāte — and in circumstances; vyāpti yāra — which is all-pervasive.

Translation

“ ‘Now please hear from Me about the process of devotional service, which is applicable in any country, for any person, at all times and in all circumstances.

CC Madhya 25.121

‘dharmādi’ viṣaye yaiche e ‘cāri’ vicāra

sādhana-bhakti — ei cāri vicārera pāra

Synonyms

dharma-ādi — of religious activities and so on; viṣaye — in the subject matter; yaiche — just as; e cāri vicāra — there is a consideration of four principles, namely the person, country, time and atmosphere; sādhana-bhakti — of devotional service; ei — these; cāri — four; vicārera — to the considerations; pāra — transcendental.

Translation

“ ‘As far as religious principles are concerned, there is a consideration of the person, the country, the time and the circumstance. In devotional service, however, there are no such considerations. Devotional service is transcendental to all such considerations.

CC Madhya 25.122

sarva-deśa-kāla-daśāya janera kartavya

guru-pāśe sei bhakti praṣṭavya, śrotavya

Synonyms

sarva — all; deśa — countries; kāla — times; daśāya — and in circumstances; janera — of every man; kartavya — the duty; guru-pāśe — in the care of a spiritual master; sei — that; bhakti — devotional service; praṣṭavya — to be inquired; śrotavya — and to be heard.

Translation

“ ‘It is therefore the duty of every man — in every country, in every circumstance and at all times — to approach a bona fide spiritual master, question him about devotional service and listen to him explain the process.

CC Madhya 25.146

sarva-vedānta-sāraṁ hi

śrīmad-bhāgavatam iṣyate

tad-rasāmṛta-tṛptasya

nānyatra syād ratiḥ kvacit

Synonyms

sarva-vedānta-sāram — the best part of all the Vedānta; hi — certainly; śrīmad-bhāgavatam — the great literature about Bhagavān; iṣyate — is accepted; tat-rasa-amṛta — by the transcendental mellow derived from that great literature; tṛptasya — of one who is satisfied; na — never; anyatra — anywhere else; syāt — is; ratiḥ — attraction; kvacit — at any time.

Translation

“ ‘Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam is accepted as the essence of all Vedic literature and Vedānta philosophy. Whoever tastes the transcendental mellow of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam is never attracted to any other literature.’

Purport

This is a quotation from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (12.13.15).

CC Madhya 25.264

jīva nistārite prabhu bhramilā deśe-deśe

āpane āsvādi’ bhakti karilā prakāśe

Synonyms

jīva nistārite — to deliver all the fallen souls; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu; bhramilā — traveled; deśe-deśe — in various countries; āpane — personally; āsvādi’ — tasting; bhakti — devotional service; karilā — did; prakāśe — broadcasting.

Translation

To deliver all fallen souls, the Lord traveled from country to country. He personally tasted the transcendental pleasure of devotional service, and He simultaneously spread the cult of devotion everywhere.

CC Madhya 25.265

কৃষ্ণতত্ত্ব, ভক্তিতত্ত্ব, প্রেমতত্ত্ব সার ।

ভাবতত্ত্ব, রসতত্ত্ব, লীলাতত্ত্ব আর ॥ ২৬৫ ॥

kṛṣṇa-tattva, bhakti-tattva, prema-tattva sāra

bhāva-tattva, rasa-tattva, līlā-tattva āra

Synonyms

kṛṣṇa-tattva — the truth of Kṛṣṇa; bhakti-tattva — the truth of devotional service; prema-tattva — the truth of ecstatic love of Godhead; sāra — the essence; bhāva-tattva — the emotional truth; rasa-tattva — the truth of transcendental mellows; līlā-tattva — the truth of the pastimes of the Lord; āra — also.

Translation

Kṛṣṇa consciousness means understanding the truth of Kṛṣṇa, the truth of devotional service, the truth of love of Godhead, the truth of emotional ecstasy, the truth of transcendental mellows and the truth of the pastimes of the Lord.

CC Antya 4.79

bhakta-bhakti-kṛṣṇaprema-tattvera nirdhāra

vaiṣṇavera kṛtya, āra vaiṣṇava-ācāra

Synonyms

bhakta — devotee; bhakti — devotional service; kṛṣṇa-prema — love of Kṛṣṇa; tattvera — of the truth of; nirdhāra — ascertainment; vaiṣṇavera kṛtya — duties of a Vaiṣṇava; āra — and; vaiṣṇava-ācāra — characteristics of a Vaiṣṇava.

Translation

“You shall have to ascertain the basic principles of a devotee, devotional service, love of Godhead, Vaiṣṇava duties and Vaiṣṇava characteristics.

CC Antya 4.80

kṛṣṇa-bhakti, kṛṣṇaprema-sevā-pravartana

lupta-tīrtha-uddhāra, āra vairāgya-śikṣaṇa

Synonyms

kṛṣṇa-bhakti — devotional service to Kṛṣṇa; kṛṣṇa-prema — love of Kṛṣṇa; sevā — service; pravartana — establishment of; lupta-tīrtha — the lost places of pilgrimage; uddhāra — excavating; āra — and; vairāgya-śikṣaṇa — instruction on the renounced order of life.

Translation

“You will also have to explain Kṛṣṇa’s devotional service, establish centers for cultivation of love of Kṛṣṇa, excavate lost places of pilgrimage and teach people how to adopt the renounced order.

CC Antya 4.100

avatāra-kārya prabhura — nāma-pracāre

sei nija-kārya prabhu karena tomāra dvāre

Synonyms

avatāra-kārya — mission of the incarnation; prabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu; nāma-pracāre — spreading the importance of the holy name of the Lord; sei — that; nija-kārya — mission of His life; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu; karena — performs; tomāra dvāre — through you.

Translation

“The mission of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, for which He has descended as an incarnation, is to spread the importance of chanting the holy name of the Lord. Now instead of personally doing so, He is spreading it through you.

CC Antya 4.102

āpane ācare keha, nā kare pracāra

pracāra karena keha, nā karena ācāra

Synonyms

āpane — personally; ācare — behaves; keha — someone; nā kare pracāra — does not do preaching work; pracāra karena — does preaching work; keha — someone; nā karena ācāra — does not behave strictly according to the principles.

Translation

“Some behave very well but do not preach the cult of Kṛṣṇa consciousness, whereas others preach but do not behave properly.

CC Antya 4.103

‘ācāra’, ‘pracāra’, — nāmera karaha ‘dui’ kārya

tumi — sarva-guru, tumi jagatera ārya

Synonyms

ācāra pracāra — behaving well and preaching; nāmera — of the holy name; karaha — you do; dui — two; kārya — works; tumi — you; sarva-guru — everyone’s spiritual master; tumi — you; jagatera ārya — the most advanced devotee within this world.

Translation

“You simultaneously perform both duties in relation to the holy name by your personal behavior and by your preaching. Therefore you are the spiritual master of the entire world, for you are the most advanced devotee in the world.”

CC Antya 4.129-130

“yadyapio tumi hao jagat-pāvana

tomā-sparśe pavitra haya deva-muni-gaṇa

tathāpi bhakta-svabhāva — maryādā-

maryādā-pālana haya sādhura bhūṣaṇa

Synonyms

yadyapio — although; tumi — you; hao — are; jagat-pāvana — the deliverer of the entire universe; tomā — you; sparśe — by touching; pavitra — purified; haya — becomes; deva-muni-gaṇa — the demigods and great saintly persons; tathāpi — still; bhakta-svabhāva — the nature of a devotee; maryādā — etiquette; rakṣaṇa — to protect or observe; maryādā pālana — to maintain etiquette; haya — is; sādhura bhūṣaṇa — ornament of devotees.

Translation

“My dear Sanātana, although you are the deliverer of the entire universe and although even the demigods and great saints are purified by touching you, it is the characteristic of a devotee to observe and protect the Vaiṣṇava etiquette. Maintenance of the Vaiṣṇava etiquette is the ornament of a devotee.

CC Antya 5.9

kṛṣṇa-kathāya ruci tomāra — baḍa bhāgyavān

yāra kṛṣṇa-kathāya ruci, sei bhāgyavān

Synonyms

kṛṣṇa-kathāya — in talking of Kṛṣṇa; ruci — taste; tomāra — your; baḍa bhāgyavān — very fortunate; yāra — of whom; kṛṣṇa-kathāya — in hearing about Kṛṣṇa; ruci — taste; sei bhāgyavān — he is very fortunate.

Translation

“I see that you have acquired a taste for hearing talks regarding Kṛṣṇa. Therefore you are extremely fortunate. Not only you but anyone who has awakened such a taste is considered most fortunate.

CC Antya 5.89

caitanya-caritāmṛta nitya kara pāna

yāhā ‘premānanda’, ‘bhakti-tattva-jñāna’

Synonyms

caitanya-caritāmṛta — this transcendental literature known as Caitanya-caritāmṛta; nitya — daily; kara pāna — do relish; yāhā haite — by which; prema-ānanda — transcendental bliss; bhakti-tattva-jñāna — transcendental knowledge in devotional service.

Translation

O devotees, relish daily the nectar of Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛta and the pastimes of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, for by doing so one can merge in transcendental bliss and attain full knowledge of devotional service.

CC Antya 5.82

bhakta-guṇa prakāśite prabhu bhāla jāne

nānā-bhaṅgīte guṇa prakāśi’ nija-lābha māne

Synonyms

bhakta-guṇa — the attributes of a devotee; prakāśite — to manifest; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu; bhāla jāne — knows very well how; nānā-bhaṅgīte — by various ways; guṇa — attributes; prakāśi’ — manifesting; nija-lābha — His profit; māne — He considers.

Translation

The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, knows very well how to demonstrate the qualities of His devotees. Therefore, acting like an artistic painter, He does so in various ways and considers this His personal profit.

CC Antya 6.220

mahāprabhura bhakta-gaṇera vairāgya pradhāna

yāhā dekhi’ prīta hana gaura-bhagavān

Synonyms

mahāprabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu; bhakta-gaṇera — of the devotees; vairāgya — renunciation; pradhāna — the basic principle; yāhā dekhi’ — seeing which; prīta hana — becomes satisfied; gaura-bhagavān — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Translation

Renunciation is the basic principle sustaining the lives of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s devotees. Seeing this renunciation, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is extremely satisfied.

CC Antya 7.11

kali-kālera dharma — kṛṣṇa-nāma-saṅkīrtana

kṛṣṇa-śakti vinā nahe tāra pravartana

Synonyms

kali-kālera — of this age of Kali; dharma — the duty; kṛṣṇa-nāma-saṅkīrtana — chanting the holy name of Lord Kṛṣṇa; kṛṣṇa-śakti vinā — without being empowered by Lord Kṛṣṇa; nahe — is not; tāra — of that; pravartana — propagation.

Translation

“The fundamental religious system in the Age of Kali is the chanting of the holy name of Kṛṣṇa. Unless empowered by Kṛṣṇa, one cannot propagate the saṅkīrtana movement.

CC Antya 8.78

para-svabhāva-karmāṇina

praśaṁsen na garhayet

viśvam ekātmakaṁ paśyan

prakṛtyā puruṣeṇa ca

Synonyms

para-svabhāva-karmāṇi — the characteristics or activities of others; na — not; praśaṁset — one should praise; na — not; garhayet — should criticize; viśvam — the universe; eka-ātmakam — as one; paśyan — seeing; prakṛtyā — by nature; puruṣeṇa — by the living entity; ca — and.

Translation

“ ‘One should see that because of the meeting of material nature and the living entity, the universe is acting uniformly. Thus one should neither praise nor criticize the characteristics or activities of others.’

Purport

This verse from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (11.28.1) was spoken by Lord Kṛṣṇa to Uddhava.

CC Antya 9.8

manuṣyera veśe deva-gandharva-kinnara

sapta-pātālera yata daitya viṣadhara

Synonyms

manuṣyera veśe — in the dress of human beings; deva-gandharva-kinnara — the demigods, the Gandharvas and the Kinnaras; sapta-pātālera — of the seven lower planetary systems; yata — all kinds of; daitya — demons; viṣa-dhara — serpentine living entities.

Translation

The inhabitants of the seven higher planetary systems — including the demigods, the Gandharvas and the Kinnaras — and the inhabitants of the seven lower planetary systems [Pātālaloka], including the demons and serpentine living entities, all visited Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu in the dress of human beings.

CC Antya 9.9

sapta-dvīpe nava-khaṇḍe vaise yata jana

nānā-veśe āsi’ kare prabhura daraśana

Synonyms

sapta-dvīpe — in seven islands; nava-khaṇḍe — in nine khaṇḍas; vaise — reside; yata jana — all persons; nānā-veśe — in different dresses; āsi’ — coming; kare prabhura daraśana — visited Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.

Translation

Dressed in different ways, people from the seven islands and nine khaṇḍas visited Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.

CC Antya 10.18

bhāva-grāhī mahāprabhu sneha-mātra laya

sukutā pātā kāśandite mahā-sukha pāya

Synonyms

bhāva-grāhī — one who accepts the purpose; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu; sneha — affection; mātra — only; laya — accepts; sukutā pātā — in leaves of sukutā; kāśandite — in kāśandi; mahā-sukha — much pleasure; pāya — gets.

Translation

Since Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, He extracts the purpose from everything. He accepted Damayantī’s affection for Him, and therefore He derived great pleasure even from the dried bitter leaves of sukutā and from kāśandi [a sour condiment].

CC Antya 13.37

dūre rahi’ bhakti kariha saṅge nā rahibā

tāṅ-sabāra ācāra-ceṣṭā la-ite nāribā

Synonyms

dūre rahi’ — keeping apart; bhakti kariha — show devotion; saṅge — in association; nā rahibā — do not stay; tāṅ-sabāra — their; ācāra — behavior; ceṣṭā — endeavors; la-ite nāribā — you cannot take up.

Translation

“Do not mix freely with the residents of Mathurā; show them respect from a distance. Because you are on a different platform of devotional service, you cannot adopt their behavior and practices.

CC Antya 13.121

bhāgavata paḍa, sadā laha kṛṣṇa-nāma

acire karibena kṛpā kṛṣṇa bhagavān”

Synonyms

bhāgavata paḍa — read Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam; sadā — always; laha kṛṣṇa-nāma — chant the Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra; acire — very soon; karibena — will bestow; kṛpā — mercy; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa; bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Translation

“In Vṛndāvana you should chant the Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra twenty-four hours a day and read Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam continuously. Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, will very soon bestow His mercy upon you.”

CC Antya 15.27

karṇāmṛta, vidyāpati, śrī-gīta-govinda

ihāra śloka-gīte prabhura karāya ānanda

Synonyms

karṇāmṛta — the book Kṛṣṇa-karṇāmṛta; vidyāpati — the author Vidyāpati; śrī-gīta-govinda — the book Śrī Gīta-govinda, by Jayadeva Gosvāmī; ihāra — of these; śloka-gīte — verses and songs; prabhura — for Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu; karāya — create; ānanda — happiness.

Translation

The Lord especially liked to hear Bilvamaṅgala Ṭhākura’s Kṛṣṇa-karṇāmṛta, the poetry of Vidyāpati, and Śrī Gīta-govinda, by Jayadeva Gosvāmī. Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu felt great pleasure in His heart when His associates chanted verses and sang songs from these books.

CC Antya 16.25

na me ’bhaktaś catur-vedī

mad-bhaktaḥ śva-pacaḥ priyaḥ

tasmai deyaṁ tato grāhyaṁ

sa ca pūjyo yathā hy aham

Synonyms

na — not; me — My; abhaktaḥ — devoid of pure devotional service; catuḥ-vedī — a scholar of the four Vedas; mat-bhaktaḥ — My devotee; śva-pacaḥ — even from a family of dog-eaters; priyaḥ — very dear; tasmai — to him (the pure devotee); deyam — should be given; tataḥ — from him; grāhyam — should be accepted (remnants of food); saḥ — that person; ca — also; pūjyaḥ — is worshipable; yathā — as much as; hi — certainly; aham — I.

Translation

“ ‘Even though one is a very learned scholar in Sanskrit literature, if he is not engaged in pure devotional service, he is not accepted as My devotee. But if someone born in a family of dog-eaters is a pure devotee with no motives for enjoyment through fruitive activity or mental speculation, he is very dear to Me. All respect should be given to him, and whatever he offers should be accepted, for such devotees are indeed as worshipable as I am.’

Purport

This verse, spoken by the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is found in the Hari-bhakti-vilāsa.

CC Antya 16.41

siṁha-dvārera uttara-dike kapāṭera āḍe

bāiśa ‘pāhāca’-tale āche eka nimna gāḍe

Synonyms

siṁha-dvārera — of the Siṁha-dvāra; uttara-dike — on the northern side; kapāṭera āḍe — behind the door; bāiśa pāhāca — of the twenty-two steps; tale — at the bottom; āche — there is; eka — one; nimna — low; gāḍe — ditch.

Translation

On the northern side of the Siṁha-dvāra, behind the door, there are twenty-two steps leading to the temple, and at the bottom of those steps is a ditch.

CC Antya 16.52

namas te nara-siṁhāya

prahlādāhlāda-dāyine

hiraṇyakaśipor vakṣaḥ-

śilā-ṭaṅka-nakhālaye

Synonyms

namaḥ — I offer my respectful obeisances; te — unto You; nara-siṁhāya — Lord Nṛsiṁhadeva; prahlāda — to Mahārāja Prahlāda; āhlāda — of pleasure; dāyine — giver; hiraṇyakaśipoḥ — of Hiraṇyakaśipu; vakṣaḥ — chest; śilā — like stone; ṭaṅka — like the chisel; nakha-ālaye — whose fingernails.

Translation

“ ‘I offer my respectful obeisances unto You, Lord Nṛsiṁhadeva. You are the giver of pleasure to Mahārāja Prahlāda, and Your nails cut the chest of Hiraṇyakaśipu like a chisel cutting stone.

Purport

This and the following verse are quoted from the Nṛsiṁha Purāṇa.

CC Antya 16.53

ito nṛsiṁhaḥ parato nṛsiṁho

yato yato yāmi tato nṛsiṁhaḥ

bahir nṛsiṁho hṛdaye nṛsiṁho

nṛsiṁham ādiṁ śaraṇaṁ prapadye

Synonyms

itaḥ — here; nṛsiṁhaḥ — Lord Nṛsiṁha; parataḥ — on the opposite side; nṛsiṁhaḥ — Lord Nṛsiṁha; yataḥ yataḥ — wherever; yāmi — I go; tataḥ — there; nṛsiṁhaḥ — Lord Nṛsiṁha; bahiḥ — outside; nṛsiṁhaḥ — Lord Nṛsiṁha; hṛdaye — in my heart; nṛsiṁhaḥ — Lord Nṛsiṁha; nṛsiṁham — Lord Nṛsiṁha; ādim — the original Supreme Personality; śaraṇam prapadye — I take shelter of.

Translation

“ ‘Lord Nṛsiṁhadeva is here, and He is also there on the opposite side. Wherever I go, there I see Lord Nṛsiṁhadeva. He is outside and within my heart. Therefore I take shelter of Lord Nṛsiṁhadeva, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead.’ ”

CC Antya 19.91

kuranga-mada-jid-vapuh-parimalormi-krstanganah

svakanga-nalinastake sasi-yutabja-gandha-prathah

madenduvara-candanaguru-sugandhi-carcarcitah

sa me madana-mohanah sakhi tanoti nasa-sprham

SYNONYMS

kuranga-mada-jit — conquering the aromatic smell of musk; vapuh — of His transcendental body; parimala-urmi — with waves of scent; krsta-anganah — attracting the gopis of Vrndavana; svaka-anga-nalina-astake — on all eight lotuslike parts of the body (face, navel, eyes, palms and feet); sasi-yuta-abja-gandha-prathah — who distributes the scent of the lotus mixed with camphor; mada-induvara-candana-aguru-sugandhi-carca-arcitah — smeared with the unguents of musk, camphor, white sandalwood and aguru; sah — He; me — My; madana-mohanah — Lord Krsna, who enchants even Cupid; sakhi — O My dear friends; tanoti — increases; nasa-sprham -- the desire of My nostrils.

TRANSLATION

"'The scent of Krsna's transcendental body surpasses the aroma of musk and attracts the minds of all women. The eight lotuslike parts of His body distribute the fragrance of lotuses mixed with that of camphor. His body is anointed with aromatic substances like musk, camphor, sandalwood and aguru. O My dear friend, that Personality of Godhead, also known as the enchanter of Cupid, always increases the desire of My nostrils.'

PURPORT

This verse is found in the Govinda-lilamrta (8.6).

CC Antya 19.94

netra-nābhi, vadana, kara-yuga caraṇa,

ei aṣṭa-padma kṛṣṇa-aṅge

karpūra-lipta kamala, tāra yaiche parimala,

sei gandha aṣṭa-padma-saṅge

Synonyms

netra — the eyes; nābhi — the navel; vadana — the face; kara-yuga — the palms; caraṇa — the feet; ei — these; aṣṭa — eight; padma — lotus flowers; kṛṣṇa-aṅge — in the body of Kṛṣṇa; karpūra — with camphor; lipta — smeared; kamala — the lotus flower; tāra — of that; yaiche — like; parimala — the fragrance; sei gandha — that fragrance; aṣṭa-padma-saṅge — is associated with the eight lotus flowers.

Translation

“Kṛṣṇa’s eyes, navel and face, hands and feet are like eight lotus flowers on His body. From those eight lotuses emanates a fragrance like a mixture of camphor and lotus. That is the scent associated with His body.

CC Antya 19.95

hema-kīlita candana, tāhā kari’ gharṣaṇa,

tāhe aguru, kuṅkuma, kastūrī

karpūra-sane carcā aṅge, pūrva aṅgera gandha saṅge,

mili’ tāre yena kaila curi

Synonyms

hema — with gold; kīlita — bedecked; candana — white sandalwood; tāhā — that; kari’ — doing; gharṣaṇa — rubbing; tāhe — in that; aguru — the aguru fragrance; kuṅkuma — kuṅkuma; kastūrī — and musk; karpūra — camphor; sane — with; carcā — smearing; aṅge — on the body; pūrva — previous; aṅgera — of the body; gandha — scent; saṅge — with; mili’ — combining; tāre — that; yena — as if; kaila — did; curi — stealing or covering.

Translation

“When sandalwood pulp is mixed with aguru, kuṅkuma, musk and camphor and spread on Kṛṣṇa’s body, it combines with Kṛṣṇa’s own original bodily perfume and seems to cover it.

Purport

In another version, the last line of this verse reads kāmadevera mana kaila curi. This means “the scent of all these substances mixes with the previous scent of Kṛṣṇa’s body and steals away the mind of Cupid.”

CC Antya 20.12

ceto-darpaṇa-mārjanaṁ bhava-mahā-dāvāgni-nirvāpaṇaṁ

śreyaḥ-kairava-candrikā-vitaraṇaṁ vidyā-vadhū-jīvanam

ānandāmbudhi-vardhanaṁ prati-padaṁ pūrṇāmṛtāsvādanaṁ

sarvātma-snapanaṁ paraṁ vijayate śrī-kṛṣṇa-saṅkīrtanam

SYNONYMS

cetaḥ—of the heart; darpaṇa—the mirror; mārjanam—cleansing; bhava—of material existence; mahā-dāvāgni—the blazing forest fire; nirvāpaṇam—extinguishing; śreyaḥ—of good fortune; kairava—the white lotus; candrikā—the moonshine; vitaraṇam—spreading; vidyā—of all education; vadhū—wife; jīvanam—the life; ānanda—of bliss; ambudhi—the ocean; vardhanam—increasing; prati-padam—at every step; pūrṇa-amṛta—of the full nectar; āsvādanam—giving a taste; sarva—for everyone; ātma-snapanam—bathing of the self; param—transcendental; vijayate—let there be victory; śrī-kṛṣṇa-saṅkīrtanam—for the congregational chanting of the holy name of Kṛṣṇa.

TRANSLATION

“‘Let there be all victory for the chanting of the holy name of Lord Kṛṣṇa, which can cleanse the mirror of the heart and stop the miseries of the blazing fire of material existence. That chanting is the waxing moon that spreads the white lotus of good fortune for all living entities. It is the life and soul of all education. The chanting of the holy name of Kṛṣṇa expands the blissful ocean of transcendental life. It gives a cooling effect to everyone and enables one to taste full nectar at every step.’

PURPORT

This is the first verse of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s Śikṣāṣṭaka. The other seven verses are found in texts 16, 21, 29, 32, 36, 39 and 47.

CC Antya 20.29

na dhanaṁ na janaṁ na sundarīṁ

kavitāṁ vā jagad-īśa kāmaye

mama janmani janmanīśvare

bhavatād bhaktir ahaitukī tvayi

Synonyms

na — not; dhanam — riches; na — not; janam — followers; na — not; sundarīm — a very beautiful woman; kavitām — fruitive activities described in flowery language; vā — or; jagat-īśa — O Lord of the universe; kāmaye — I desire; mama — My; janmani — in birth; janmani — after birth; īśvare — unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead; bhavatāt — let there be; bhaktiḥ — devotional service; ahaitukī — with no motives; tvayi — unto You.

Translation

“ ‘O Lord of the universe, I do not desire material wealth, materialistic followers, a beautiful wife or fruitive activities described in flowery language. All I want, life after life, is unmotivated devotional service to You.’

CC Antya 20.87

caitanya-maṅgale ihā likhiyāche sthāne-sthāne

satya kahena, — ‘āge vyāsa kariba varṇane’

Synonyms

caitanya-maṅgale — in the book named Caitanya-maṅgala, now known as Caitanya-bhāgavata; ihā — this statement; likhiyāche — has written; sthāne-sthāne — in many places; satya — the truth; kahena — he says; āge — in the future; vyāsa kariba varṇane — Vyāsadeva will describe them more elaborately.

Translation

In the Caitanya-maṅgala, Śrīla Vṛndāvana dāsa Ṭhākura has stated in many places the factual truth that in the future Vyāsadeva will describe the Lord’s pastimes elaborately.

Śrī brahma-saṁhitā 5.29

cintāmaṇi-prakara-sadmasu kalpa-vṛkṣa-

lakṣāvṛteṣu surabhīr abhipālayantam

lakṣmī-sahasra-śata-sambhrama-sevyamānaṁ

govindam ādi-puruṣaṁ tam ahaṁ bhajāmi

Synonyms

cintāmaṇi — touchstone; prakara — groups made of; sadmasu — in abodes; kalpa-vṛkṣa — of desire trees; lakṣa — by millions; āvṛteṣu — surrounded; surabhīḥ — surabhi cows; abhipālayantam — tending; lakṣmī — of goddesses of fortune; sahasra — of thousands; śata — by hundreds; sambhrama — with great respect; sevyamānam — being served; govindam — Govinda; ādi-puruṣam — the original person; tam — Him; aham — I; bhajāmi — worship.

Translation

I worship Govinda, the primeval Lord, the first progenitor who is tending the cows, yielding all desire, in abodes built with spiritual gems, surrounded by millions of purpose trees, always served with great reverence and affection by hundreds of thousands of lakṣmīs or gopīs.

Śrī brahma-saṁhitā 5.30

veṇuṁ kvaṇantam aravinda-dalāyatākṣam-

barhāvataṁsam asitāmbuda-sundarāṅgam

kandarpa-koṭi-kamanīya-viśeṣa-śobhaṁ

govindam ādi-puruṣaṁ tam ahaṁ bhajāmi

Synonyms

veṇum — the flute; kvaṇantam — playing; aravinda-dala — (like) lotus petals; āyata — blooming; akṣam — whose eyes; barha — a peacock's feather; avataṁsam — whose ornament on the head; asita-ambuda — (tinged with the hue of) blue clouds; sundara — beautiful; aṅgam — whose figure; kandarpa — of Cupids; koṭi — millions; kamanīya — charming; viśeṣa — unique; śobham — whose loveliness; govindam — Govinda; ādi-puruṣam — the original person; tam — Him; aham — I; bhajāmi — worship.

Translation

I worship Govinda, the primeval Lord, who is adept in playing on His flute, with blooming eyes like lotus petals with head decked with peacock's feather, with the figure of beauty tinged with the hue of blue clouds, and His unique loveliness charming millions of Cupids.

Śrī brahma-saṁhitā 5.32

aṅgāni yasya sakalendriya-vṛtti-manti

paśyanti pānti kalayanti ciraṁ jaganti

ānanda-cinmaya-sad-ujjvala-vigrahasya

govindam ādi-puruṣaṁ tam ahaṁ bhajāmi

Synonyms

aṅgāni — the limbs; yasya — of whom; sakala-indriya — of all the organs; vṛtti-manti — possessing the functions; paśyanti — see; pānti — maintain; kalayanti — manifest; ciram — eternally; jaganti — the universes; ānanda — bliss; cit — truth; maya — full of; sat — substantiality; ujjvala — full of dazzling splendor; vigrahasya — whose form; govindam — Govinda; ādi-puruṣam — the original person; tam — Him; aham — I; bhajāmi — worship.

Translation

I worship Govinda, the primeval Lord, whose transcendental form is full of bliss, truth, substantiality and is thus full of the most dazzling splendor. Each of the limbs of that transcendental figure possesses in Himself, the full-fledged functions of all the organs, and eternally sees, maintains and manifests the infinite universes, both spiritual and mundane.

Śrī brahma-saṁhitā 5.33

advaitam acyutam anādim ananta-rūpam

ādyaṁ purāṇa-puruṣaṁ nava-yauvanaṁ ca

vedeṣu durlabham adurlabham ātma-bhaktau

govindam ādi-puruṣaṁ tam ahaṁ bhajāmi

Synonyms

advaitam — without a second; acyutam — without decay; anādim — without a beginning; ananta-rūpam — whose form is endless, or who possesses unlimited forms; ādyam — the beginning; purāṇa-puruṣam — the most ancient person; nava-yauvanam — a blooming youth; ca — also; vedeṣu — through the Vedas; durlabham — inaccessible; adurlabham — not difficult to obtain; ātma-bhaktau — through pure devotion of the soul; govindam — Govinda; ādi-puruṣam — the original person; tam — Him; aham — I; bhajāmi — worship.

Translation

“I worship Govinda, the primeval Lord, who is nondual and infallible. He is the original cause of all causes, even though He expands in many, many forms. Although He is the oldest personality, He is ever youthful, unaffected by old age. The Supreme Personality of Godhead cannot be known by the academic wisdom of the Vedas; one has to approach the devotee of the Lord to understand Him.” (From Srimad Bhagavatam 3.9.3 purport)

Śrī brahma-saṁhitā 5.38

premāñjana-cchurita-bhakti-vilocanena

santaḥ sadaiva hṛdayeṣu vilokayanti

yaṁ śyāmasundaram acintya-guṇa-svarūpaṁ

govindam ādi-puruṣaṁ tam ahaṁ bhajāmi

Synonyms

prema — of love; añjana — with the salve; churita — tinged; bhakti — of devotion; vilocanena — with the eye; santaḥ — the pure devotees; sadā — always; eva — indeed; hṛdayeṣu — in their hearts; vilokayanti — see; yam — whom; śyāma — dark blue; sundaram — beautiful; acintya — inconceivable; guṇa — with attributes; svarūpam — whose nature is endowed; govindam — Govinda; ādi-puruṣam — the original person; tam — Him; aham — I; bhajāmi — worship.

Translation

Śrī brahma-saṁhitā 5.42

ānanda-cinmaya-rasātmatayā manaḥsu yaḥ

prāṇināṁ pratiphalan smaratām upetya

līlāyitena bhuvanāni jayaty ajasram-

govindam ādi-puruṣaṁ tam ahaṁ bhajāmi

Synonyms

ānanda — blissful; cit-maya — cognitive; rasa — of rasa; ātmatayā — due to being the entity; manaḥsu — in the minds; yaḥ — He who; prāṇinām — of living entities; pratiphalan — being reflected; smaratām upetya— recollecting; līlāyitena — by pastimes; bhuvanāni — the mundane world; jayati — triumphantly dominates; ajasram — ever; govindam — Govinda; ādi-puruṣam — the original person; tam — Him; aham — I; bhajāmi — worship.

Translation

I worship Govinda, the primeval Lord, whose glory ever triumphantly dominates the mundane world by the activity of His own pastimes, being reflected in the mind of recollecting souls as the transcendental entity of ever-blissful cognitive rasa.

Please click for more info on Srimad Bhagavatam

“Non nobis, Domine, non nobis; sed nomine tuo da gloriam”, is the well-known Latin translation of Psalm 115:1: “Not unto us, O Lord, not unto us; but to your name be the glory.”

Search This Blog

Vegetarian Recipes

Selected Verses of the Vedas, Acarya's, Bhagavad-gita, Srimad Bhagavatam and Sri Caitanya-caritamrta

Comments

Post a Comment

Popular Posts

Srimad Bhagavatam - Summary and Study Guide - First Canto